Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 268

CLI Command Guide

Skylight Element: GX
Version 7.9.4
Revision 1 — August 1, 2022
CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Publication Information
Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4 CLI Command Guide
Revision 1 — Publication date: August 1, 2022

Trademark Information
© 2022 Accedian Networks Inc. All rights reserved. Accedian™, the Accedian logo™, Skylight™, Skylight
Interceptor™ and per-packet intel™, are trademarks or registered trademarks of Accedian Networks Inc.
To view a list of Accedian trademarks visit: http://accedian.com/legal/trademarks.
All other company and product names may be trademarks of their respective companies. Accedian may,
from time to time, make changes to the products or specifications contained herein without notice. Some
certifications may be pending final approval; please contact Accedian for current certifications.
Accedian’s products are protected by patents as indicated on Accedian’s website, located at
http://www.accedian.com/en/legal.html
The mention of any product herein does not constitute an endorsement by Accedian Networks Inc.
The content of this publication is provided for informational use only, is subject to change without notice
and should not be construed as a commitment by Accedian Networks Inc. Accedian Networks Inc. assumes
no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document.
Except as expressly permitted in writing, no part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any
retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, recording, or
otherwise, without prior written consent of Accedian Networks Inc.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated into new
editions of this publication. Accedian Networks Inc. may make improvements and/or changes in the
products and/or software programs described in this publication at any time.

Contact
If you have comments regarding this manual, please address them to:

Accedian Networks Inc.


Attention: Technical Publications
2351 Alfred-Nobel Blvd., Suite N-410
Saint-Laurent, Québec
Canada H4S 2A9

Tel: 514-331-6181
Fax: 514-331-2210
techpubs@accedian.com
accedian.com

Revision 1 — August 2022 2


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Table of Contents

1. About This Guide ............................................................................................... 14


1.1 Requirements ............................................................................................................................................. 14
1.2 Organization................................................................................................................................................ 14
1.3 References ................................................................................................................................................... 14
1.4 Conventions ................................................................................................................................................ 15

2. Skylight element: GX Command Overview ................................................. 16


2.1 Ethernet Port Commands ....................................................................................................................... 16
2.2 User Traffic/Flow Through Commands ............................................................................................... 16
2.3 System Management Commands ......................................................................................................... 17
2.4 OAM Commands ........................................................................................................................................ 18
2.5 Utilities .......................................................................................................................................................... 19
2.6 Miscellaneous Commands ...................................................................................................................... 20

3. Syntax Meta-Characters and Variables........................................................ 21


4. CLI Commands .................................................................................................... 23
4.1 ACL Add List................................................................................................................................................ 23
4.2 ACL Delete Interface ................................................................................................................................. 23
4.3 ACL Delete List ........................................................................................................................................... 23
4.4 ACL Edit Interface ..................................................................................................................................... 24
4.5 ACL Edit List ............................................................................................................................................... 24
4.6 ACL Show Interface ..................................................................................................................................25
4.7 ACL Show List ........................................................................................................................................... 26
4.8 Alarm Edit ................................................................................................................................................... 26
4.9 Alarm Reporting......................................................................................................................................... 27
4.10 Alarm Show Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 27
4.11 Alarm Show Reporting ............................................................................................................................ 27
4.12 Alarm Show Status .................................................................................................................................. 28
4.13 Application Edit File Transfers .............................................................................................................. 28
4.14 Application Edit Web .............................................................................................................................. 29
4.15 Application Show ...................................................................................................................................... 29
4.16 Bandwidth Regulator Add Envelope .................................................................................................. 29
4.17 Bandwidth Regulator Add Regulator ................................................................................................. 30
4.18 Bandwidth Regulator Clear Regulator Statistics ............................................................................. 30
4.19 Bandwidth Regulator Delete Envelope .............................................................................................. 31
4.20 Bandwidth Regulator Delete Regulator ............................................................................................. 31
4.21 Bandwidth Regulator Edit Envelope ................................................................................................... 31

Revision 1 — August 2022 3


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.22 Bandwidth Regulator Edit Regulator .................................................................................................. 32


4.23 Bandwidth Regulator Show Envelope Configuration.....................................................................33
4.24 Bandwidth Regulator Show Regulator Configuration ...................................................................33
4.25 Bandwidth Regulator Show Regulator Statistics ............................................................................33
4.26 Beacon Add L3 ........................................................................................................................................... 34
4.27 Beacon Delete L3 ...................................................................................................................................... 36
4.28 Beacon Edit L3 ........................................................................................................................................... 36
4.29 Beacon Send L3 One-Shot ..................................................................................................................... 38
4.30 Beacon Show L3 Configuration ............................................................................................................ 38
4.31 Board Show CPU ...................................................................................................................................... 39
4.32 Board Show Info ....................................................................................................................................... 39
4.33 Board Show Start Time ........................................................................................................................... 39
4.34 Board Show Status .................................................................................................................................. 39
4.35 Board Show Uptime................................................................................................................................. 40
4.36 Board Show Uptime Seconds................................................................................................................ 40
4.37 Bridge Clear Statistics.............................................................................................................................. 40
4.38 Bridge Edit ................................................................................................................................................... 41
4.39 Bridge Show Configuration .................................................................................................................... 41
4.40 Bridge Show Statistics ............................................................................................................................ 42
4.41 Bridge Show Status ................................................................................................................................. 42
4.42 Certificate Delete ...................................................................................................................................... 42
4.43 Certificate Import ...................................................................................................................................... 43
4.44 Certificate Show ........................................................................................................................................ 43
4.45 CFM Add DMM .......................................................................................................................................... 44
4.46 CFM Add Domain ..................................................................................................................................... 45
4.47 CFM Add MA .............................................................................................................................................. 46
4.48 CFM Add MEG ........................................................................................................................................... 48
4.49 CFM Add MEP ........................................................................................................................................... 50
4.50 CFM Add Packet Loss...............................................................................................................................52
4.51 CFM Add SLM .............................................................................................................................................53
4.52 CFM Assign Interface ...............................................................................................................................53
4.53 CFM Clear MEP Statistics ....................................................................................................................... 54
4.54 CFM Clear Packet Loss Result............................................................................................................... 54
4.55 CFM Clear SLM Result ..............................................................................................................................55
4.56 CFM Clear Statistics ..................................................................................................................................55
4.57 CFM Clear VSP Result...............................................................................................................................55
4.58 CFM Delete DMM ......................................................................................................................................55
4.59 CFM Delete Domain ................................................................................................................................. 56
4.60 CFM Delete MA ......................................................................................................................................... 56
4.61 CFM Delete MEG ....................................................................................................................................... 57
4.62 CFM Delete MEP ........................................................................................................................................ 57
4.63 CFM Delete Packet Loss .......................................................................................................................... 57

Revision 1 — August 2022 4


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.64 CFM Delete SLM ....................................................................................................................................... 58


4.65 CFM Edit Defaults .................................................................................................................................... 58
4.66 CFM Edit Default-Maid-String-Format-Mode ................................................................................. 59
4.67 CFM Edit DMM .......................................................................................................................................... 59
4.68 CFM Edit DMM Test ID TLV ................................................................................................................... 61
4.69 CFM Edit Domain ....................................................................................................................................... 61
4.70 CFM Edit MA .............................................................................................................................................. 62
4.71 CFM Edit MEG ........................................................................................................................................... 63
4.72 CFM Edit MEP............................................................................................................................................ 64
4.73 CFM Edit Packet Loss .............................................................................................................................. 66
4.74 CFM Edit SLM ............................................................................................................................................ 66
4.75 CFM Edit VSP ............................................................................................................................................. 67
4.76 CFM LBM .................................................................................................................................................... 67
4.77 CFM LTM ..................................................................................................................................................... 69
4.78 CFM Show Defaults ................................................................................................................................. 69
4.79 CFM Show Default-Maid-String-Format-Mode ............................................................................. 70
4.80 CFM Show DMM Configuration ........................................................................................................... 70
4.81 CFM Show DMM Result .......................................................................................................................... 71
4.82 CFM Show DMM test ID TLV ................................................................................................................. 71
4.83 CFM Show Domain Configuration ........................................................................................................ 72
4.84 CFM Show Interface ................................................................................................................................. 72
4.85 CFM Show Latest Error ........................................................................................................................... 72
4.86 CFM Show LTR ........................................................................................................................................... 73
4.87 CFM Show MA Configuration ................................................................................................................ 73
4.88 CFM Show Ma-Maid-String-Format-Mode ....................................................................................... 73
4.89 CFM Show MEG Configuration............................................................................................................. 74
4.90 CFM Show MEP Configuration ............................................................................................................. 74
4.91 CFM Show MEP Database ...................................................................................................................... 75
4.92 CFM Show MEP Statistics ....................................................................................................................... 75
4.93 CFM Show MEP Status ............................................................................................................................ 75
4.94 CFM Show Packet Loss Configuration ............................................................................................... 76
4.95 CFM Show Packet Loss Result ............................................................................................................. 76
4.96 CFM Show SLM Configuration .............................................................................................................. 77
4.97 CFM Show SLM Result ............................................................................................................................. 77
4.98 CFM Show Stack ....................................................................................................................................... 78
4.99 CFM Show Statistics ................................................................................................................................ 78
4.100 CFM Show VSP Configuration .............................................................................................................. 78
4.101 CFM Show VSP Result ............................................................................................................................ 79
4.102 CFM Stop LBM........................................................................................................................................... 79
4.103 CFM Unassign Interface ......................................................................................................................... 79
4.104 Clilog Edit .................................................................................................................................................... 79
4.105 Clilog Show Configuration .....................................................................................................................80

Revision 1 — August 2022 5


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.106 Clilog Show Log.........................................................................................................................................80


4.107 Clilog Show Log Continuous .................................................................................................................80
4.108 Configuration Cancel ...............................................................................................................................80
4.109 Configuration Changes ............................................................................................................................ 81
4.110 Configuration Export ................................................................................................................................ 81
4.111 Configuration Generate-Script .............................................................................................................. 81
4.112 Configuration Import ............................................................................................................................... 82
4.113 Configuration Reset ................................................................................................................................. 83
4.114 Configuration Rollback ............................................................................................................................ 83
4.115 Console Disable ......................................................................................................................................... 83
4.116 Console Enable .......................................................................................................................................... 83
4.117 Console Show ............................................................................................................................................ 84
4.118 COS PCP Map Edit .................................................................................................................................... 84
4.119 COS PCP Map Show Configuration ..................................................................................................... 85
4.120 COS Profile Add/Edit DSCP .................................................................................................................... 85
4.121 COS Profile Add/Edit PCP ....................................................................................................................... 86
4.122 COS Profile Add/Edit Precedence ........................................................................................................ 87
4.123 COS Profile Delete ....................................................................................................................................88
4.124 COS Profile Show Configuration ..........................................................................................................88
4.125 CPU Edit OAM Options ........................................................................................................................... 89
4.126 CPU Show OAM Options ........................................................................................................................ 89
4.127 Date .............................................................................................................................................................. 90
4.128 DHCP Relay Edit ........................................................................................................................................ 91
4.129 DHCP Relay Show Configuration ......................................................................................................... 92
4.130 DNS Edit ...................................................................................................................................................... 92
4.131 DNS Show ................................................................................................................................................... 93
4.132 Dry-Contact-Input Edit ........................................................................................................................... 93
4.133 Dry-Contact-Input Show Configuration ............................................................................................ 94
4.134 Dry-Contact-Input Show Status .......................................................................................................... 94
4.135 ERP Add ...................................................................................................................................................... 94
4.136 ERP Clear Command ................................................................................................................................ 95
4.137 ERP Clear Statistics .................................................................................................................................. 96
4.138 ERP Delete .................................................................................................................................................. 96
4.139 ERP Edit ...................................................................................................................................................... 96
4.140 ERP Flush FDB .......................................................................................................................................... 97
4.141 ERP Force Switch ..................................................................................................................................... 97
4.142 ERP Manual Switch .................................................................................................................................. 98
4.143 ERP Show Configuration ........................................................................................................................ 98
4.144 ERP Show Statistics ................................................................................................................................. 98
4.145 ERP Show Status ...................................................................................................................................... 98
4.146 ERP Show VLAN-FDB............................................................................................................................. 99
4.147 Exit/Quit ...................................................................................................................................................... 99

Revision 1 — August 2022 6


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.148 Fan Test Edit .............................................................................................................................................. 99


4.149 Fan Test Show......................................................................................................................................... 100
4.150 Fan Test Start .......................................................................................................................................... 100
4.151 Fault Propagation Edit .......................................................................................................................... 100
4.152 Fault Propagation Enable/Disable ...................................................................................................... 101
4.153 Fault Propagation Show ........................................................................................................................ 101
4.154 Filter Delete IPv4 ..................................................................................................................................... 101
4.155 Filter Delete IPv6 ..................................................................................................................................... 101
4.156 Filter Delete L2 .........................................................................................................................................102
4.157 Filter Add/Edit IPv4 .................................................................................................................................102
4.158 Filter Add/Edit IPv6 ................................................................................................................................ 105
4.159 Filter Add/Edit L2 .................................................................................................................................... 108
4.160 Filter Show L2/IPv4/IPv6 ....................................................................................................................... 110
4.161 Firmware Activate ................................................................................................................................... 110
4.162 Firmware Clear Download .................................................................................................................... 110
4.163 Firmware Download ................................................................................................................................ 111
4.164 Firmware Rollback ................................................................................................................................... 111
4.165 Firmware Upgrade ................................................................................................................................... 112
4.166 Firmware Version ..................................................................................................................................... 112
4.167 GPS Edit ....................................................................................................................................................... 112
4.168 GPS Show Configuration ........................................................................................................................113
4.169 GPS Show Status ......................................................................................................................................113
4.170 Help ..............................................................................................................................................................113
4.171 History Edit File .........................................................................................................................................113
4.172 History Edit Local .................................................................................................................................... 114
4.173 History Edit Scheduling ......................................................................................................................... 116
4.174 History Show File ..................................................................................................................................... 117
4.175 History Show Local .................................................................................................................................. 117
4.176 History Show Scheduling ...................................................................................................................... 118
4.177 Interface Add/Edit ................................................................................................................................... 118
4.178 Interface Advertisement Edit ................................................................................................................ 121
4.179 Interface Advertisement Show ............................................................................................................. 121
4.180 Interface Auxiliary-MAC Show ............................................................................................................ 122
4.181 Interface Beacon Edit ............................................................................................................................. 122
4.182 Interface Beacon Show .......................................................................................................................... 123
4.183 Interface Delete ........................................................................................................................................ 123
4.184 Interface Discovery Edit......................................................................................................................... 124
4.185 Interface Discovery Show ..................................................................................................................... 125
4.186 Interface Primary Clear .......................................................................................................................... 126
4.187 Interface Primary Set .............................................................................................................................. 126
4.188 Interface Primary Show ......................................................................................................................... 126
4.189 Interface Refresh ..................................................................................................................................... 126

Revision 1 — August 2022 7


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.190 Interface Show ......................................................................................................................................... 127


4.191 Inventory Edit ...........................................................................................................................................128
4.192 Inventory Show ........................................................................................................................................128
4.193 IPv4 Edit Options ..................................................................................................................................... 129
4.194 IPv4 Show Options ................................................................................................................................. 129
4.195 Keepalive ................................................................................................................................................... 130
4.196 L2PT Add/Edit.......................................................................................................................................... 130
4.197 L2PT Clear .................................................................................................................................................. 132
4.198 L2PT Delete ............................................................................................................................................... 133
4.199 L2PT Edit Global ....................................................................................................................................... 133
4.200 L2PT Show Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 133
4.201 L2PT Show Statistics ..............................................................................................................................134
4.202 LACP Clear Statistics ...............................................................................................................................134
4.203 LACP Edit ...................................................................................................................................................134
4.204 LACP Show Configuration .................................................................................................................... 135
4.205 LACP Show Statistics ............................................................................................................................. 135
4.206 LACP Show Status .................................................................................................................................. 136
4.207 LLDP Edit ................................................................................................................................................... 137
4.208 LLDP Show Configuration ................................................................................................................... 138
4.209 LLDP Show Local Info ........................................................................................................................... 138
4.210 LLDP Show Neighbors .......................................................................................................................... 138
4.211 LLDP Show Statistics ............................................................................................................................ 138
4.212 Loopback Edit ........................................................................................................................................... 139
4.213 Loopback Show ....................................................................................................................................... 140
4.214 Loop-Detection Add Link ..................................................................................................................... 140
4.215 Loop-Detection Add Tunnel ................................................................................................................. 141
4.216 Loop-Detection Clear All Counters ..................................................................................................... 142
4.217 Loop-Detection Clear Global Counter ................................................................................................ 142
4.218 Loop-Detection Clear Link Counters .................................................................................................. 142
4.219 Loop-Detection Clear Tunnel Counters............................................................................................. 142
4.220 Loop-Detection Delete Link .................................................................................................................143
4.221 Loop-Detection Delete Tunnel ............................................................................................................143
4.222 Loop-Detection Diagnostic Send ........................................................................................................143
4.223 Loop-Detection Diagnostic Show Status ........................................................................................ 144
4.224 Loop-Detection Edit Link ..................................................................................................................... 144
4.225 Loop-Detection Edit Tunnel .................................................................................................................145
4.226 Loop-Detection Show All Configuration...........................................................................................145
4.227 Loop-Detection Show All Counters....................................................................................................145
4.228 Loop-Detection Show All Status ........................................................................................................ 146
4.229 Loop-Detection Show Global Counter ............................................................................................. 146
4.230 Loop-Detection Show Link Configuration ...................................................................................... 146
4.231 Loop-Detection Show Link Counters ............................................................................................... 146

Revision 1 — August 2022 8


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.232 Loop-Detection Show Link Status ..................................................................................................... 147


4.233 Loop-Detection Show Tunnel Configuration .................................................................................. 147
4.234 Loop-Detection Show Tunnel Counters ........................................................................................... 147
4.235 Loop-Detection Show Tunnel Status ............................................................................................... 148
4.236 Loop-Detection Traffic Block Link ..................................................................................................... 148
4.237 Loop-Detection Traffic Block Tunnel ................................................................................................ 148
4.238 Loop-Detection Traffic Clear Link ...................................................................................................... 149
4.239 Loop-Detection Traffic Clear Tunnel ................................................................................................ 149
4.240 Mode Edit.................................................................................................................................................. 149
4.241 Mode Show .............................................................................................................................................. 150
4.242 Monitor Edit ............................................................................................................................................. 150
4.243 Monitor Show Configuration .............................................................................................................. 150
4.244 MOTD Edit ..................................................................................................................................................151
4.245 MOTD Show ...............................................................................................................................................151
4.246 MTR Edit .....................................................................................................................................................151
4.247 MTR Enable/Disable................................................................................................................................ 152
4.248 MTR Show ................................................................................................................................................. 152
4.249 NETCONF Edit State ............................................................................................................................... 152
4.250 NETCONF Show....................................................................................................................................... 152
4.251 NTP Add ..................................................................................................................................................... 153
4.252 NTP Delete ................................................................................................................................................ 153
4.253 NTP Disable ............................................................................................................................................... 153
4.254 NTP Disable Server ................................................................................................................................. 153
4.255 NTP Edit .....................................................................................................................................................154
4.256 NTP Enable ................................................................................................................................................ 155
4.257 NTP Enable Server .................................................................................................................................. 156
4.258 NTP Show .................................................................................................................................................. 156
4.259 OAM Add/Edit .......................................................................................................................................... 156
4.260 OAM Clear Statistics ............................................................................................................................... 157
4.261 OAM Delete ............................................................................................................................................... 157
4.262 OAM Show Configuration .................................................................................................................... 158
4.263 OAM Show Events ................................................................................................................................. 158
4.264 OAM Show Statistics ............................................................................................................................. 158
4.265 OAM Show Status ................................................................................................................................... 159
4.266 PAA Add/Edit L2 ...................................................................................................................................... 159
4.267 PAA Add/Edit UDP .................................................................................................................................. 162
4.268 PAA Add/Edit UDP IPv6 ........................................................................................................................ 167
4.269 PAA Delete ............................................................................................................................................... 169
4.270 PAA Show Configuration ......................................................................................................................170
4.271 PAA Show Result ....................................................................................................................................170
4.272 PAA Show Status ....................................................................................................................................170
4.273 Permission-Group Add ........................................................................................................................... 171

Revision 1 — August 2022 9


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.274 Permission-Group Delete ....................................................................................................................... 171


4.275 Permission-Group Edit ............................................................................................................................ 171
4.276 Permission-Group Show ....................................................................................................................... 172
4.277 Ping .............................................................................................................................................................. 172
4.278 Ping6 ........................................................................................................................................................... 173
4.279 PMCollect Edit Configuration ............................................................................................................... 173
4.280 PMCollect Show Configuration ........................................................................................................... 174
4.281 PMCollect Show Descriptors ................................................................................................................ 174
4.282 Policy Clear Statistics .............................................................................................................................. 174
4.283 Policy Edit .................................................................................................................................................. 174
4.284 Policy Show Configuration ................................................................................................................... 177
4.285 Policy Show Statistics ............................................................................................................................ 177
4.286 Port Clear Statistics .................................................................................................................................178
4.287 Port Edit .....................................................................................................................................................178
4.288 Port Show Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 181
4.289 Port Show Statistics ............................................................................................................................... 181
4.290 Port Show Status.....................................................................................................................................182
4.291 PTP Edit ......................................................................................................................................................182
4.292 PTP Reset ................................................................................................................................................. 183
4.293 PTP Show ................................................................................................................................................. 184
4.294 RADIUS Edit ............................................................................................................................................. 184
4.295 RADIUS Show .......................................................................................................................................... 185
4.296 Rate Edit.................................................................................................................................................... 185
4.297 Rate Show ................................................................................................................................................ 186
4.298 Reboot ....................................................................................................................................... 186
4.299 Regulator-Set Add/Edit DSCP............................................................................................................. 186
4.300 Regulator-Set Add/Edit PCP ................................................................................................................187
4.301 Regulator-Set Add/Edit Precedence ................................................................................................. 188
4.302 Regulator-Set Delete ............................................................................................................................. 188
4.303 Regulator-Set Show Configuration ................................................................................................... 189
4.304 RFC-2544 Generator Edit ..................................................................................................................... 189
4.305 RFC-2544 Generator Show Configuration ....................................................................................... 193
4.306 RFC-2544 Generator Show Results ................................................................................................... 193
4.307 RFC-2544 Generator Start .................................................................................................................... 193
4.308 RFC-2544 Generator Stop .................................................................................................................... 194
4.309 RFC-2544 Monitor Clear Statistics .................................................................................................... 194
4.310 RFC-2544 Monitor Edit ......................................................................................................................... 194
4.311 RFC-2544 Monitor Show Configuration .......................................................................................... 196
4.312 RFC-2544 Monitor Show Results ....................................................................................................... 197
4.313 RFC-2544 Test Suite Add ...................................................................................................................... 197
4.314 RFC-2544 Test Suite Delete .................................................................................................................201
4.315 RFC-2544 Test Suite Edit ......................................................................................................................201

Revision 1 — August 2022 10


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.316 RFC-2544 Test Suite Show Configuration ...................................................................................... 205


4.317 RFC-2544 Test Suite Show Reports ................................................................................................. 205
4.318 RFC-2544 Test Suite Start ...................................................................................................................206
4.319 RFC-2544 Test Suite Stop ....................................................................................................................206
4.320 RFC-2544 Test Suite Upload ............................................................................................................... 207
4.321 Route Add/Edit and Route IPv6 Add/Edit ....................................................................................... 207
4.322 Route Delete and Route IPv6 Delete ............................................................................................... 208
4.323 Route Show ..............................................................................................................................................209
4.324 SA Add Metric ..........................................................................................................................................209
4.325 SA Add Service .........................................................................................................................................210
4.326 SA Clear Service Counters ...................................................................................................................... 211
4.327 SA Delete Metric ....................................................................................................................................... 211
4.328 SA Delete Service ..................................................................................................................................... 212
4.329 SA Edit Metric ........................................................................................................................................... 212
4.330 SA Edit Service.......................................................................................................................................... 213
4.331 SA Show Metric Configuration ............................................................................................................ 214
4.332 SA Show Metric Counters ..................................................................................................................... 215
4.333 SA Show Service Configuration ........................................................................................................... 215
4.334 SA Show Service Counters .................................................................................................................... 215
4.335 SAT Protocol Clear Statistics ................................................................................................................ 216
4.336 SAT Protocol Edit .................................................................................................................................... 216
4.337 SAT Protocol Show Configuration ...................................................................................................... 217
4.338 SAT Protocol Show Sessions ................................................................................................................ 217
4.339 SAT Protocol Show Statistics ............................................................................................................... 217
4.340 SAT Reporting Edit ................................................................................................................................. 217
4.341 SAT Reporting Show Configuration ...................................................................................................218
4.342 Session Edit ...............................................................................................................................................218
4.343 Session Show Configuration ............................................................................................................... 220
4.344 Session Show Status ............................................................................................................................. 220
4.345 Session Terminate .................................................................................................................................. 220
4.346 SFP Dump ................................................................................................................................................. 220
4.347 SFP Edit ...................................................................................................................................................... 221
4.348 SFP Show ................................................................................................................................................... 221
4.349 SFP Show Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 221
4.350 SFP Show Status ..................................................................................................................................... 221
4.351 Shaping Clear Queue Statistics ............................................................................................................222
4.352 Shaping Edit Port Shaper ......................................................................................................................222
4.353 Shaping Edit Queue ................................................................................................................................223
4.354 Shaping Show Port Shaper Configuration ...................................................................................... 224
4.355 Shaping Show Queue Configuration ................................................................................................. 224
4.356 Shaping Show Queue Statistics .......................................................................................................... 225
4.357 Shaping Show Queuing Profile Configuration ............................................................................... 225

Revision 1 — August 2022 11


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.358 SNMP Edit ................................................................................................................................................ 226


4.359 SNMP Show .............................................................................................................................................. 227
4.360 SNMP Trap Edit Auto ............................................................................................................................. 227
4.361 SNMP Trap Edit V1 .................................................................................................................................. 227
4.362 SNMP Trap Edit V2c .............................................................................................................................. 228
4.363 SNMP Trap Show ................................................................................................................................... 228
4.364 Statistics Clear ......................................................................................................................................... 229
4.365 Syntax ........................................................................................................................................................ 229
4.366 Syslog Edit ................................................................................................................................................ 229
4.367 Syslog Show Configuration ................................................................................................................. 230
4.368 Syslog Show Log ..................................................................................................................................... 231
4.369 Syslog Show Log Continuous .............................................................................................................. 231
4.370 System Add OS-Service http-server http-origin ............................................................................ 231
4.371 System Edit OS-Service http-server .................................................................................................. 231
4.372 System Show OS-Service ......................................................................................................................232
4.373 System Monitor Edit ...............................................................................................................................232
4.374 System Monitor Show........................................................................................................................... 234
4.375 System Show Status .............................................................................................................................. 234
4.376 TACACS-plus Edit ................................................................................................................................... 234
4.377 Help TACACS-plus edit ......................................................................................................................... 236
4.378 TACACS-plus Show .................................................................................................................................237
4.379 Help TACACS-plus show .......................................................................................................................237
4.380 TCP Connect ..............................................................................................................................................237
4.381 Tech Support Export ...............................................................................................................................237
4.382 Tech Support Generate ......................................................................................................................... 238
4.383 Tech Support Show................................................................................................................................ 238
4.384 Tech-Support Show Report-Transmission ..................................................................................... 238
4.385 Tech-Support Edit Report-Transmission ........................................................................................ 239
4.386 Traceroute ................................................................................................................................................ 239
4.387 Traceroute6 ..............................................................................................................................................240
4.388 Traffic Edit Mode ..................................................................................................................................... 241
4.389 Traffic Show .............................................................................................................................................. 241
4.390 TWAMP Clear Statistics ........................................................................................................................ 241
4.391 TWAMP Edit ............................................................................................................................................ 242
4.392 TWAMP Generator Add ....................................................................................................................... 242
4.393 TWAMP Generator Delete................................................................................................................... 244
4.394 TWAMP Generator Edit ....................................................................................................................... 245
4.395 TWAMP Generator Show Configuration......................................................................................... 247
4.396 TWAMP Generator Show Results ..................................................................................................... 247
4.397 TWAMP Generator Show Status .......................................................................................................248
4.398 TWAMP Show Configuration .............................................................................................................248
4.399 TWAMP Show Statistics ......................................................................................................................248

Revision 1 — August 2022 12


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.400 User Add/Edit .......................................................................................................................................... 249


4.401 User Delete ............................................................................................................................................... 249
4.402 User Permissions Edit ........................................................................................................................... 250
4.403 User Permissions Show ........................................................................................................................ 250
4.404 User Show ................................................................................................................................................ 250
4.405 VCAgent Edit Collection......................................................................................................................... 251
4.406 VCAgent Edit Configuration ................................................................................................................. 251
4.407 VCAgent Show Configuration.............................................................................................................. 251
4.408 VCAgent Show Descriptors .................................................................................................................. 251
4.409 Version ........................................................................................................................................ 251
4.410 VID-Set Add ............................................................................................................................................. 252
4.411 VID-Set Delete ......................................................................................................................................... 252
4.412 VID-Set Edit ............................................................................................................................................. 253
4.413 VID-Set Show Set ................................................................................................................................... 253
4.414 VID-Set Show VID .................................................................................................................................. 254
4.415 Virtual-Connection Add VCA............................................................................................................... 254
4.416 Virtual-Connection Add VCE ............................................................................................................... 255
4.417 Virtual-Connection Delete VCA .......................................................................................................... 256
4.418 Virtual-Connection Delete VCE .......................................................................................................... 256
4.419 Virtual-Connection Edit VCA ............................................................................................................... 256
4.420 Virtual-Connection Edit VCE ................................................................................................................257
4.421 Virtual-Connection Show VCA Configuration ................................................................................ 258
4.422 Virtual-Connection Show VCE Configuration ................................................................................ 258
4.423 Y.1564 Add Test ...................................................................................................................................... 259
4.424 Y.1564 Delete Report .............................................................................................................................260
4.425 Y.1564 Delete Test ..................................................................................................................................260
4.426 Y.1564 Edit Report ..................................................................................................................................260
4.427 Y.1564 Edit Service .................................................................................................................................. 261
4.428 Y.1564 Edit Test....................................................................................................................................... 264
4.429 Y.1564 Generate Report ........................................................................................................................ 266
4.430 Y.1564 Show Activation ........................................................................................................................ 266
4.431 Y.1564 Show Service Configuration................................................................................................... 266
4.432 Y.1564 Show Test Configuration ........................................................................................................ 267
4.433 Y.1564 Start Activation.......................................................................................................................... 267
4.434 Y.1564 Stop Activation .......................................................................................................................... 267
4.435 Y.1564 Upload Report ............................................................................................................................268

Revision 1 — August 2022 13


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

1. About This Guide


The Skylight Element: GX v7.9.4 CLI Command Guide walks you through the command line
interface of this Accedian product and shows you how to configure and use it effectively
through the provided procedures and examples. The target audience for this publication is
network designers and network administrators.
The technologies and standards implemented by Accedian Network’s equipment and
procedures enable wireless operators, service providers and cable MSO personnel to provide
their customers with service assurance and service creation solutions.

1.1 Requirements
This Command Guide describes all possible CLI commands with their parameters for Skylight
Element: GX v7.9.4 CLI Command Guide. It applies to the following products and models from
Accedian:
• Skylight element: GX (AMT-1000-GX)
• Skylight element: GX-S (AMT-1000-GX-S)

1.2 Organization
This manual includes the following sections:
Skylight element: GX Command Overview
This section provides a list of all Skylight element: GX CLI commands, grouped according to
their primary function.
Syntax Meta-Characters and Variables
This section provides a list of all syntax Meta-characters and variables used in the CLI
Command Guide.
CLI Commands
This section describes all CLI commands; commands are listed by name in alphanumerical
order.

1.3 References
Deploying telco equipment such as the Skylight element: GX requires the understanding of
various networking standards, technical specifications and technologies. This document
provides basic information about such standards and technologies.

Revision 1 — August 2022 14


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

1.4 Conventions
This section explains the conventions that are used in Accedian user documentation.
GUI descriptions and procedures:
• On-screen labels are displayed in bold:
Username field
• Selections required to navigate in the GUI are shown as follows:
Port ▶ Configuration
CLI command descriptions and procedures:
• Command and argument keywords are displayed in bold:
dns show
• Set of possible arguments are enclosed in curly brackets { }:
gps edit state { enable | disable }
• Arguments that must be replaced with a value are in angle brackets < > or italics:
dns edit hostname <hostname>
dns edit hostname hostname
• Optional arguments are enclosed in square brackets [ ]:
interface show [<interface-name>]
• Screen output in CLI procedures is displayed as follows:
Command executed successfully

General conventions used in all documents:


Notes contain information that emphasizes or supplements certain points in the main text.
Notes are enclosed in blue lines, for example:

NOTE : This description cannot be modified.

Cautions describe situations in which failure to take an action or avoid an action could result in
damage to equipment or make it impossible to access the system. Cautions are enclosed in red
lines, for example:

CAUTION: If you modify a Management interface, you and other users may lose access to
the Web interface and the CLI.

Revision 1 — August 2022 15


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

2. Skylight element: GX Command Overview


Below is a list of all Skylight Element: GX CLI commands, grouped according to their primary
function.

2.1 Ethernet Port Commands


Command Name Description

cable-test Perform time domain reflectometry diagnostics.

erp Ethernet Ring Protection configuration.

fault-propagation Manage the link fault propagation between ports.

port Manage the link and physical level port settings.

sfp Display the SFP information, including digital


diagnostics.

2.2 User Traffic/Flow Through Commands


Command Name Description

bandwidth-regulator Manage bandwidth regulator database.

cos-pcp-map Manage port CoS mappings.

cos-profile Manage service mapping CoS profiles.

filter Manage the filter database.

l2pt Manage L2 protocol tunneling rules.

monitor Manage traffic monitors.

policy Manage policy entries applied on ports.

regulator-set Manage service mapping regulator sets.

Revision 1 — August 2022 16


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Command Name Description

shaping Manage the traffic shaper database.

traffic Policy list VLAN mode configuration.

vid-set Manage VID sets.

2.3 System Management Commands


Command Name Description

acl Manage Access Control Lists.

beacon Manage Plug & Go beacon instances.

bridge Manage the bridge created with the interface module.

console Manage the serial (RS-232) console port.

cpu Manage the CPU OAM options.

date Print or set the system date and time.

dhcp-relay Manage DHCP relay servers.

dns Manage the DNS settings.

history Manage the history buckets statistics.

interface Manage the interfaces used to access the


management plane.

inventory Manage the inventory when using auto configuration


with beacons.

ipv4 Manage IPv4 settings.

lldp Manage LLDP configuration and display neighbors.

mode Define general system settings.

Revision 1 — August 2022 17


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Command Name Description

motd Manage the MOTD of the unit.

mtr Manage management traffic regulation settings.

ntp Manage the network time client function.

permission-group Manage the user privilege profiles.

ptp Manage the network time client function.

radius Manage the RADIUS authentication.

route Manage the IP routes and gateways.

session Manage the session settings or active sessions.

snmp Manage the SNMP agent settings.

snmp-trap Manage the SNMP trap handler configuration.

syslog Manage the remote syslog settings.

tacacs-plus Manage the TACACS+ authentication.

user Manage user account settings and privilege profiles.

vcagent Manage the Vision Collect bucket statistics.

2.4 OAM Commands


Command Name Description

alarm Manage the alarm settings.

cfm Manage the SOAM CFM feature.

loopback Manage the loopback settings associated with an


OAM instance.

oam Manage the OAM instances (802.3ah).

Revision 1 — August 2022 18


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Command Name Description

paa Manage the Performance Assurance Agent instances.

sa Manage the Service Availability instances.

twamp Manage Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol


(TWAMP) instances.

twamp-gen Manage Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol


(TWAMP) generator sessions.

2.5 Utilities
Command Name Description

application Manage SSL certificates for specific applications.

certificate Manage SSL certificates.

configuration Export, import or factory reset the device


configuration.

firmware Install a new firmware or display current firmware


version.

ping Send pings to a specified host over IPv4.

ping6 Send pings to a specified host over IPv6.

reboot Restart the device, equivalent to a power up boot.

rfc2544 Run out-of-service packet generator and RFC-2544


tests.

sat-protocol Configure Service Activation Testing protocol.

sat-reporting Configure Service Activation Testing reporting.

statistics Clear all statistics (port, policies, regulators, OAM).

tcp-connect Test that a TCP service is responding.

Revision 1 — August 2022 19


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Command Name Description

traceroute Display the hops used to reach a given host over


IPv4.

traceroute6 Display the hops used to reach a given host over


IPv6.

y1564 Run Y.1564 Service Activation Methodiology tests.

2.6 Miscellaneous Commands


Command Name Description

board Manage assembly and environmental information.

exit Terminate the current CLI session.

help <command-name> Display this help or for a specific given command.

quit Terminate the current CLI session.

syntax Display the general command syntax.

version Display CLI version.

Revision 1 — August 2022 20


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

3. Syntax Meta-Characters and Variables


Below is a list of all Skylight element: GX character names and descriptions.

CAUTION: Limitations are in place to prevent utilization of specific special


characters in URLs and user inputs fields throughout the CLI. The following
special characters are not allowed in any user input fields: "&","<", ">", " \n", "\r",
"\t ", "\'' and " " ". As well, the following special characters are not allowed in the
URL input: "<", ">", "\n", "\r", "\t ".

Character Name Description

{} Matches one in the set.

[] Optionally matches one in the set.

* Repeat 0 or more times.

+ Repeat 1 or more times.

- Matches one in the range.

| Separates options in a set.

\ Escape a meta-character.

_ Single space character.

<> Syntax variable, as described in the table below.

Variable Name Description

<command> <command-name> <command-modifier>* [[<target>]


<attribute-specifier>*]

<attribute-specifier> <attribute-name> <attribute-value-list>

<attribute-value_list> <attribute-value> [, <attribute-value-list>]

Revision 1 — August 2022 21


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Variable Name Description

<command-name> <key-word>

<attribute-name> <key-word>

<attribute-value> {<key-word> | <number> | <string>}

<key-word> {a-z} [{a-z} | {0-9} | {\-}]*

<string> {<characters> | <quoted-string>}

<quoted-string> {"} <characters> [[ _ | <characters>]* <characters>] {"}

<characters> {a-z | A-Z} [{a-z | A-Z |0-9 | : | ! | $ | % | ^ | & | \-}]*

<number> <decimal> | <hexadecimal>

<decimal> {0-9}+

<hexadecimal> 0{x | X}{0-9 | a-f | A-F } [0-9 | a-f | A-F]*

<ip-addr> <0-255>.<0-255>.<0-255>.<0-255>

<mac-addr> <0-FF>:<0-FF>:<0-FF>:<0-FF>:<0-FF>:<0-FF>

<port> <0-65535>

<ipv6-addr> <0-FFFF>[:<0-FFFF>]+[:<0-FFFF> | :]

<ipv6-prefixLen> <0-128>

<url> <dns-name>[:<port>]/[<path>]<file-name>

<path> {<string>/}+

<file-name> <string>

<dns-name> <string>[.<string>]+

<port-name> <string>

<connector-name> <string>

Revision 1 — August 2022 22


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4. CLI Commands
This section describes all CLI commands; commands are listed by name in alphanumerical
order.

4.1 ACL Add List


acl add list - Add an ACL definition
Description:
Use this command to add a new ACL definition to the ACL service. Newly-created ACL
definitions do not contain any rules and are disabled by default.
You may edit the definition using the "acl edit list" command to add rules to it. To enable a
definition, you must assign it to an interface.
Syntax:
acl add list <acl-name>
Parameters:
<acl-name> <string>

4.2 ACL Delete Interface


acl delete interface - Delete an interface definition
Description:
Delete an existing interface definition from the ACL service.
Syntax:
acl delete interface <interface-name>
Parameters:
<interface-name> <string>

4.3 ACL Delete List


acl delete list - Delete an ACL list
Description:
Delete an existing ACL list from the ACL service. The ACL list state must be set to
"Unassigned" before deleting the list.
Syntax:
acl delete list <acl-name>

Revision 1 — August 2022 23


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
<acl-name> <string>

4.4 ACL Edit Interface


acl edit interface - Edit an interface definition
Description:
Edit an existing interface definition from the ACL service. Any changes made to the interface
definition will be automatically executed and saved if valid.
ACL and Bridge:
Assigning an ACL to a sub-interface that belongs to a bridge is not
supported. The ACL must be assigned to the bridge itself.
ACL and LAG:
When ACL protection is needed on a LAG, the ACL should be assigned to the
LAG interface, but not to its members (e.g. assign the ACL to LAG-1-1
interface, but not to SFP-1-1 and SFP-2-1 sub-interfaces).
Syntax:
acl edit interface <interface-name> {
{acl_name <acl-name>} |
{acl_types <acl-types>} |
{state {enable|disable}}
}+
Parameters:
<acl-name> <string>
<acl-types> {cli|web|snmp|netconf|icmp}
[,{cli|web|snmp|netconf|icmp}]*
acl_name The ACL name
acl_types The ACL types
state The interface state

4.5 ACL Edit List


acl edit list - Edit an ACL definition
Description
Edit an existing ACL definition from the ACL service. Any changes made to the ACL definition
will be automatically executed and saved if valid.
Syntax:
acl edit list <acl-name> {

Revision 1 — August 2022 24


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{name <new-acl-name>} |
{index {<1-40>|<rule_name>} {
{type {ipsrc|macsrc}} |
{value <rule-value>} |
{action {drop|accept}} |
{rule_name <rule-name>} |
{priority <1-255>} |
{state {enable|disable}}
}+
}+
Parameters:
<acl-name> <string>
<new-acl-name> <string>
<rule-value> {<ip-addr>|<mac-addr>|<subnet-addr/subnet-addr-prefix>}
<rule-name> <string>
name The new ACL name
index The rule index or the rule name to edit a specific rule
type The rule type
value The rule value that match the type format
action The rule action if the type and value match
rule_name The rule name
priority The rule priority that determine the order of execution of the
rules
state The rule state

4.6 ACL Show Interface


acl show interface - Show an interface definition
Description:

Show all interface definitions if no interface name is specified. If an interface name is specified,
only that interface will be displayed. Statistics based on the assigned ACL definition can also
be displayed if specified.
Syntax:
acl show interface [<interface-name> [stats]]
Parameters:
<interface-name> <string>
stats Display rules statistics based on the assigned ACL definition.

Revision 1 — August 2022 25


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.7 ACL Show List


acl show list - Show an ACL definition
Description:
Show all ACL definitions if no ACL name is specified. If an ACL name is specified, only that
interface will be displayed.
Syntax:
acl show list [<acl-name>]
Parameters:
<acl-name> <string>

4.8 Alarm Edit


alarm edit - Edit alarm configuration
Description:
Alarm edit allows you to change the configuration of an alarm.
Syntax:
alarm edit <alarm-number> {{disable | enable} |
{service-affecting {yes | no}} |
{severity {minor | major | critical | informational}} |
{state {enable | disable}} |
{description <description-text>}}+
Parameters:
<alarm-number> <decimal>.<decimal>.<decimal>
disable Disable the alarm. If the alarm is triggered, nothing happens (see
the note below).
enable Enable the alarm. If the alarm is triggered, it will be reported as
defined (see the note below).
service-affecting Tag the alarm as service-affecting or not.
severity The severity level of the alarm when it is raised.
state Enable or disable the alarm. If the alarm is triggered when
enabled, it will be reported as defined. Otherwise, nothing will
happen.

NOTE : Using "disable" or "enable" as stand-alone arguments, i.e. not preceded by


"state", is deprecated. This syntax remains valid for backward compatibility, but the
best practice is to always use "state enable" and "state disable".

Revision 1 — August 2022 26


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.9 Alarm Reporting


alarm reporting - Enable alarm status reporting
Description:
Enable alarm status reporting via different ways.
Syntax:
alarm reporting {{led {disable | enable}} |
{snmp {disable | enable}} |
{syslog {disable | enable}} |
{802.3ah {disable | enable}} |
{threshold-on <1-5000>} |
{threshold-off <1-15000>}}
Parameters:
led Enable the LEDs on the front panel of the unit to report the
alarms.
snmp Enable the reporting of alarms via SNMP traps.
syslog Enable the reporting of alarms via entries in the syslog.
802.3ah Enable reporting of alarms via 802.3ah OAM PDUs.
threshold-on The delay (in milliseconds) after an event is detected and before
the alarm notification occurs.
threshold-off The delay (in milliseconds) after the event status goes back to
normal and before the alarm notification clears.

4.10 Alarm Show Configuration


alarm show configuration - Show alarm configuration
Description:
Display the alarm reporting behavior.
Syntax:
alarm show configuration [<alarm-id>] [more]
Parameters:
<alarm_id> <decimal>.<decimal>.<decimal>

4.11 Alarm Show Reporting


alarm show reporting - Show alarm reporting configuration
Description:
Display the alarm reporting parameters.

Revision 1 — August 2022 27


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
alarm show reporting

4.12 Alarm Show Status


alarm show status - Show alarms current status
Description:
Display alarm status based on specified parameters. If an alarm number is specified, the
detailed status for this alarm is displayed. If no alarm number is specified, the status of all
applicable alarms is displayed in a table format. By default, only the alarms that are enabled
and active are displayed. If the option "all" is specified, the status will be displayed for all
possible alarms.
Syntax:
alarm show status [<alarm_number> | active | all | more]
Parameters:
<alarm_number> <decimal>.<decimal>.<decimal>

4.13 Application Edit File Transfers


application edit filetransfers - Allows changing SSL certificates for file
transfer applications
Description:
application edit allows selecting and managing validation on how certificates are used when
sending or receiving files through a secure channel (https or ftps). For example, firmware
upgrades and configuration import/export using the CLI.
Syntax:
application edit filetransfers {
{name <name>} |
{validate {enable | disable}} |
{client {enable | disable}}}+
Parameters:
name The common name of the certificate to be associated with the
specified application.
validate For client type applications, perform peer certificate validation.
This includes, expiration dates, hostname and CA chain.
client For client type applications, enable or disable the use of the
selected client certificate.

Revision 1 — August 2022 28


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.14 Application Edit Web


application edit web - Allows changing SSL certificates for the Web
application
Description:
application edit allows selecting and managing validation on how certificates are used by the
web GUI application.
Syntax:
application edit web {{name <name>}}
Parameters:
name The common name of the certificate to be associated with the
specified application.

4.15 Application Show


application show - Show SSL certificates applications
Description:
Shows a summary of the SSL certificates applications. All applications making possible use of
certificates are listed here.
Syntax:
application show

4.16 Bandwidth Regulator Add Envelope


bandwidth-regulator add envelope - Add a bandwidth regulator envelope
Description:
With bandwidth-regulator add envelope, you can create a new bandwidth regulator envelope
instance.
Syntax:
bandwidth-regulator add envelope <envelope-name> {
{ranking <regulator-name list>}
{coupling-flag <enable | disable>} }+
Parameters:
<envelope-name> <string>
ranking A comma separated list of regulator names that are part of the
envelope in order of priority. (highest to lowest)
coupling-flag Determine whether the coupling flag will be used or not for this
regulator envelope.

Revision 1 — August 2022 29


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.17 Bandwidth Regulator Add Regulator


bandwidth-regulator add regulator - Add a bandwidth regulator configuration
Description:
With bandwidth-regulator add, you can create a new bandwidth regulator instance.
Supported rate values: 0 to maximum port speed: steps of 125 kbps. The burst size must be
greater than the port Maximum Transfer Unit (MTU).
Syntax:
bandwidth-regulator add regulator <regulator-name> {
{cir <0-1000000>} |
{cbs <1-2015>} if cir-max <= 500000 |
{cbs <2-2015>} if cir-max > 500000 |
{eir <0-1000000>} |
{ebs <1-2015>} if eir-max <= 500000 |
{ebs <2-2015>} if eir-max > 500000 |
{color-mode {aware | blind}} |
{coupling-flag {true | false}}
{cir-max <0-1000000>} |
{eir-max <0-1000000>} }+
Parameters:
<regulator-name> <string>
cir Committed Information Rate in kbps.
cbs Committed Burst Size in KiB (1024 bytes).
eir Excess Information Rate in kbps.
ebs Excess Burst Size in KiB (1024 bytes).
color-mode Determine whether the regulator is color-aware or color-blind.
coupling-flag Determine whether the coupling flag will be used or not for this
regulator.
cir-max Maximum Committed Information Rate in kbps.
eir-max Maximum Excess Information Rate in kbps.

4.18 Bandwidth Regulator Clear Regulator Statistics


bandwidth-regulator clear regulator statistics - Clear bandwidth regulator
statistics
Description:
Clear the bandwidth regulator statistics. If <regulator-name> is not specified, all bandwidth
regulators statistics will be cleared.

Revision 1 — August 2022 30


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
bandwidth-regulator clear regulator statistics [<regulator-name>]
Parameters:
<regulator-name> <string>

4.19 Bandwidth Regulator Delete Envelope


bandwidth-regulator delete envelope - Delete the specified bandwidth
regulator envelope
Description:
bandwidth-regulator delete envelope will delete the specified bandwidth regulator envelope
instance.
Syntax:
bandwidth-regulator delete envelope <envelope-name>
Parameters:
<envelope-name> <string>

4.20 Bandwidth Regulator Delete Regulator


bandwidth-regulator delete regulator - Delete the specified bandwidth
regulator
Description:
bandwidth-regulator delete will delete the specified bandwidth regulator instance.
Syntax:
bandwidth-regulator delete regulator <regulator-name>
Parameters:
<regulator-name> <string>

4.21 Bandwidth Regulator Edit Envelope


bandwidth-regulator edit envelope - Edit a bandwidth regulator envelope
Description:
With bandwidth-regulator edit envelope, you can edit an existing bandwidth regulator
envelope instance.
Syntax:
bandwidth-regulator edit envelope <envelope-name> {
{name <envelope-name>}

Revision 1 — August 2022 31


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{ranking <regulator-name list>}


{coupling-flag <enable | disable>} }+
Parameters:
<envelope-name> <string>
name A new name for the envelope.
ranking A comma separated list of regulator names that are part of the
envelope in order of priority. (highest to lowest).
coupling-flag Determine whether the coupling flag will be used or not for this
regulator envelope.

4.22 Bandwidth Regulator Edit Regulator


bandwidth-regulator edit regulator - Change a bandwidth regulator
configuration
Description
With bandwidth-regulator edit, you can change the parameters of an existing bandwidth
regulator instance. Supported rate values: - 0 to maximum port speed: steps of 125 kbps. The
burst size must be greater than the port Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU).
Syntax
bandwidth-regulator edit regulator <regulator-name> {
{name <regulator-name>} |
{cir <0-1000000>} |
{cbs <1-2015>} if cir-max <= 500000 |
{cbs <2-2015>} if cir-max > 500000 |
{eir <0-1000000>} |
{ebs <1-2015>} if eir-max <= 500000 |
{ebs <2-2015>} if eir-max > 500000 |
{cir-max <0-1000000>} |
{eir-max <0-1000000>} }+
Parameters
<regulator-name> <string>
cir Committed Information Rate in kbps.
cbs Committed Burst Size in KiB.
eir Excess Information Rate in kbps.
ebs Excess Burst Size in KiB.
cir-max Maximum Committed Information Rate in kbps.
eir-max Maximum Excess Information Rate in kbps.

Revision 1 — August 2022 32


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.23 Bandwidth Regulator Show Envelope Configuration


bandwidth-regulator show envelope configuration - Show bandwidth regulator
envelope configuration
Description:
Without arguments, this command displays the bandwidth-regulator envelope configuration
summary in a table format. When specifying a bandwidth-regulator envelope name, this
command displays the detailed configuration for that bandwidth-regulator envelope.
Syntax:
bandwidth-regulator show envelope configuration [<envelope-name>]
Parameters:
<envelope-name> <string>

4.24 Bandwidth Regulator Show Regulator Configuration


bandwidth-regulator show regulator configuration - Show bandwidth regulator
configuration
Description:
Without arguments or with the modifier summary, this command displays the bandwidth-
regulator configuration summary in a table format. When specifying a bandwidth-regulator
name, this command displays the detailed configuration for that bandwidth-regulator.
Syntax:
bandwidth-regulator show regulator configuration [<regulator-name>]
Parameters:
<regulator-name> <string>

4.25 Bandwidth Regulator Show Regulator Statistics


bandwidth-regulator show regulator statistics - Show bandwidth regulator
statistics
Description:
Display the bandwidth regulator statistics.
Syntax:
bandwidth-regulator show regulator statistics <regulator-name> {
{ type {clearable | persistent | historic}} |
{ buckets <0-16>} |
{ period <period-id>}}+

Revision 1 — August 2022 33


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
<regulator-name> <string>
<period-id> <decimal>
type Type of statistics to display:
clearable: Current statistics since last clear command.
persistent: Current statistics since system start.
historic: History buckets statistics. If the number of buckets is not
specified, the last 4 buckets will be displayed, starting from the
specified period. If no period is specified, the last 4 buckets will be
displayed.
buckets: Number of bandwidth regulator buckets to display.
period: Reference period for the bandwidth regulator history buckets.
Zero for the most recent period available.

4.26 Beacon Add L3


beacon add l3 - Add a new beacon layer-3 instance and specify its
attributes
Description:
Configure a beacon layer-3 instance for management purpose. A beacon may be configured to
discover remote devices by sending a special frame on the network using the IP settings
provided.
Syntax:
beacon add l3 name {<beacon-name>}
{domain-id {<domain>}} |
{state {enable|disable}} |
{rate {<transmission rate>}} |
{dst-ip {<ip-addr>}} |
{use-interface {enable|disable}} |
{interface {<interface name>}} |
{use-relay-ip {enable|disable}} |
{relay-ip {<ip-addr>}} |
{relay-dst-subnet {<ip-addr>}} |
{ip-config-mode {local|auto|dhcp|auto-static}} |
{subnet {<ip-addr>}} |
{netmask {<ip-addr>}} |
{gateway {<ip-addr>}} |
{ip-exclusion {<ip-addr1, ip-addr2, ...>}} |
{dhcp-hostname-option <none,custom,serial-number,current>} |
{dhcp-client-id-option <none,custom,serial-number>} |
{dhcp-hostname <hostname>} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 34


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{dhcp-client-id <client-id>} |
{id-mismatch {enable|disable} |
{adv-ip {<ip-addr>}} }}+
Parameters:
name The name to assign to the beacon instance.
domain The name of the discovery domain ID.
state Enable or disable beacon frame transmission.
rate Transmission rate of beacon frames, in seconds <3, 60, 600,
3600>.
dst-ip When neither of the use-interface and use-relay-ip options are
used, the beacon frames are sent to this address.
use-interface Enable usage of IP settings defined by the system interface
specified by the interface argument.
interface The name of a system interface. The interface must exist on this
system. The IP settings of this interface will be used to compute
the directed broadcast IP address to use to send the beacon
frames.
use-relay-ip Enable sending of frame directly to the DHCP Relay IP address
specified in the relay-ip argument.
relay-ip The DHCP Relay Agent IP address. The beacon frames are sent to
this DHCP Relay IP address in order to reach remote subnets. The
DHCP Relay must be configured to relay the beacon layer-3
frames which are based on DHCPOFFER frames.
relay-dst-subnet When used with a DHCP Relay Agent, this is the destination
subnet i.e. the subnet to reach on the other side of the DHCP
Relay.
ip-config-mode The IP configuration mode to be used by the remote device.
subnet IP subnet used in Auto and Auto-Static IP configuration modes.
netmask IP netmask used in Auto and Auto-Static IP configuration modes.
gateway IP gateway used in Auto and Auto-Static IP configuration modes.
ip-exclusion This is a comma-separated list of IP addresses that the remote
unit must exclude when computing an IP address in Auto and
Auto-Static IP configuration modes. Up to 100 IP addresses can
be specified.
IP address ranges can be expressed with dash (-) separated IP
addresses.
dhcp-hostname-option Tell the remote unit what option to use as a hostname in its DNS
configuration. Used only in DHCP IP configuration mode.
dhcp-client-id-option Tell the remote unit what option to use as a client ID in its DNS
configuration. Used only in DHCP IP configuration mode.
dhcp-hostname The hostname to use when the hostname <custom> option is
chosen. Used only in DHCP IP configuration mode.

Revision 1 — August 2022 35


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

dhcp-client-id The client ID to use when the client ID <custom> option is chosen.
Used only in DHCP IP configuration mode.
id-mismatch When enabled, forces the remote system to accept beacon even
if domain IDs do not match.
adv-ip IP address of an inventory collecting unit

4.27 Beacon Delete L3


beacon delete l3 - Delete a beacon layer-3 instance
Description:
Delete an existing beacon layer-3 instance.
Syntax:
beacon delete l3 <beacon-name>
Parameters:
<beacon-name> The name of the beacon instance to delete.

4.28 Beacon Edit L3


beacon edit l3 - Edit the attributes of an existing beacon layer-3 instance
Description:
Configure a beacon layer-3 instance for management purpose. A beacon may be configured to
discover remote devices by sending a special frame on the network using the IP settings
provided.
Syntax:
beacon edit l3 <beacon-name>
{name {<beacon-name>}} |
{domain-id {<domain>}} |
{state {enable|disable}} |
{rate {<transmission rate>}} |
{dst-ip {<ip-addr>}} |
{use-interface {enable|disable}} |
{interface {<interface name>}} |
{use-relay-ip {enable|disable}} |
{relay-ip {<ip-addr>}} |
{relay-dst-subnet {<ip-addr>}} |
{ip-config-mode {local|auto|dhcp|auto-static}} |
{subnet {<ip-addr>}} |
{netmask {<ip-addr>}} |
{gateway {<ip-addr>}} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 36


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{ip-exclusion {<ip-addr1, ip-addr2, ...>}} |


{dhcp-hostname-option <none,custom,serial-number,current>} |
{dhcp-client-id-option <none,custom,serial-number>} |
{dhcp-hostname <hostname>} |
{dhcp-client-id <client-id>} |
{id-mismatch {enable|disable} |
{adv-ip {<ip-addr>}} }}+
Parameters:
<beacon-name> The name of the beacon instance to edit.
name The name to assign to the beacon instance.
domain The name of the discovery domain ID.
state Enable or disable beacon frame transmission.
rate Transmission rate of beacon frames, in seconds <3, 60, 600,
3600>.
dst-ip When neither of the use-interface and use-relay-ip options are
used, the beacon frames are sent to this address.
use-interface Enable usage of IP settings defined by the system interface
specified by the interface argument.
interface The name of a system interface. The interface must exist on this
system. The IP settings of this interface will be used to compute
the directed broadcast IP address to use to send the beacon
frames.
use-relay-ip Enable sending of frame directly to the DHCP Relay IP address
specified in the relay-ip argument.
relay-ip The DHCP Relay Agent IP address. The beacon frames are sent to
this DHCP Relay IP address in order to reach remote subnets The
DHCP Relay must be configured to relay the beacon layer-3
frames which are based on DHCPOFFER frames.
relay-dst-subnet When used with a DHCP Relay Agent, this is the destination
subnet i.e. the subnet to reach on the other side of the DHCP
Relay.
ip-config-mode The IP configuration mode to be uses by the remote device.
subnet IP subnet used in Auto and Auto-Static IP configuration modes.
netmask IP netmask used in Auto and Auto-Static IP configuration modes.
gateway IP gateway used in Auto and Auto-Static IP configuration modes.
ip-exclusion This is a comma-separated list of IP addresses that the remote
unit must exclude when computing an IP address in Auto and
Auto-Static IP configuration modes. Up to 100 IP addresses can
be specified.
IP address ranges can be expressed with dash (-) separated IP
addresses.
dhcp-hostname-option Tell the remote unit what option to use as a hostname in its DNS
configuration. Used only in DHCP IP configuration mode.

Revision 1 — August 2022 37


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

dhcp-client-id-option Tell the remote unit what option to use as a client ID in its DNS
configuration. Used only in DHCP IP configuration mode.
dhcp-hostname The hostname to use when the hostname <custom> option is
chosen. Used only in DHCP IP configuration mode.
dhcp-client-id The client ID to use when the client ID <custom> option is chosen.
Used only in DHCP IP configuration mode.
id-mismatch When enabled, forces the remote system to accept beacon even
if domain IDs do not match.
adv-ip IP address of an inventory collecting unit

4.29 Beacon Send L3 One-Shot


beacon send l3 one-shot - Send a one-shot beacon layer-3 frame
Description:
Immediately sends one beacon layer-3 frame based on the configuration of the chosen beacon
instance.
Syntax:
beacon send l3 one-shot <beacon-name>
Parameters:
<beacon-name> The name of the beacon instance configuration to use for
sending the one frame. The beacon-name must refer to an
existing instance and the instance must be enabled.

4.30 Beacon Show L3 Configuration


beacon show l3 configuration - Show configuration of beacon layer-3
instance(s)
Description:
Specifying a beacon name provides detailed configuration about this beacon, otherwise the
command provides a summary of configurations for all beacons.
Syntax:
beacon show l3 configuration [<beacon-name>]
Parameters:
<beacon-name> The name of the beacon instance to show.

Revision 1 — August 2022 38


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.31 Board Show CPU


board show CPU - Display CPU usage over a period of time
Description:
Display the CPU usage over a period of time. Available periods are:
Last second
Last completed 15 seconds period average
Last completed 30 seconds period average
Last completed 60 seconds period average
Last completed 5 minutes period average
Syntax:
board show cpu

4.32 Board Show Info


board show info - Display unit product information
Description:
Displays unit board information: MAC base address, unit identifier, firmware version,
assembly, and serial number. Also displays sub-assembly information, if any.
Syntax:
board show info

4.33 Board Show Start Time


board show start-time - Display the system start time
Description:
Display the system start time in the following format:
Thu Jan 1 00:00:00 UTC 1970
Syntax:
board show start-time

4.34 Board Show Status


board show status - Show board status
Description:
Display information about power supplies, temperature sensors and dry-contacts.

Revision 1 — August 2022 39


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

NOTE : The speed status for each fan is taken once every 24 hours; it is not a real-
time value.

Syntax:
board show status

4.35 Board Show Uptime


board show uptime - Display the system uptime
Description:
Display the system uptime in the following format: up xx days, HH:MM
Syntax:
board show uptime

4.36 Board Show Uptime Seconds


board show uptime-seconds - Display the system uptime in seconds
Description:
Display the system uptime in the following format: up xx seconds
Syntax:
board show uptime-seconds

4.37 Bridge Clear Statistics


bridge clear statistics - Clear bridge statistics
Description:
For a specific bridge name, this command clears all statistics.
Syntax:
bridge clear statistics [<bridge-name>]
Parameters:
<bridge-name> <string>

Revision 1 — August 2022 40


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.38 Bridge Edit


bridge edit - Change configuration for a given bridge
Description:
With bridge edit, you can change the parameters of an existing bridge instance.
Syntax:
bridge edit <bridge-name> {
{aging-time <decimal>} |
{forward-delay <decimal>} |
{hello-time <decimal>} |
{path-cost <sub-intf> <decimal>} |
{port-priority <sub-intf> <decimal>} |
{priority <decimal>} |
{protocol {stp | rstp}} |
{mac-addr {bridge-ga | provider-bridge-ga}} |
{message-max-age <decimal>} }+
Parameters:
<bridge-name> <string>
aging-time Bridge aging time can vary from 30 to 600 seconds.
forward-delay Forward time can vary from 4 to 30 seconds.
hello-time Hello time can vary from 1 to 2 seconds.
path-cost Path cost of the port can vary from 1 to 200 Million.
port-priority Port priority, value must be between 16 and 240. in steps of 16
priority Bridge priority, value must be between 4096 and 61440, in steps
of 4096.
protocol Configure STP or RSTP.
mac-addr Destination MAC address used to transmit BPDU. Can be the
Bridge Group Address or the Provider Bridge Group address.
message-max-age Maximum message age can vary from 6 to 40 seconds.

4.39 Bridge Show Configuration


bridge show configuration - Show bridge configuration
Description:
Without arguments, this command displays a configuration summary for all bridges in a table
format. With a specific bridge name argument, this command displays the detailed
configuration information for that specific bridge.
Syntax:
bridge show configuration [<bridge-name>]

Revision 1 — August 2022 41


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
<bridge-name> <string>

4.40 Bridge Show Statistics


bridge show statistics - Show bridge statistics
Description:
For a specific bridge name, this command displays all statistics.
Syntax:
bridge show statistics [<bridge-name>]
Parameters:
<bridge-name> <string>

4.41 Bridge Show Status


bridge show status - Show bridge status
Description:
Without arguments, this command displays a status summary for all bridges in a table format.
With a specific bridge name argument, this command displays the detailed status information
for that specific bridge.
Syntax:
bridge show status [<bridge-name>]
Parameters:
<bridge-name> <string>

4.42 Certificate Delete


certificate delete - Allows removing SSL certificates from the unit
Description:
certificate delete allows you to remove a SSL certificate present in the unit.
Syntax:
certificate delete {name}
Parameters:
name The common name of the certificate to be removed.

Revision 1 — August 2022 42


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.43 Certificate Import


certificate import - Allows importing SSL certificates into the unit
Description:
certificate import allows you to download and activate a SSL certificate from a remote server
through ftp, ftps, http, https, or tftp protocol.

NOTE : Maximum number of single certificates supported is 10. Maximum number of


client/server certificates supported is 5.

Syntax:
certificate import {
{type {pkcs7 | pkcs12 | PEM | DER}} |
{url <url>} |
{passcode}}+
Parameters:
type The type of the certificate being imported. Possible values are:
pkcs12: Used to import client certificates including the private key and
the CA chain of certificates.
pkcs7: Used to import multiple CA certificates.
x509-PEM: Used to import either:
A client or server certificate and its private key.
A single or multiple CA certificate.
x509-DER: Used to import single CA certificates.
url URL to reach the server and directory e.g.
tftp: tftp://192.168.1.1/certs/certificate.p7
ftp: ftp://192.168.1.1/certs/certificate.p7
passcode The passcode to decipher the certificate. Leave blank if the
certificate is not encrypted. A separate query prompt will be
displayed to allow the passcode to be specified. It cannot be
specified directly on the command line.

4.44 Certificate Show


certificate show - Show SSL certificates
Description:
Shows a summary of the SSL certificates present in the unit if no name is specified. If a
common name is specified, the certificate contents are displayed.
Syntax:
certificate show {[name]}

Revision 1 — August 2022 43


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
name The common name of the certificate to be displayed.

4.45 CFM Add DMM


cfm add dmm - Create a delay measurement
Description:
Create delay measurement for a MEP.

NOTE : One-way delay measurements require time synchronization using NTP/PTP


on units at each probe end.

Syntax:
cfm add dmm {
{mep-idx <mep-index>} |
{index <decimal>} |
{rmep-id <1-8191>} |
{priority <0-7> } |
{enable {yes | no}} |
{name <string>} |
{interval <decimal>} |
{reference-period <decimal> } |
{ow-delay {enable | disable}} |
{ow-max-delay <decimal>} |
{ow-delay-threshold <decimal>} |
{ow-ad-threshold <decimal>} |
{ow-dv {enable | disable}} |
{ow-max-dv <decimal>} |
{ow-dv-threshold <decimal>} |
{ow-adv-threshold <decimal>} |
{tw-delay {enable | disable}} |
{tw-max-delay <decimal>} |
{tw-delay-threshold <decimal>} |
{tw-ad-threshold <decimal>} |
{tw-dv {enable | disable}} |
{tw-max-dv <decimal>} |
{tw-dv-threshold <decimal>} |
{tw-adv-threshold <decimal>}}+

<mep-index> = <decimal>

Revision 1 — August 2022 44


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
mep-idx Specifies the local MEP index from which DMM should be
initiated.
index A free DMM index. If the index is omitted, a free index is allocated
automatically.
rmep-id Specifies the remote MEPID to which DMM should be sent.
priority Specifies DMM VLAN priority. This parameter applies only to
VLAN based MEPs.
name A name assigned to reference this instance.
enable Enable or disable generating DMM frames.
interval Interval in milliseconds at which DMM should be sent.
reference-period Reference period in minutes.
ow-delay Enable or disable one-way delay results.
ow-max-delay Maximum one-way delay.
ow-delay-threshold Maximum consecutive one-way delay samples allowed greater
than ow-max-delay.
ow-ad-threshold Maximum one-way average delay.
ow-dv Enable or disable one-way delay variation results.
ow-max-dv Maximum one-way delay variation allowed.
ow-dv-threshold Maximum consecutive one-way delay variation samples allowed
greater than ow-max-dv.
ow-adv-threshold Maximum one-way average delay variation.
tw-delay Enable or disable two-way delay results.
tw-max-delay Maximum two-way average delay.
tw-delay-threshold Maximum consecutive two-way delay samples allowed greater
than tw-max-delay.
tw-ad-threshold Maximum two-way average delay.
tw-dv Enable or disable two-way delay variation results.
tw-max-dv Maximum two-way delay variation allowed.
tw-dv-threshold Maximum consecutive tw-way delay variation samples allowed
greater than tw-max-dv.
tw-adv-threshold Maximum two-way average delay variation.

4.46 CFM Add Domain


cfm add domain - Create a Maintenance Domain
Description:
Create a Maintenance Domain. A Maintenance Domain defines a level and a name for a
network or part of a network for which faults in connectivity are to be managed. A
Maintenance Domain is required to create a MA with CCM MAID that includes the
Maintenance Domain name.

Revision 1 — August 2022 45


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
cfm add domain {
{name <string> } |
{index <decimal>} |
{format {string | dns-name}} |
{level <0-7>} |
{mhf-creation <none | default | explicit>} |
{sndr-id-perm {none | chassis | manage | chassis-manage>}}+
Parameters:
name Unique name assigned to this Maintenance Domain.
index A free domain index. If the index is omitted, a free index is
allocated automatically.
format The Maintenance Domain name format.
level Maintenance level given to this Maintenance Domain.
mhf-creation Indicates if the management entity can create MHFs for VIDs on
which no Up MEP is configured. The valid values are:
none: No MHFs can be created.
default: Create MHFs if there is no lower active MD level or if there is a
MEP at the next active MD level on the port.
explicit: Create MHFs only if there is a MEP at the next active MD level on
the port.
sndr-id-perm Sender ID permission. Indicates what, if anything, is to be
included in the Sender ID TLV transmitted in CCMs, LBMs, LTMs,
and LTRs.

4.47 CFM Add MA


cfm add ma - Create a Maintenance Association
Description:
Create a Maintenance Association. A Maintenance Association defines a set of MEPs, each
configured with the same MAID and MD Level, established to verify the integrity of a single
service instance. An MA can also be thought of as a full mesh of Maintenance Entities among
a set of MEPs configured.
Syntax:
cfm add ma {
{name <string> } |
{index <decimal>} |
{md-idx <decimal>} |
{md-name <string>} |
{md-name-format <dns-name | string>} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 46


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{ccm-interval <decimal> } |
{vce <vce-name>} |
{component <component-id>} |
{vlan-type {c-vlan | s-vlan | t-vlan | none}} |
{vid-list {<1-4094> [, <1-4094>]+}} |
{mepid-list {<1-8191> [, <1-8191>]+}} |
{mhf-creation <none | default | explicit | defer>} |
{sndr-id-perm {none | chassis | manage | chassis-manage | defer}} |
{rmep-auto-discovery {disable | enable}}}
{maid-string-format-mode {normal | legacy}}}+
Parameters:
name MEG name. The name should include the ICC and UMC in a single
string, as specified in Y.1731.
index A free Maintenance Association index. If the index is omitted, a
free index is allocated automatically.
md-idx Parent Maintenance Domain index. Cannot be used in
conjunction with md-name and md-name-format.
md-name Parent Maintenance Domain name. Cannot be used in
conjunction with md-idx.
md-name-format Parent Maintenance Domain name format. Cannot be used in
conjunction with md-idx. Default is "string".
ccm-interval Interval, in milliseconds, at which the CCMs are sent.
vce Indicate the VCE name from which to obtain the component ID,
instead of entering the component parameter directly.
component Specify the ID of the component on which this Maintenance
Association will be made.
vlan-type Specify the type of VLAN associated with this Maintenance
Association. If the value "none" is specified, the association is not
attached to any VLAN and the contents of the VLAN ID list are
ignored. When a VCE is specified, the correct type is
automatically selected.
vid-list A comma-separated list of VLAN ID values. If the VLAN ID list is
left empty, the association is not attached to a VLAN and the
VLAN type is set to "none" implicitly. If a vid-list is provided
without specifying the vlan-type, it is set to C-VLAN implicitly.
mepid-list A comma-separated list of MEPID values.
mhf-creation Indicates if the management entity can create MHFs for VIDs on
which no Up MEP is configured. Valid values are:
none: No MHFs can be created.
default: Create MHFs if there is no lower active MD level or if there is a
MEP at the next active MD level on the port.
explicit: Create MHFs only if there is a MEP at the next active MD level on
the port.

Revision 1 — August 2022 47


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

defer: Use the Maintenance Domain parameter to determine how MHFs


are created.
sndr-id-perm Sender ID permission. Indicates what, if anything, is to be
included in the Sender ID TLV transmitted in CCMs, LBMs, LTMs
and LTRs.
rmep-auto-discovery Remote MEP auto-discovery. When enabled, remote MEPs will
be automatically added to the MA/MEG when the remote MEP's
CCM message is received.
maid-string-format-mode
Controls the behaviour of the generation of CCM PDUs using
Character-String (2) format with MD Name not present (1).
Valid values are:
normal: CCM PDUs using this format will result in the Short MA Name
Length field having the correct value.
legacy: CCM PDUs generated using this format and whose Short MA
Name length is less than 13, will result in the Short MA Name
Length field having a fixed value of 13. When the Short MA Name
length is 13 or greater, the generated CCM PDU will have the
correct value in the Short MA Name Length field. This will enable
inter-operability with existing Accedian equipment running older
firmware versions and configured to use Character String format
with MD Name not present.

4.48 CFM Add MEG


cfm add meg - Create Y.1731 MEG.
Description:
Create Y.1731 MEG.
Syntax:
cfm add meg {
{name <string> } |
{name-format <icc-based | string> } |
{index <decimal>} |
{level <0-7> } |
{ccm-interval <decimal> } |
{vce <vce-name>} |
{component <component-id>} |
{vlan-type {c-vlan | s-vlan | t-vlan | none}} |
{vid-list {<1-4094> [, <1-4094>]+}} |
{mepid-list {<1-8191> [, <1-8191>]+}} |
{mhf-creation <none | default | explicit | defer>} |
{sndr-id-perm {none | chassis | manage | chassis-manage | defer}}} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 48


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{rmep-auto-discovery {disable | enable}}}


{maid-string-format-mode {normal | legacy}}}+
Parameters:
name MEG name. The name should include the ICC and UMC in a single
string, as specified in Y.1731.
name-format MEG name format. The valid values are:
icc-based: ITU Carrier Code format (Y.1731).
string: RFC-2579 Display String.
index A free maintenance association index. If the index is omitted a
free index is allocated automatically.
level Maintenance Level given to this MEG.
ccm-interval Interval, in milliseconds, at which the CCMs are sent.
vce Indicate the VCE name from which to obtain the component ID,
instead of entering the component parameter directly.
component Specify the ID of the component on which this maintenance
association will be made.
vlan-type Specify the type of VLAN associated with this MEG. If the value
"none" is specified, the MEG is not attached to a VLAN and the
contents of the VLAN ID list are ignored.
vid-list A comma-separated list of VLAN ID values. If the VLAN ID list is
left empty, the MEG is not attached to a VLAN and the VLAN
type is set to none implicitly.
mepid-list A comma-separated list of MEPID values.
mhf-creation Indicates if the management entity can create MHFs for VIDs on
which no Up MEP is configured. Valid values are:
none: No MHFs can be created.
default: Create MHFs if there is no lower active MD level or if there is a
MEP at the next active MD level on the port.
explicit: Create MHFs only if there is a MEP at the next active MD level on
the port.
defer: Use the Maintenance Domain parameter to determine how MHFs
are created.
sndr-id-perm Sender ID permission. Indicates what, if anything, is to be
included in the Sender ID TLV transmitted in CCMs, LBMs, LTMs
and LTRs.
rmep-auto-discovery Remote MEP auto-discovery. When enabled, remote MEPs will
be automatically added to the MA/MEG when the remote MEP's
CCM message is received.
maid-string-format-mode
Controls the behaviour of the generation of CCM PDUs using
Character-String (2) format with MD Name not present (1).
Valid values are:

Revision 1 — August 2022 49


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

normal: CCM PDUs using this format will result in the Short MA Name
Length field having the correct value.
legacy: CCM PDUs generated using this format and whose Short MA
Name length is less than 13, will result in the Short MA Name
Length field having a fixed value of 13. When the Short MA Name
length is 13 or greater, the generated CCM PDU will have the
correct value in the Short MA Name Length field. This will enable
inter-operability with existing Accedian equipment running older
firmware versions and configured to use Character String format
with MD Name not present.

4.49 CFM Add MEP


cfm add mep - Create a Maintenance association End Point
Description:
Create Maintenance association End Point.
Syntax:
cfm add mep {{ma-idx <decimal> } |
{ma-name <string> } |
{meg-idx <decimal> } |
{meg-name <string> } |
{meg-name-format <icc-based | string> }} {
{index <decimal>} | {mep-id <1-8191> } |
{name <string>} |
{direction <up | down> } |
{port <port-name> } |
{vce <vce-name>} |
{tp <tp-a | tp-z>} |
{pvid <0-4094> } |
{active <yes | no> } |
{cci-enable <yes | no> } |
{ccm-seq-number <enable | disable> } |
{csf-enable <yes | no> } |
{priority <0-7> } |
{lowest-alarm-pri <lowest-alarm-pri-choice>} |
{fng-alarm-time <decimal> } |
{fng-reset-time <decimal> } |
{fault-propagation <enable | disable> } |
{fp-port <port-name> } |
{interface-status-tlv <enable | disable> } }+

Revision 1 — August 2022 50


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

lowest-alarm-pri-choice = {all | macRemErrXconAis | remErrXconAis |


errXconAis | xconAis | ais | none>}
Parameters:
meg-idx MEG index. Identifies the MEG that MEP belongs to.
Cannot be used in conjunction with meg-name, meg-name-
format, ma-idx and ma-name.
meg-name MEG name. Identifies the MEG that MEP belongs to by name.
Cannot be used in conjunction with meg-idx, ma-idx and ma-
name.
meg-name-format MEG name format. Cannot be used in conjunction with meg-idx,
ma-idx and ma-name.
index A free MEP index. If the index is omitted, a free index is allocated
automatically. This should not be confused with the MEPID
specified using mep-id.
ma-idx Maintenance Association index. Identifies the Maintenance
Association to which this MEP belongs. Cannot be used in
conjunction with meg-idx, meg-name, meg-name-format and
ma-name.
ma-name Maintenance Association name. Identifies the Maintenance
Association to which this MEP belongs by name. Cannot be used
in conjunction with meg-idx, meg-name, meg-name-format and
ma-idx.
mep-id MEP identifier <1-8191>.
name A name assigned to reference this instance.
direction Direction, up or down.
port Indicates the port used by this MEP.
vce Indicates the VCE used by this MEP. The terminination point
must also be specified if VCE is used. Cannot be used in
conjunction with port.
tp Indicated the termination point of the VCE.
pvid Primary VLAN ID <0-4094>.
active Indicates the administrative state of the MEP. "yes" indicates that
the MEP is to function normally, and "no" that it is to cease
functioning.
cci-enable Indicates if the MEP will generate CCM messages.
ccm-seq-number Enable or disable CCM sequence number. When enabled, a MEP
transmits CCMs with a sequence number that increments by one
for each CCM. When disabled, a MEP transmits CCMs with a
sequence number set to zero.
csf-enable Enable or disable CSF. When enabled, a MEP transmits ETH-CSF
when a link failure is detected. If you are enabling CSF on a port
that supports media selection, you must set the media-selection
option to Manual.
priority CCM and LTM priority.

Revision 1 — August 2022 51


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

lowest-alarm-pri The lowest priority defect alarm that specifies the lowest priority
defect that is allowed to generate a Fault Alarm. Possible values
are: all, macRemErrXconAis, remErrXconAis, errXconAis, xconAis,
ais, or none.
fng-alarm-time Time that defects must be present before an alarm is raised (in
ms).
fng-reset-time Time that defects must be absent before resetting an alarm (in
ms).
fault-propagation Enable or disable EVC fault propagation.
fp-port Fault propagation port. Indicates toward which port, EVC faults
should be propagated.
interface-status-tlv Enable or disable the interface status TLV on a MEP. For a down
MEP, the fp-port's status is used for this TLV. For an up MEP, the
status is sourced from the port on which the MEP is created.

4.50 CFM Add Packet Loss


cfm add pkt-loss - Create packet loss measurement
Description:
Create packet loss measurement for a MEP. Packet loss measurements are based on Remote
MEP CCM sequence number. Remote MEP should have CCM sequence number generation
enabled to perform packet loss measurements.
Syntax:
cfm add pkt-loss {
{mep-idx <mep-index>} |
{index <decimal>} |
{rmep-id <1-8191>} |
{enable {yes | no}} |
{reference-period <decimal> } |
{threshold <decimal>} |
{threshold-ratio <decimal>} }+

<mep-index> = <decimal>
Parameters:
mep-idx Specifies the local MEP index from which packet loss should be
performed.
index A free packet loss index. If the index is omitted, a free index is
allocated automatically.
rmep-id Remote MEP Maintenance association End Point Identifier.
enable Indicates if the configured packet loss measurements are
performed.

Revision 1 — August 2022 52


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

reference-period Packet loss reference period in minutes.


threshold Maximum number allowed of packets lost before raising an alarm
during the reference period.
threshold-ratio Maximum % of packets lost before issuing an alarm during the
reference period.

4.51 CFM Add SLM


cfm add slm - Creates an SLM instance
Description:
Creates an SLM instance.
Syntax:
cfm add slm mep-idx <decimal> rmep-id <decimal> {{index <decimal>}
{name <string>}
{priority <decimal>}
{reporting-period <decimal>}
{interval <decimal>}
{state <enable| disable>}
{near-end-threshold <decimal>}
{far-end-threshold <decimal>}
}+
Parameters:
index The SLM instance index.
name A unique name to identify an SLM instance.
mep-idx The local MEP index.
rmep-id The remote MEP ID.
priority The priority of the SLM frames.
interval The SLM frames transmission rate.
state The state of the instance (disabled by default).
reporting-period A reporting period over which periodic counters are evaluated in
addition to the monotonic counters.
near-end-threshold The near-end frame loss threshold. (1 = 0.000001%)
far-end-threshold The far-end frame loss threshold. (1 = 0.000001%)

4.52 CFM Assign Interface


cfm assign interface - Assign an interface to CFM
Description:
Assign an existing interface to CFM to be used to define the outer tag in a Q-in-Q CFM frame.

Revision 1 — August 2022 53


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
cfm assign interface { <name> }
Parameters:
Name The interface name to be associated with CFM.

4.53 CFM Clear MEP Statistics


cfm clear mep statistics - Clear MEP statistics
Description:
Clear individual MEP statistics.
Syntax:
cfm clear mep statistics <mep-index>|<name>

<mep-index> = <decimal>
<name> = <string>
Parameters:
<mep-index> Identifies a MEP.
<name> Identifies a MEP by name.

4.54 CFM Clear Packet Loss Result


cfm clear pkt-loss result - Clear packet loss results
Description:
Clear continuous packet loss measurement results. Periodic and historical measurement
results are not affected.
Syntax:
cfm clear pkt-loss result [<pl-index> | <name>]
<pl-index> = <decimal>
<name> = <string>
Parameters:
<pl-index> Specifies the packet loss instance.
<name> Specifies the packet loss instance by name.

Revision 1 — August 2022 54


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.55 CFM Clear SLM Result


cfm clear slm result - Clear SLM results
Description:
Clear slm results.
Syntax:
cfm clear slm result <identifier>

<identifier> = <string | decimal>


Parameters:
<identifier> A unique name to identify an instance of SLM or the SLM index.

4.56 CFM Clear Statistics


cfm clear statistics - Clear CFM statistics
Description:
Clear global CFM statistics. This does not affect individual MEP statistics.
Syntax:
cfm clear statistics

4.57 CFM Clear VSP Result


cfm clear vsp results - Clear VSP results
Description:
Clear VSP results.
Syntax:
cfm clear vsp result [<identifier>]
<identifier> = <decimal>
Parameters:
<identifier> An optional unique index identifying the instance.

4.58 CFM Delete DMM


cfm delete dmm - Delete a delay measurement
Description:
Delete a denlay measurement instance.

Revision 1 — August 2022 55


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
cfm delete dmm <dmm-index> | <name>
<dmm-index> = <decimal>
<name> = <string>
Parameters:
<dmm-index> Identifies the DMM instance to delete.
<name> Identifies the DMM instance to delete by name.

4.59 CFM Delete Domain


cfm delete domain - Delete a Maintenance Domain
Description:
Delete a Maintenance Domain. When a Maintenance Domain is deleted, all the objects (MAs,
MEPs, DMMs, SLMs and Packet Loss instances) inside that Maintenance Domain are deleted.
Pseudo Maintenance Domains "Y.1731 level 0" to "Y.1731 level 7" cannot be deleted.
Syntax:
cfm delete domain <md-index>
<md-index> = <decimal>
Parameters:
<md-index> Identifies the Maintenance Domain to delete.

4.60 CFM Delete MA


cfm delete ma - Delete a Maintenance Association
Description:
Delete a Maintenance Association (MA). When an MA is deleted, all the objects (MEP, DMM,
SLM and Packet Loss instances) inside that MA are deleted.
Syntax:
cfm delete ma <ma-index>
<ma-index> = <decimal>
Parameters:
<ma-index> Identifies the Maintenance Association to delete.

Revision 1 — August 2022 56


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.61 CFM Delete MEG


cfm delete meg - Delete a MEG
Description:
Delete a MEG. When a MEG is deleted, all the objects (MEP, DMM, SLM and Packet Loss
instances) inside that MEG are deleted.
Syntax:
cfm delete meg <meg-index>
<meg-index> = <decimal>
Parameters:
<meg-index> Identifies the MEG to delete.

4.62 CFM Delete MEP


cfm delete mep - Delete a Maintenance association End Point
Description:
Delete a Maintenance association End Point. When a MEP is deleted, all the objects (DMM,
SLM and Packet Loss instances) inside that MEP are deleted.
Syntax:
cfm delete mep <mep-index>|<name>
<mep-index> = <decimal>
<name> = <string>
Parameters:
<mep-index> Identifies the MEP to delete.
<name> Identifies the MEP to delete by name.

4.63 CFM Delete Packet Loss


cfm delete pkt-loss - Delete a Packet Loss measurement instance
Description:
Delete a Packet Loss measurement instance.
Syntax:
cfm delete pkt-loss <pl-index>|<name>

<pl-index> = <decimal>
<name> = <string>

Revision 1 — August 2022 57


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
<pl-index> Identifies the packet loss instance to delete.
<name> Identifies the packet loss instance to delete by name.

4.64 CFM Delete SLM


cfm delete slm - Delete an SLM instance
Description:
Delete an SLM instance.
Syntax:
cfm delete slm <identifier>

<identifier> = <string | decimal>


Parameters:
<identifier> A unique identifier for the SLM instance or SLM index.

4.65 CFM Edit Defaults


cfm edit defaults - Modify CFM defaults parameters
Description:
The MHF default parameters control the MHF creation for VIDs that are not attached to an
MA within a VLAN component. For each component port, a VID is attached to an MA at a
specific MD level, if at this level a MEP exists on that port or if an Up MEP exists on another
port.
For a given VID, the default MHF MD level plus the set of Maintenance Associations that
include that VID define the VID's active MD levels. The MD level at which MHFs could be
created on a port for a given VID is the VID's lowest active MD level that is higher than any
MEP configured on that port.
If at this level the VID is attached to an MA, the MA parameters control the MHF creation.
Otherwise, the MHF default parameters control the MHF creation.
Syntax:
cfm edit defaults {{vce <vce-name>} | {component <component-id>}}
{
{level <0-7>} |
{mhf-creation <none | default | explicit>} |
{sndr-id-perm <none | chassis | manage | chassis-manage>}}
Parameters:
<vce-name> <string>

Revision 1 — August 2022 58


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

<component-id> <decimal>
level Indicates the default active MD level used by the MHF creation
algorithm when no other lower active MD level applies.
mhf-creation Indicates if the management entity can create MHFs for VIDs on
which no Up MEP is configured. The valid values are:
none: No MHFs can be created.
default: Create MHFs if there is no lower active MD level or if there is a
MEP at the next active MD level on the port.
explicit: Create MHFs only if there is a MEP at the next active MD level on
the port.
sndr-id-perm Sender ID permission. Indicates what, if anything, is to be
included in the Sender ID TLV transmitted in CCMs, LBMs, LTMs
and LTRs.

4.66 CFM Edit Default-Maid-String-Format-Mode


cfm edit default-maid-string-format-mode
Description:
Modify default MAID string-based format mode of MEG string-based instances. This value is
used to control the default value when creating a new MA/MEG.
Syntax:
cfm edit default-maid-string-format-mode {normal | legacy}

4.67 CFM Edit DMM


cfm edit dmm - Modify delay measurement
Description:
Modify a delay measurement instance.

NOTE : One-way delay measurements require time synchronization using NTP/PTP


on units at each probe end.

Syntax:
cfm edit dmm <dmm-index>|<name> {
{enable {yes | no}} |
{interval <decimal>} |
{name <string> } |
{reference-period <decimal> } |
{ow-delay {enable | disable}} |
{ow-max-delay <decimal>} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 59


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{ow-delay-threshold <decimal>} |
{ow-ad-threshold <decimal>} |
{ow-dv {enable | disable}} |
{ow-max-dv <decimal>} |
{ow-dv-threshold <decimal>} |
{ow-adv-threshold <decimal>} |
{tw-delay {enable | disable}} |
{tw-max-delay <decimal>} |
{tw-delay-threshold <decimal>} |
{tw-ad-threshold <decimal>} |
{tw-dv {enable | disable}} |
{tw-max-dv <decimal>} |
{tw-dv-threshold <decimal>} |
{tw-adv-threshold <decimal>}}+

<dmm-index> = <decimal>
<name> = <string>
Parameters:
<dmm-index> Specifies the DMM instance to modify.
<name> Specifies the DMM instance to modify by name.
Enable Enable or disable generating DMM frames.
Interval Interval in milliseconds at which DMMs should be sent.
Name A name assigned to reference this instance.
reference-period Reference period in minutes.
ow-delay Enable or disable one-way delay results.
ow-max-delay Maximum one-way delay.
ow-delay-threshold Maximum consecutive one-way delay samples allowed greater
than ow-max-delay.
ow-ad-threshold Maximum one-way average delay.
ow-dv Enable or disable one-way delay variation results.
ow-max-dv Maximum one-way delay variation allowed.
ow-dv-threshold Maximum consecutive one-way delay variation samples allowed
greater than ow-max-dv.
ow-adv-threshold Maximum one-way average delay variation.
tw-delay Enable or disable two-way delay results.
tw-max-delay Maximum two-way average delay.
tw-delay-threshold Maximum consecutive two-way delay samples allowed greater
than tw-max-delay.
tw-ad-threshold Maximum two-way average delay.
tw-dv Enable or disable two-way delay variation results.

Revision 1 — August 2022 60


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

tw-max-dv Maximum two-way delay variation allowed.


tw-dv-threshold Maximum consecutive tw-way delay variation samples allowed
greater than tw-max-dv.
tw-adv-threshold Maximum two-way average delay variation.

4.68 CFM Edit DMM Test ID TLV


cfm edit dmm test id tlv – tests the ID TLV
Description:
Controls the behaviour of the generation of DMM PDUs. When enabled, the Test ID TLV
will be included in the DMM PDUs as well as it will be decoded and used to associate the
DMR PDUs to the DMM object.
Syntax:
cfm edit dmm-test-id-tlv {enable | disable}

Parameters:
Error DMM test ID TLV cannot be modified if any DMM instances exist.

4.69 CFM Edit Domain


cfm edit domain - Modify a Maintenance Domain
Description:
Edit a Maintenance Domain. Once created, only the sender ID permissions can be modified.
Syntax:
cfm edit domain <md-index>
{mhf-creation <none | default | explicit>} |
{sndr-id-perm {none | chassis | manage | chassis-manage>}}+
<md-index> = <decimal>
Parameters:
<md-index> Maintenance Domain index.
mhf-creation Indicates if the management entity can create MHFs for VIDs on
which no Up MEP is configured. The valid values are:
none: No MHFs can be created.
default: Create MHFs if there is no lower active MD level or if there is a
MEP at the next active MD level on the port.
explicit: Create MHFs only if there is a MEP at the next active MD level on
the port.

Revision 1 — August 2022 61


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

sndr-id-perm Sender ID permission. Indicates what, if anything, is to be


included in the Sender ID TLV transmitted in CCMs, LBMs, LTMs,
and LTRs.

4.70 CFM Edit MA


cfm edit ma - Modify Maintenance Association attributes
Description:
Modify Maintenance Association attributes.
Syntax:
cfm edit ma <ma-index> {
{ccm-interval <decimal> } |
{mepid-list {<1-8191> [, <1-8191>]+}} |
{mhf-creation <none | default | explicit | defer>} |
{sndr-id-perm {none | chassis | manage | chassis-manage | defer}} |
{rmep-auto-discovery {disable | enable}}}
{maid-string-format-mode {normal | legacy}}}+

<ma-index> = <decimal>
Parameters:
ma-index Maintenance Association index. Identifies the MA to modify.
ccm-interval Interval, in milliseconds, at which the CCMs are sent.
mepid-list A comma-separated list of MEPID values.
mhf-creation Indicates if the management entity can create MHFs for VIDs on
which no Up MEP is configured. Valid values are:
none: No MHFs can be created.
default: Create MHFs if there is no lower active MD level or if there is a
MEP at the next active MD level on the port.
explicit: Create MHFs only if there is a MEP at the next active MD level on
the port.
defer: Use the Maintenance Domain parameter to determine how MHFs
are created.
sndr-id-perm Sender ID permission. Indicates what, if anything, is to be
included in the Sender ID TLV transmitted in CCMs, LBMs, LTMs
and LTRs.
rmep-auto-discovery Remote MEP auto-discovery. When enabled, remote MEPs will
be automatically added to the MA/MEG when the remote MEP's
CCM message is received.

maid-string-format-mode

Revision 1 — August 2022 62


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Controls the behaviour of the generation of CCM PDUs using


Character-String (2) format with MD Name not present (1).
Valid values are:
normal: CCM PDUs using this format will result in the Short MA Name
Length field having the correct value.
legacy: CCM PDUs generated using this format and whose Short MA
Name length is less than 13, will result in the Short MA Name
Length field having a fixed value of 13. When the Short MA Name
length is 13 or greater, the generated CCM PDU will have the
correct value in the Short MA Name Length field. This will enable
inter-operability with existing Accedian equipment running older
firmware versions and configured to use Character String format
with MD Name not present.

4.71 CFM Edit MEG


cfm edit meg - Modify MEG attributes
Description:
Modify Y.1731 MEG attributes.
Syntax:
cfm edit meg <meg-index> {
{ccm-interval <decimal>} |
{mepid-list {<1-8191> [, <1-8191>]+}} |
{mhf-creation <none | default | explicit | defer>} |
{sndr-id-perm {none | chassis | manage | chassis-manage | defer}} |
{rmep-auto-discovery {disable | enable}}}
{maid-string-format-mode {normal | legacy}}}+

<meg-index> = <decimal>
Parameters:
meg-index MEG index. Identifies the MEG to modify.
ccm-interval Interval, in milliseconds, at which the CCMs are sent.
mepid-list A comma-separated list of MEPID values.
mhf-creation Indicates if the management entity can create MHFs for VIDs on
which no Up MEP is configured. Valid values are:
none: No MHFs can be created.
default: Create MHFs if there is no lower active MD level or if there is a
MEP at the next active MD level on the port.
explicit: Create MHFs only if there is a MEP at the next active MD level on
the port.

Revision 1 — August 2022 63


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

defer: Use the Maintenance Domain parameter to determine how MHFs


are created.
sndr-id-perm Sender ID permission. Indicates what, if anything, is to be
included in the Sender ID TLV transmitted in CCMs, LBMs, LTMs
and LTRs.
rmep-auto-discovery Remote MEP auto-discovery. When enabled, remote MEPs will
be automatically added to the MA/MEG when the remote MEP's
CCM message is received.
maid-string-format-mode
Controls the behaviour of the generation of CCM PDUs using
Character-String (2) format with MD Name not present (1).
Valid values are:
normal: CCM PDUs using this format will result in the Short MA Name
Length field having the correct value.
legacy: CCM PDUs generated using this format and whose Short MA
Name length is less than 13, will result in the Short MA Name
Length field having a fixed value of 13. When the Short MA Name
length is 13 or greater, the generated CCM PDU will have the
correct value in the Short MA Name Length field. This will enable
inter-operability with existing Accedian equipment running older
firmware versions and configured to use Character String format
with MD Name not present.

4.72 CFM Edit MEP


cfm edit mep - Modify a Maintenance association End Point
Description:
Modify a Maintenance association End Point.
Syntax:
cfm edit mep <mep-index> | <name> {
{pvid <0-4094> } |
{active <yes | no> } |
{cci-enable <yes | no> } |
{csf-enable <yes | no> } |
{ccm-seq-number <enable | disable> } |
{name <string> } |
{priority <0-7> } |
{lowest-alarm-pri <lowest-alarm-pri-choice>} |
{fng-alarm-time <decimal> } |
{fng-reset-time <decimal> } |
{fault-propagation <enable | disable> } |
{fp-port <port-name> }

Revision 1 — August 2022 64


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{interface-status-tlv <enable | disable> } }+

lowest-alarm-pri-choice = {all | macRemErrXconAis | remErrXconAis |


errXconAis | xconAis | ais | none>}

<mep-index> = <decimal>
<name> = <string>
Parameters:
mep-index MEP index. Identifies the MEP to modify.
pvid Primary VLAN ID <0-4094>.
active Indicates the administrative state of the MEP. "true" indicates
that the MEP is to function normally and "false" that it is to cease
functioning.
cci-enable Indicates if the MEP will generate CCM messages.
ccm-seq-number Enable or disable CCM sequence number. When enabled, a MEP
transmits CCMs with a sequence number that increments by one
for each CCM. When disabled, a MEP transmits CCMs with a
sequence number set to zero.
name A name assigned to reference this instance.
csf-enable Enable or disable CSF. When enabled, a MEP transmits ETH-CSF
when a link failure is detected.
priority CCM, LTM, and CSF priority.
lowest-alarm-pri The lowest priority defect alarm that specifies the lowest priority
defect that is allowed to generate a Fault Alarm. Possible values
are: all, macRemErrXconAis, remErrXconAis, errXconAis, xconAis,
ais, or none.
fng-alarm-time Time that defects must be present before an alarm is raised (in
ms).
fng-reset-time Time that defects must be absent before resetting an alarm (in
ms).
fault-propagation Enable or disable EVC fault propagation.
fp-port Fault propagation port. Indicates toward which port EVC faults
should be propagated. When a MEP is configured on a VCE TP,
the correct fp-port is automatically selected.
interface-status-tlv Enable or disable the interface status TLV on a MEP. For a down
MEP, the fp-port's status is used for this TLV. For an up MEP, the
status is sourced from the port on which the MEP is created.

Revision 1 — August 2022 65


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.73 CFM Edit Packet Loss


cfm edit pkt-loss - Modify packet loss measurement
Description:
Modify a packet loss measurement instance. Packet loss measurements are based on Remote
MEP CCM sequence number. Remote MEP should have CCM sequence number generation
enabled to perform packet loss measurements.
Syntax:
cfm edit pkt-loss <pl-index>|<name> {
{enable {yes | no} } |
{reference-period <decimal> } |
{name <string> } |
{threshold <decimal>} |
{threshold-ratio <decimal>} }+

<pl-index> = <decimal>
<name> = <string>
Parameters:
<pl-index> Specifies the packet loss instance to modify.
<name> Specifies the packet loss instance by name.
enable Indicates if the configured packet loss measurements are
performed.
reference-period Packet loss reference period in minutes.
name A name assigned to reference this instance.
threshold Maximum number allowed of packets lost before raising an alarm
during the reference period.
threshold-ratio Maximum % of packets lost before issuing an alarm during the
reference period.

4.74 CFM Edit SLM


cfm edit slm - Edit an SLM instance
Description:
Edit an SLM instance.
Syntax:
cfm edit slm <identifier>
{{name <string>} |
{reference-period <decimal>} |
{state <enable | disable>} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 66


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{near-end-threshold <decimal>} |
{far-end-threshold <decimal>} |
{interval <decimal>}}+

<identifier> = <string | decimal >


Parameters:
<identifier> A unique identifier for the SLM instance or SLM index.
name A unique name to identify an SLM instance.
state The state of the instance (Disabled by default).
reference-period A reference period over which periodic counters are evaluated in
addition to the monotonic counters.
near-end- threshold The near-end frame loss threshold. (1 = 0.000001%)
far-end- threshold The far-end frame loss threshold. (1 = 0.000001%)
interval The SLM frames transmission rate.

4.75 CFM Edit VSP


cfm edit vsp - Edit the VSP configuration
Description:
Edit the VSP configuration.
Syntax:
cfm edit vsp {{meg-level <decimal | all>} |
{state <enable | disable>}}+
Parameters:
state The state of the instance (disabled by default).
meg-level The MEG level used.

4.76 CFM LBM


cfm lbm - Initiate a CFM loopback request
Description:
Initiate a CFM loopback request from a MEP. The MEP is specified by MEP index or by MEP
name. The target address is identified by MAC address or by remote MEPID. When identifying
the target by remote MEPID, the remote MEP MAC address should be resolved into the
remote MEP database. Otherwise, an invalid state error will be returned.
If the parameters "rmep-id" and "dst-mac-addr" are omitted, a single multicast LBM is sent
without Data TLV. The command waits five seconds for responses and displays the address of
each responder. Otherwise, the loopback is initiated and the command completes
immediately. In the latter case, if the parameter "data" or "data-length" is provided, the LBM

Revision 1 — August 2022 67


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

includes a Data TLV. By default, there is no Data TLV. In both cases, the loopback request
status is available from:
"cfm show mep status <mep-index>"
An active loopback request can be stopped using:
"cfm stop lbm"
Syntax:
cfm lbm {mep-idx <mep-index> | mep-name <name>}
{ {{rmep-id <1-8191>} |
{dst-mac-addr <mac-addr>}} |
{nbr-msg <decimal>} |
{interval <100-5000>} |
{vlan-priority <0-7>} |
{vlan-de {enable | disable}} |
{data <string>} |
{data-length <1-1488>}}+

<mep-index> = <decimal>
<name> = <string>
Parameters:
mep-index Specifies the local MEP index from which the loopback request
should be initiated.
mep-name Specifies the local MEP instance by name from which the
loopback request should be initiated.
rmep-id Specifies a remote MEP for loopback target.
dst-mac-addr Specifies a MAC address for loopback target.
nbr-msg Specifies the amount of loopback messages (LBM) to send.
Default value is 1 message.
Interval Specifies the interval between LBMs in milliseconds.
Default value is 1000.
vlan-priority Specifies the VLAN priority of LBMs.
vlan-de Specifies the VLAN drop eligible indicator value of LBMs.
data Specifies a data pattern for LBM Data TLV. By default, the Data
TLV is filled with incremental values.
data-length Specifies the data length of the LBM Data TLV. By default, the
length of the data parameter value is used.

Revision 1 — August 2022 68


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.77 CFM LTM


cfm ltm - Initiate a CFM link trace request
Description:
Initiate a CFM link trace request from a MEP. The MEP is specified by MEP index or by MEP
name. The target address is identified by MAC address or by remote MEPID. When identifying
the target by remote MEPID, the remote MEP MAC address should be resolved into the
remote MEP database. Otherwise, an invalid state error will be returned.
In verbose mode, the command waits a few seconds to display replies before completing. In
non-verbose mode, the command completes immediately and returns a link trace transaction
identifier. In both cases, the link trace transaction identifier allows displaying results from
recent link traces using the "cfm show ltr" command.
Syntax:
cfm ltm {{mep-idx <mep-index> | mep-name <name>}
{{rmep-id <1-8191>} |
{dst-mac-addr <mac-addr>}} |
{ttl <1-255>} |
{fdb-only <yes | no> } |
{verbose <yes | no>} }+

<mep-index> = <decimal>
<name> = <string>
Parameters:
mep-idx Specifies the local MEP index from which the link trace request
should be initiated.
mep-name Specifies the local MEP instance by name from which the link
trace request should be initiated.
rmep-id Specifies a remote MEP for target for the link trace.
dst-mac-addr Specifies a MAC address for target for the link trace.
ttl Specifies the link trace time to live.
fdb-only Specifies whether or not the LTM should set the flag
"UseFDBonly" (IEEE 802.1ag) or the flag "HWonly" (Y.1731).
verbose Allows verbose mode. Default is non-verbose.

4.78 CFM Show Defaults


cfm show defaults - Show CFM defaults parameters
Description:
The MHF default parameters control the MHF creation for VIDs that are not attached to a
Maintenance Association within a VLAN component. For each component port, a VID is

Revision 1 — August 2022 69


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

attached to an MA at a specific MD level, if at this level a MEP exists on that port or if an Up


MEP exists on another port.
For a given VID, the default MHF MD level plus the set of Maintenance Associations that
include that VID define the VID's active MD levels. The MD level at which MHFs could be
created on a port for a given VID is the VID's lowest active MD level that is higher than any
MEP configured on that port.
If at this level the VID is attached to an MA, the MA parameters control the MHF creation.
Otherwise, the MHF default parameters control the MHF creation.
Syntax:
cfm show defaults [{vce <vce-name>} | {component <component-id>}]
Parameters:
<vce-name> <string>
<component-id> <decimal>

4.79 CFM Show Default-Maid-String-Format-Mode


cfm show default-maid-string-format-mode
Description:
Show default MAID string-based format mode value
Syntax:
cfm show default-maid-string-format-mode

4.80 CFM Show DMM Configuration


cfm show dmm configuration - Show delay measurement configuration
Description:
Display a summary of the configured DMM instances. When an instance identifier is specified,
a detailed configuration report is displayed.
Syntax:
cfm show dmm configuration [<dmm-index> | <name>]
Parameters:
<dmm-index> <decimal> Identifies a delay measurement instance.
<name> <string> Identifies a delay measurement instance by name.

Revision 1 — August 2022 70


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.81 CFM Show DMM Result


cfm show dmm result - Show DMM results
Description:
Display delay measurements results.
Syntax:
cfm show dmm result [ [<dmm-index> | <name>] {
{ type {historic}} |
{ buckets <0-16>} |
{ period <period-id>}}+ ]

<dmm-index> = <decimal>
<name> = <string>
<period-id> = <decimal>
Parameters:
<dmm-index> Specifies the delay measurement instance.
<name> Specifies the delay measurement instance by name.
type Type of statistics to display:
historic: history buckets statistics. If the number of buckets is not
specified, the last 4 buckets will be displayed, starting from the
specified period. If no period is specified, the last available 4
buckets will be displayed.
buckets: Number of DMM buckets to display.
period: Reference period for the DMM history buckets. Zero for the most
recent period available.

4.82 CFM Show DMM test ID TLV


cfm edit dmm test id tlv – tests the ID TLV
Description:
Show DMM Test ID TLV state.
Syntax:
cfm show dmm-test-id-tlv {enable | disable}

Revision 1 — August 2022 71


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.83 CFM Show Domain Configuration


cfm show domain configuration - Show domain configuration
Description:
Display a summary of the configured Maintenance Domain instances. When a domain index is
specified, a detailed configuration report is displayed.
Syntax:
cfm show domain configuration [<md-index>]
<md-index> = <decimal>
Parameters:
<md-index> Identifies a Maintenance Domain.

4.84 CFM Show Interface


cfm show interface - Show interface list
Description:
Display the list of interfaces assigned to CFM.
Syntax:
cfm show interface <interface-index>
Parameters:
<interface-index> An optional CFM interface index to display.

4.85 CFM Show Latest Error


cfm show latest error - Show latest CFM PDU error
Description:
Display data about latest CFM PDU discarded. A CFM PDU can be discarded if it is malformed
or if no maintenance point is associated to it.
Syntax:
cfm show latest error [ detailed ]
Parameters:
detailed Shows detailed PDU information.

Revision 1 — August 2022 72


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.86 CFM Show LTR


cfm show ltr - Show link trace responses
Description:
Show link trace responses associated with a recent link trace request.
Syntax:
cfm show ltr {mep-idx <mep-index> | mep-name <name>} [ltm-id <decimal>]

<mep-index> = <decimal>
<name> = <string>

Parameters:
mep-idx Identifies a MEP by MEP index.
mep-name Identifies a MEP by name.
ltm-id Link trace transaction identifier. If omitted, the latest transaction
from that MEP is retrieved.

4.87 CFM Show MA Configuration


cfm show ma configuration - Show Maintenance Association configuration
Description:
Display a summary of the configured Maintenance Association instances. If an instance index
is specified, a detailed configuration report is displayed.
Syntax:
cfm show ma configuration [<ma-index>]
<ma-index> = <decimal>
Parameters:
<ma-index> Identifies a Maintenance Association.

4.88 CFM Show Ma-Maid-String-Format-Mode


cfm show ma-maid-string-format-mode
Description:
Display a summary MAID string format mode of the configured MEG instances. If an instance
index or an instance name along with an instance name format are specified, a detailed
configuration report is displayed.
Syntax:
cfm show ma-maid-string-format-mode [ma-idx]

Revision 1 — August 2022 73


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

<ma-index> = <decimal>
Parameters:
<ma-index> Identifies a Maintenance Association.

4.89 CFM Show MEG Configuration


cfm show meg configuration - Show MEG configuration
Description:
Display a summary of the configured MEG instances. If an instance index is specified, a
detailed configuration report is displayed.
Syntax:
cfm show meg configuration [<meg-index>]

<meg-index> = <decimal>
Parameters:
<meg-index> Identifies a MEG.

4.90 CFM Show MEP Configuration


cfm show mep configuration - Show MEP configuration
Description:
Display a summary of the configured MEP instances. If an instance identifier is specified, a
detailed configuration report is displayed.
Syntax:
cfm show mep configuration [<mep-index> | <name>]
<mep-index> = <decimal>
<name> = <string>
Parameters:
<mep-index> Identifies a MEP.
<name> Identifies a MEP instance by name.

Revision 1 — August 2022 74


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.91 CFM Show MEP Database


cfm show mep database - Show MEP database
Description:
Display a MEP database summary. If an remote MEPID is specified, a detailed report is
displayed.
Syntax:
cfm show mep database <mep-index> | <name> [rmep-id <1-8191>]
<mep-index> = <decimal>
<name> = <string>
Parameters:
<mep-index> Identifies a MEP.
<name> Identifies a MEP instance by name.
rmep-id Identifies a remote MEPID.

4.92 CFM Show MEP Statistics


cfm show mep statistics - Show MEP statistics
Description:
Display a summary of MEP statistics. If an instance identifier is specified, a detailed statistics
report is displayed.
Syntax:
cfm show mep statistics [<mep-index> | <name>]

<mep-index> = <decimal>
<name> = <string>
Parameters:
<mep-index> Identifies a MEP.
<name> Identifies a MEP instance by name.

4.93 CFM Show MEP Status


cfm show mep status - Show MEP status
Description:
Display a summary of MEP status. If an instance identifier is specified, a detailed status report
is displayed.
Syntax:
cfm show mep status [<mep-index> | <name>]

Revision 1 — August 2022 75


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

<mep-index> = <decimal>
<name> = <string>
Parameters:
<mep-index> Identifies a MEP.
<name> Identifies a MEP instance by name.

4.94 CFM Show Packet Loss Configuration


cfm show pkt-loss configuration - Show packet loss measurement
configuration
Description:
Display a summary of the configured packet loss instances. If an instance identifier is specified,
a detailed configuration report is displayed.
Syntax:
cfm show pkt-loss configuration [<pl-index> | <name>]

<pl-index> = <decimal>
<name> = <string>
Parameters:
<pl-index> Identifies a packet loss instance.
<name> Identifies a packet loss instance by name.

4.95 CFM Show Packet Loss Result


cfm show pkt-loss result - Show Packet Loss results
Description:
Display Lacket Loss measurement results.
Syntax:
cfm show pkt-loss result [ [<pl-index> | <name>] {
{ type {historic}} |
{ buckets <0-16>} |
{ period <period-id>}}+ ]

<pl-index> = <decimal>
<name> = <string>
<period-id> = <decimal>

Revision 1 — August 2022 76


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
<pl-index> Specifies the packet loss instance.
<name> Specifies the packet loss instance by name.
type Type of statistics to display:
historic: history buckets statistics. If the number of buckets is not
specified, the last 4 buckets will be displayed, starting from the
specified period. If no period is specified, the last available 4
buckets will be displayed.
buckets: Number of PL buckets to display.
period: Reference period for the PL history buckets. Zero for the most
recent period available.

4.96 CFM Show SLM Configuration


cfm show slm configuration - Display SLM configuration
Description:
Display SLM configuration. If an instance identifier is specified, a detailed configuration report
is displayed for the specified instance. Otherwise, a configuration summary for all instances is
displayed.
Syntax:
cfm show slm configuration [<identifier>]

<identifier> = <string | decimal>


Parameters:
<identifier> An optional instance name or index to display.

4.97 CFM Show SLM Result


cfm show slm result - Display SLM results
Description:
Display SLM counters. If an instance name or index is specified, detailed counters are
displayed for the specified instance. Otherwise, a summary of all available counters for all
instances are displayed.
Syntax:
cfm show slm result [<identifier> [type {continuous | periodic|
historic} {bucket | period} <decimal>]]

<identifier> = <string | decimal>

Revision 1 — August 2022 77


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
<identifier> An optional instance name or index to display.
type Type of statistics to display.
historic: history buckets statistics.
If the number of buckets is not specified, the last 4 buckets will
be displayed, starting from the specified period. If no period is
specified, the last available 4 buckets will be displayed.
buckets: Number of SLM buckets to display.
period: Reference period for the SLM history buckets.
Zero for the most recent period available.

4.98 CFM Show Stack


cfm show stack - Show CFM stack
Description:
Display the CFM stack summary information.
Syntax:
cfm show stack

4.99 CFM Show Statistics


cfm show statistics - Show CFM statistics
Description:
Display global CFM statistics.
Syntax:
cfm show statistics

4.100 CFM Show VSP Configuration


cfm show vsp configuration - Display VSP configuration
Description:
Display VSP configuration.
Syntax:
cfm show vsp configuration

Revision 1 — August 2022 78


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.101 CFM Show VSP Result


cfm show vsp results - Display VSP results
Description:
Display VSP results.
Syntax:
cfm show vsp result

4.102 CFM Stop LBM


cfm stop lbm - Stop CFM loopback requests
Description:
Stops all active CFM loopback request.
Syntax:
cfm stop lbm

4.103 CFM Unassign Interface


cfm unassign interface - Remove an interface association from CFM.
Description:
This command removes the association between an interface and CFM. It does not delete the
interface itself.
Syntax:
cfm unassign interface { <name> }
Parameters:
name The interface name to be disassociated with CFM.

4.104 Clilog Edit


clilog edit - Edit CLI Logger configuration
Description:
Use to enable or disable CLI Logger state. Optional keyword "force" can be used to prevent
interactive prompt
Syntax:
clilog edit { state { <enable | disable> [ force ] } }

Revision 1 — August 2022 79


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.105 Clilog Show Configuration


clilog show configuration - Show CLI Logger configuration
Description:
Show current configuration of CLI Logger.
Syntax:
clilog show configuration

4.106 Clilog Show Log


clilog show log - Show CLI Logger history
Description:
Show all logged commands of CLI Logger.
Syntax:
clilog show log

4.107 Clilog Show Log Continuous


clilog show log continuous - Show CLI Logger history without page breaks
Description:
Show all logged commands of CLI Logger without page breaks. Press CTRL-C to interrupt.
Syntax:
clilog show log continuous

4.108 Configuration Cancel


configuration cancel - Revert the rollback or factory default request
Description:
The configuration cancel command allows you to cancel the latest request to roll back or to
reset the current configuration to factory defaults.
Syntax:
configuration cancel

Revision 1 — August 2022 80


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.109 Configuration Changes


configuration changes - Display amount of configuration changes
Description:
The configuration changes command allows you to see the number of configuration changes
that took place since the system is up.
Syntax:
configuration changes

4.110 Configuration Export


configuration export - Export unit configuration
Description:
The configuration command allows you to export the existing unit configuration to a file. This
command also allows exporting from the screen. Typing "configuration export" without any
parameters will dump the configuration file to the stdout.
Syntax:
configuration {export}
[{ ftp | ftps |
scp | sftp | tftp }://[<user-name>:<password>@]<url>]
Examples:
configuration export ftp://username:password@mypc.com/newconfig.cfg
configuration export ftps://username:password@mypc.com:990/newconfig.cfg
configuration export sftp://username:password@mypc.com:22/newconfig.cfg
configuration export scp://username:password@mypc.com:22/newconfig.cfg
Parameters:
<user-name> <string>
<password> <string>

4.111 Configuration Generate-Script


configuration generate-script - Generate unit configuration in CLI format
Description:
The configuration command allows you to export the existing unit configuration in a CLI-
importable format either on screen or to an external server.
Syntax:
configuration generate-script
{module <cli-cmd-names> }

Revision 1 — August 2022 81


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{export-to-server [{ ftp | ftps | http |


https | sftp | tftp }
://[<user-name>:<password>@]<url>]}

<cli-cmd-names> = <cli-cmd-name>[,<cli-cmd-name>]+
Parameters:
cli-cmd-name A CLI command whose configuration should be generated. It is
possible to specify many commands. Alternatively, if no
command is specified, all configuration will be generated.
<user-name> <string>
<password> <string>
Example:
configuration generate-script module port,interface,soam export-to-server
tftp://192.168.1.240/soam_config.txt

4.112 Configuration Import


configuration import - Import system configuration
Description:
The configuration import command allows to import a configuration file that was previously
exported from the same type of unit.
This command also allows importing a configuration file from stdin. It is also useful when a
TFTP, FTP or HTTP server is not available for hosting.
Syntax:
configuration import
{http | tftp | ftp | sftp}://[<user-name>:<password>@]<url>

Examples:
configuration import http://mypc.com/newconfig.cfg
configuration import ftp://username:password@mypc.com/newconfig.cfg
Parameters:
<user-name> <string>
<password> <string>

Revision 1 — August 2022 82


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.113 Configuration Reset


configuration reset - Reset configuration to factory defaults
Description:
The configuration reset command allows you to reset your current configuration to the
factory default settings.
Syntax:
configuration reset

4.114 Configuration Rollback


configuration rollback- Reset Configuration to previous state
Description:
The configuration rollback command allows you to reset your current configuration to the
same state as the last time it was booted.
Syntax:
configuration rollback

4.115 Console Disable


console disable - Disable CLI on the serial console
Description:
Disable CLI on the serial console.
Syntax:
console disable

4.116 Console Enable


console enable - Enable CLI on the serial console
Description:
Enable CLI on the serial console.
Syntax:
console enable

Revision 1 — August 2022 83


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.117 Console Show


console show - Show serial console configuration
Description:
Show serial console configuration.
Syntax:
console show

4.118 COS PCP Map Edit


cos-pcp-map edit - Edit port CoS mappings
Description:
This command allows to configure port CoS mappings. When EVC mapping performs an
action on two VLAN tags, this mapping determines the PCP of the egress frame outer tag
based on internal CoS and color assigned at ingress classification.
Syntax:
cos-pcp-map edit <port-name> { {encode-dei {enable | disable}} |
{green-cos <cos-pcp-map-list>} |
{yellow-cos <cos-pcp-map-list>} }+

<port-name> = <string>
<cos-pcp-map-list> = <cos-pcp-map>[,<cos-pcp-map>]+
<cos-pcp-map> = <cos-value>:<pcp-value>
<cos-value> = <0-7>
<pcp-value> = <0-7>
Parameters:
<port-name> The port to which this mapping applies.
encode-dei Determines if the frame color is encoded using DEI. When
enabled and the outgoing frame is marked yellow, the bit is set
to 1, otherwise, it is set to 0.
green-cos A comma separated list of cos to pcp mappings to apply when
outgoing frame color is green.
yellow-cos A comma separated list of cos to pcp mappings to apply when
outgoing frame color is yellow.

Revision 1 — August 2022 84


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.119 COS PCP Map Show Configuration


cos-pcp-map show configuration - Show port CoS mappings configuration
Description:
This command allows to display port CoS mappings for one port.
Syntax:
cos-pcp-map show configuration <port-name>
Parameters:
<port-name> <string>

4.120 COS Profile Add/Edit DSCP


cos-profile add dscp - Add a DSCP CoS profile configuration
cos-profile edit dscp - Change a DSCP profile configuration
Description:
With these commands, you can create a new DSCP CoS profile or change the parameters of an
existing DSCP CoS profile.
Syntax:
cos-profile {add|edit} dscp <cos-profile-name> {
{name <cos-profile-name>} |
{encode-dei {enable | disable} } |
{input-list {<0-63> [,|- <0-63>]}+ } |
{pre-marking {green | yellow} } |
{green-out <0-7> } |
{yellow-out <0-7> } |
{default-pre-marking {green | yellow} } |
{default-green-out <0-7> } |
{default-yellow-out <0-7> }}+
Parameters:
<cos-profile-name> <string>
name New name when editing an exiting profile.
encode-dei Set DEI bit to 1 if the outgoing frame color is yellow.
input-list A comma-separated list of DSCP or DSCP range (x-y) values.
pre-marking Pre-marking color to be applied to frames if the input DSCP is in
input-list.
green-out PCP value to be used if the outgoing frame color is green and the
input DSCP is in input-list.
yellow-out PCP value to be used if the outgoing frame color is yellow and
the input DSCP is in input-list.

Revision 1 — August 2022 85


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

default-pre-marking Pre-marking color to be used for all frames if the input DSCP is
not in input-list.
default-green-out PCP value to be used if the outgoing frame color is green and the
input DSCP is NOT in input-list.
default-yellow-out PCP value to be used if the outgoing frame color is yellow and
the input DSCP is NOT in input-list.

NOTE : If input-list is omitted, the default-* parameters interpret the input-list as a


0-63 range.

4.121 COS Profile Add/Edit PCP


cos-profile add pcp - Add a PCP CoS profile configuration
cos-profile edit pcp - Change an PCP profile configuration
Description:
With these commands, you can create a new PCP CoS profile or change the parameters of an
existing PCP CoS profile.
Syntax:
cos-profile {add|edit} pcp <cos-profile-name> {
{name <cos-profile-name>} |
{decode-dei {enable | disable} } |
{encode-dei {enable | disable} } |
{input-list {<0-7> [,|- <0-7>]}+ } |
{pre-marking {green | yellow} } |
{green-out <0-7> } |
{yellow-out <0-7> } |
{default-pre-marking {green | yellow} } |
{default-green-out <0-7> } |
{default-yellow-out <0-7> }}+
Parameters:
<cos-profile-name> <string>
name New name when editing an existing profile.
decode-dei Use incoming DEI as a pre-marking color (0=green, 1=yellow).
encode-dei Set DEI bit to 1 if the outgoing frame color is yellow.
input-list A comma-separated list of IP precedence or IP precedence range
(x-y) values.
pre-marking Pre-marking color to be applied to frames if the input PCP is in
input-list.
green-out PCP value to be used if the outgoing frame color is green and the
input PCP is in input-list.

Revision 1 — August 2022 86


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

yellow-out PCP value to be used if the outgoing frame color is yellow and
the input PCP is in input-list.
default-pre-marking Pre-marking color to be used for all frames if the input PCP is not
in input-list.
default-green-out PCP value to be used if the outgoing frame color is green and the
input PCP is NOT in input-list.
default-yellow-out PCP value to be used if the outgoing frame color is yellow and
the input PCP is NOT in input-list.

NOTE : If input-list is omitted, the default-* parameters interpret the input-list as a


0-7 range.

4.122 COS Profile Add/Edit Precedence


cos-profile add precedence - Add an IP precedence CoS profile
configuration
cos-profile edit precedence - Change an IP precedence profile configuration
Description:
With these commands, you can create a new IP precedence CoS profile or change the
parameters of an existing IP precedence CoS profile.
Syntax:
cos-profile {add|edit} precedence <cos-profile-name> {
{name <cos-profile-name>} |
{encode-dei {enable | disable} } |
{input-list {<0-7> [,|- <0-7>]}+ } |
{pre-marking {green | yellow} } |
{green-out <0-7> } |
{yellow-out <0-7> } |
{default-pre-marking {green | yellow} } |
{default-green-out <0-7> } |
{default-yellow-out <0-7> }}+
Parameters:
<cos-profile-name> <string>
name New name when editing an existing profile.
encode-dei Set DEI bit to 1 if the outgoing frame color is yellow.
input-list A comma-separated list of IP precedence or IP precedence range
(x-y) values.
pre-marking Pre-marking color to be applied to frames if the input IP
precedence is in input-list.

Revision 1 — August 2022 87


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

green-out PCP value to be used if the outgoing frame color is green and the
input IP precedence is in input-list.
yellow-out PCP value to be used if the outgoing frame color is yellow and
the input IP precedence is in input-list.
default-pre-marking Pre-marking color to be used for all frames if the input IP
precedence is not in input-list.
default-green-out PCP value to be used if the outgoing frame color is green and the
input IP precedence is NOT in input-list.
default-yellow-out PCP value to be used if the outgoing packet color is yellow and
the input IP precedence is NOT in input-list.

NOTE : If input-list is omitted, the default-* parameters interpret the input-list as a


0-7 range.

4.123 COS Profile Delete


cos-profile delete - Delete the specified CoS profile
Description:
Delete the specified CoS profile.
Syntax:
cos-profile delete <cos-profile-name>
Parameters:
<cos-profile-name> <string>

4.124 COS Profile Show Configuration


cos-profile show configuration - Show CoS profile configuration
Description:
Displays CoS profile configuration. Specifying a profile name will display a detailed
configuration for this profile. Otherwise, a configuration summary for all CoS profiles will be
displayed.
Syntax:
cos-profile show configuration [<cos-profile-name>]
Parameters:
<cos-profile-name> <string>

Revision 1 — August 2022 88


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.125 CPU Edit OAM Options


cpu edit oam-options - Edit CPU OAM options
Description:
The CPU OAM options modify the criterion used to submit various frames to the CPU for
processing. These options are configurable per port.
Syntax:
cpu edit oam-options <port-name>
{mgmt-mode {auto|mac-oui|policy}}

<port-name> = <string>
Parameters:
<port-name> A system port name to which these options apply.
mgmt-mode This parameter modifies the method used to select multicast and
broadcast frames required by system management interfaces,
such ARP and NDP, that are submitted to the CPU.
auto: The system determines automatically the best policies to apply
based on system interface configuration and hardware filtering
resources.
mac-oui: Only frames with a source MAC address containing a unit's MAC
OUI are submitted to the CPU.
policy: No broadcast nor multicast frames are selected by default for this
port. The user is responsible to configure policies with the action
"mgmt-oam", "mgmt-oam-drop" or "mgmt-oam-fwd" required
by system network interfaces configured on the specified port.

NOTE : Using mgmt-mode auto or mac-oui does not preclude configuring policies
with one of the mgmt-oam actions listed above.

4.126 CPU Show OAM Options


cpu show oam-options - Shows CPU OAM options
Description:
Shows the configuration of CPU OAM options. The CPU OAM options modify the criterion
used to submit various frames to the CPU for processing. These options are configurable per
port.
Syntax:
cpu show oam-options [<port-name>]

<port-name> = <string>

Revision 1 — August 2022 89


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
<port-name> A system port name.

4.127 Date
date - Print or set the system date and time
Description:
Same as the UNIX date command. Display the current time in the given FORMAT or set the
system date.
Syntax:
date {option}... {MMDDhhmm[[CC]YY][.ss]} { '+format' }
Parameters:
d Print the specified date.
R Output RFC-2822 compliant date string.
s Set the current date to the specified date.
u Print or set Coordinated Universal Time.

Format Choose the output of date.


%% a literal %
%a locale's abbreviated weekday name (Sun..Sat)
%A locale's full weekday name, variable length (Sunday..Saturday)
%b locale's abbreviated month name (Jan..Dec)
%B locale's full month name, variable length (January..December)
%c locale's date and time (Sat Nov 04 12:02:33 EST 1989)
%C century (year divided by 100 and truncated to an integer) [00-
99]
%d day of month (01..31)
%D date (mm/dd/yy)
%e day of month, blank padded ( 1..31)
%F same as %Y-%m-%d
%g the 2-digit year corresponding to the %V week number
%G the 4-digit year corresponding to the %V week number
%h same as %b
%H hour (00..23)
%I hour (01..12)
%j day of year (001..366)
%k hour ( 0..23)
%l hour ( 1..12)
%m month (01..12)

Revision 1 — August 2022 90


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

%M minute (00..59)
%n a newline
%N nanoseconds (000000000..999999999)
%p locale's upper case AM or PM indicator (blank in many locales)
%P locale's lower case am or pm indicator (blank in many locales)
%r time, 12-hour (hh:mm:ss [AP]M)
%R time, 24-hour (hh:mm)
%s seconds since `00:00:00 1970-01-01 UTC' (a GNU extension)
%S second (00..60); the 60 is necessary to accommodate a leap
second
%t a horizontal tab
%T time, 24-hour (hh:mm:ss)
%u day of week (1..7); 1 represents Monday
%U week number of year with Sunday as first day of week (00..53)
%V week number of year with Monday as first day of week (01..53)
%w day of week (0..6); 0 represents Sunday
%W week number of year with Monday as first day of week (00..53)
%x locale's date representation (mm/dd/yy)
%X locale's time representation (%H:%M:%S)
%y last two digits of year (00..99)
%Y year (1970...)
%z RFC-2822 style numeric timezone (-0500) (a nonstandard
extension)
%Z time zone (e.g., EDT), or nothing if no time zone is determinable
Example:
set the date to December 1st 2006,15:48PM : date -s 120115482006
show the current day only : date '+%d'

4.128 DHCP Relay Edit


dhcp-relay edit - Edit DHCP-relay configuration
Description:
The dhcp-relay edit is used to modify the DHCP-relay configuration.
Syntax:
dhcp-relay edit { {state <enable|disable>} |
{server1 <ip-addr>} |
{server2 <ip-addr>} }+
Parameters:
State The state of DHCP relaying.

Revision 1 — August 2022 91


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

server1 The first DHCP server address.


server2 The second DHCP server address.

4.129 DHCP Relay Show Configuration


dhcp-relay show configuration - Display DHCP-relay configuration
Description:
The dhcp-relay show configuration command displays the DHCP-relay configuration.
Syntax:
dhcp-relay show configuration

4.130 DNS Edit


dns edit - Change the DNS configuration
Description:
dns edit allows you to choose the server and the interface to use for the DNS service.
Syntax:
dns edit [ {dhcp {enable <interface-name> | disable}} |
{dhcp6 {enable <interface-name> | disable}} |
{domain <string>} |
{hostname <string>} |
{dhcp-hostname <string>} |
{dhcp-hostname-option <custom|serial-number|current>}
{dhcp-client-id <string>} |
{server1 <ip-addr|ipv6-addr>} |
{server2 <ip-addr|ipv6-addr>} ]+
Parameters:
<interface-name> <string>
dhcp Enable/disable use of DNS settings obtained via DHCP.
<interface-name> specifies the interface to use for obtaining
DHCP information.
dhcp6 Enable/disable use of DNS settings obtained via DHCPv6.
<interface-name> specifies the interface to use for obtaining
DHCP information.
domain The domain name associated with the DNS.
hostname The name of the unit.
dhcp-client-id The DHCP client identifier (option 61). An empty string forces
MAC address as client ID.

Revision 1 — August 2022 92


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

dhcp-hostname The DHCP client custom host name (option 12) to use when
selecting custom dhcp-hostname-option.
dhcp-hostname-option The DHCP hostname option to set on the DHCP client.
server1 The first DNS address used if no DHCP server set.
server2 The second DNS address used if no DHCP server set.

4.131 DNS Show


dns show - Show the DNS configuration
Description:
Show the DNS configuration. The "Domain", "DNS server 1" and "DNS server 2" fields are only
used if "Use DHCP result" is set to Disabled.
Syntax:
dns show

4.132 Dry-Contact-Input Edit


dry-contact-input edit - Change dry-contact configuration
Description:
With dry-contact-input edit, you can change the parameters of one of the available dry-
contact input.
Syntax:
dry-contact-input edit <id> {
{state {enable|disable}} |
{normal-state {close|open}} |
{name <dry-contact-input-name>} |
{sampling-period <100-1000>} }+
Parameters:
<id> <decimal>
state Enable/disable the use of the dry-contact input. When enabled,
the alarm point for this input are created and the input is
monitored according to the following monitoring configurations.
normal-state Selects the normal state of the input. An alarm is raised, when
the input state is different from the normal state for more than 3
consecutives samples. The input sampling rate is determined by
the value of the input sampling period.
name Specifies the name of the dry-contact used in alarms.
sampling-period Determines the time, in milliseconds, between two consecutive
readings of the input state. The values must be specified within

Revision 1 — August 2022 93


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

the range of 100 and 1000 milliseconds in steps of 100


milliseconds.

4.133 Dry-Contact-Input Show Configuration


dry-contact-input show configuration - Show dry-contact configuration
Description:
Display all configuration parameters of the available dry-contact input.
Syntax:
dry-contact-input show configuration

4.134 Dry-Contact-Input Show Status


dry-contact-input show status - Show dry-contact status
Description:
Display status of the available dry-contact input.
Syntax:
dry-contact-input show status

4.135 ERP Add


erp add - Create an Ethernet Ring Protection
Description:
Create an Ethernet Ring Protection.
Syntax:
erp add <name> {
{aps-vid <1-4095>} |
{guard <decimal>} |
{hold-off <decimal>} |
{index <decimal>} |
{lag <string>} |
{level {0-7}} |
{mep0-idx <decimal>} |
{mep0-identifier <string> |
{mep1-identifier <string>} |
{port0 <string>} |
{port1 <string>} |
{revertive {yes | no}} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 94


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{rpl-port <string>} |
{rpl-role <string>} |
{subring-without-vc {yes | no}} |
{version <decimal>} |
{vid-list <string>} |
{vlan-type <string>} |
{wtr <decimal>}}+
Parameters:
<name> The ERP instance name.
aps-vid The APS VLAN ID ranging (1 - 4095).
guard Guard timer duration in ms.
hold-off Hold off timer duration in ms.
index ERP instance index.
lag LAG name.
level MEG level.
mep0-identifier MEP name or index for ring port 0.
mep1-identifier MEP name or index for ring port 1.
name ERP instance name.
port0 Name of the physical port 0 used in the ERP.
port1 Name of the physical port 1 used in the ERP.
revertive Revertive mode of operation.
rpl-port Ring protection link port.
rpl-role Ring protection link role (none, owner, neighbour).
subring-without-vc Member of a sub-ring without a virtual channel.
version G.8032 protocol version.
vid-list VLAN ID list.
vlan-type C-VLAN or S-VLAN or T-VLAN type.
wtr Wait to restore timer in minutes.

4.136 ERP Clear Command


erp clear command - Sends a clear command to an ERP instance
Description:
Sends a clear command to an ERP instance.
Syntax:
erp clear command <identifier>
Parameters:
identifier The ERP index or name.

Revision 1 — August 2022 95


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.137 ERP Clear Statistics


erp clear statistics - Clear statistics of an ERP instance
Description:
Clear statistics of an ERP instance.
Syntax:
erp clear statistics <identifier>
Parameters:
identifier The ERP index or name.

4.138 ERP Delete


erp delete - Delete and Ethernet Ring Protection
Description:
Delete an Ethernet Ring Protection.
Syntax:
erp delete <identifier>
Parameters:
identifier The ERP name or index.

4.139 ERP Edit


erp edit - Edit an Ethernet Ring Protection
Description:
Edit an Ethernet Ring Protection.
Syntax:
erp edit {
{guard <decimal>} |
{hold-off <decimal>} |
{mep0-identifier <string> |
{mep1-identifier <string>} |
{name <string>} |
{revertive {yes | no}} |
{rpl-port <string>} |
{rpl-role <string>} |
{version <decimal>} |
{vid-list <string>} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 96


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{wtr <decimal>}}+
Parameters:
guard Guard timer duration in ms.
hold-off Hold off timer duration in ms.
mep0-identifier MEP name or index for ring port 0.
mep1-identifier MEP name or index for ring port 1.
name ERP instance name.
revertive Revertive mode of operation.
rpl-port Ring protection link port.
rpl-role RPL role.
version G.8032 protocol version.
vid-list VLAN ID list.
wtr Wait to restore timer in minutes.

4.140 ERP Flush FDB


erp flush-fdb - Flush forwarding DB
Description:
Remove all learned MAC addresses from the filtering database.
Syntax:
erp flush-fdb

4.141 ERP Force Switch


erp force-switch - Forced Switching of a ring port
Description:
Forced switching of a ring port.
Syntax:
erp force-switch <identifier> port <string>
Parameters:
identifier The ERP name or index
port The port to block.

Revision 1 — August 2022 97


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.142 ERP Manual Switch


erp manual-switch - Manual switching of a ring port
Description:
Manual switching of a ring port.
Syntax:
erp manual-switch <identifier> port <string>
Parameters:
identifier The ERP name or index
port The port to block.

4.143 ERP Show Configuration


erp show configuration - Show the configuration of ERP instances
Description:
Shows the configuration of ERP instances.
Syntax:
erp show configuration [<identifier>]
Parameters:
identifier The ERP name or index

4.144 ERP Show Statistics


erp show statistics - Shows the statistics of ERP instances
Description:
Shows the statistics of ERP instances.
Syntax:
erp show statistics [<identifier>]
Parameters:
identifier The ERP name or index

4.145 ERP Show Status


erp show status - Shows the status of ERP instances
Description:
Shows the status of ERP instances.

Revision 1 — August 2022 98


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
erp show status [<identifier>]
Parameters:
identifier The ERP name or index

4.146 ERP Show VLAN-FDB


erp show vlan-fdb - Shows the vlan-fdb of ERP instances
Description:
Shows the vlan-fdb of ERP instances.
Syntax:
erp show vlan-fdb <identifier>
Parameters:
identifier The ERP name or index

4.147 Exit/Quit
exit - Logout of the CLI
quit - Logout of the CLI
Description:
Logout of the CLI.
Syntax:
exit
quit

4.148 Fan Test Edit


fan-test edit– Edit fan test retry period
Description:
Use the fan-test edit command to modify the fan test parameters
Syntax:
Fan-test edit {{retry-period <1-24>}}+
Parameters:
retry-period In case a fan test fails, this value will be used to set retry period
of fan test.

Revision 1 — August 2022 99


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.149 Fan Test Show


fan-test show – Show fan test configuration and result
Description:
Use this fan-test show command to display fan test configuration and result.
Syntax:
Fan-test show

4.150 Fan Test Start


fan-test start – Start fan testing
Description:
Use the fan-test start command to start fan test.
Syntax:
Fan-test start

4.151 Fault Propagation Edit


fault-propagation edit - Modify port fault propagation options
Description
When fault propagation is enabled for a port, its link status (up or down) depends on the
opposite port status or EVC status. Fault propagation could be based on link status only, or
link status and EVC status.
In link status only operation mode, a link down on the opposite port is propagated to the
specified port. Link status fault propagation is allowed in both directions. It can be enabled on
a port and its opposite port.
In EVC status operation mode, the status of PAA probe(s) and/or CFM MEP(s) are propagated
to the specified port. At least one PAA probe or CFM MEP should be free of connectivity
errors to enable the specified port. If there is no PAA probe and no CFM MEP configured in
EVC fault propagation mode for the specified port, that port will stay down. When enabled for
a port, fault propagation should be disabled on the opposite port.
Syntax
sfp command {<connector-name> | <port-name>}

Revision 1 — August 2022 100


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.152 Fault Propagation Enable/Disable


fault-propagation enable - Enable fault propagation for a port
fault-propagation disable - Disable fault propagation for a port
Description:
When fault propagation is enabled for a port, a link down on the opposite port will be
propagated to that port.
These commands are deprecated and have been kept for backward compatibility purpose. The
command "fault-propagation edit" should be used instead.
Syntax:
fault-propagation {enable | disable} {<port-name>}

4.153 Fault Propagation Show


fault-propagation show - Show fault propagation configuration
Description:
Show fault propagation configuration.
Syntax:
fault-propagation show [<port-name>]

4.154 Filter Delete IPv4


filter delete ipv4 - Delete the specified IPv4 filter
Description:
filter delete ipv4 will delete the specified IPv4 filter.
Syntax:
filter delete ipv4 <filter-name>
Parameters:
<filter-name> <string>

4.155 Filter Delete IPv6


filter delete ipv6 - Delete the specified IPv6 filter
Description:
filter delete ipv6 will delete the specified IPv6 filter.
Syntax:
filter delete ipv6 <filter-name>

Revision 1 — August 2022 101


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
<filter-name> <string>

4.156 Filter Delete L2


filter delete l2 - Delete the specified Layer 2 filter
Description:
filter delete l2 will delete the specified Layer 2 filter.
Syntax:
filter delete l2 <filter-name>
Parameters:
<filter-name> <string>

4.157 Filter Add/Edit IPv4


filter add ipv4 - Add an IPv4 filter configuration
filter edit ipv4 - Change an IPv4 filter configuration
Description:
With these commands, you can create a new filter or change the parameters of an existing
filter instance.
Syntax:
filter {add|edit} ipv4 <filter-name> {
{name <filter-name>} |
{dst-ipv4-addr <ip-addr> {disable | enable} } |
{dst-ipv4-mask <ip-addr>} |
{src-ipv4-addr <ip-addr> {disable | enable} } |
{src-ipv4-mask <ip-addr>} |
{protocol <0-255> {disable | enable}} |
{header-length <0-15> {disable | enable}} |
{ttl <0-255> {disable | enable}} |
{ip-cos-mode {dscp-mode | precedence-mode}} |
{dscp <0-63> {disable | enable}} |
{dscp-last <0-63> {disable | enable}} |
{dscp-oper {lt | gt | eq | range}} |
{precedence <0-7> {disable | enable}} |
{precedence-last <0-7> {disable | enable}} |
{precedence-oper {lt | gt | eq | range}} |
{ecn <0-3> {disable | enable}} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 102


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{icmp-type <0-255> {disable | enable}} |


{icmp-code <0-255> {disable | enable}} |
{destination-port <0-65535> {disable | enable}} |
{destination-port-last <0-65535> {disable | enable}} |
{destination-port-oper {eq | range}} |
{source-port <0-65535> {disable | enable}} |
{source-port-last <0-65535> {disable | enable}} |
{source-port-oper {eq | range}} |
{vlanstack-size <0-3> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan1-cfi <0-1> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan2-cfi <0-1> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan1-id <0-4095> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan1-id-last <0-4095> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan1-id-oper {lt | gt | eq | range}} |
{vlan2-id <0-4095> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan2-id-last <0-4095> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan2-id-oper {lt | gt | eq | range}} |
{vlan1-priority <0-7> {disable | enable} } |
{vlan1-priority-last <0-7> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan1-priority-oper {lt | gt | eq | range}} |
{vlan2-priority <0-7> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan2-priority-last <0-7> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan2-priority-oper {lt | gt | eq | range}} |
{vlan1-ethertype {c-vlan | s-vlan | t-vlan | any | disable}} |
{vlan2-ethertype {c-vlan | s-vlan | t-vlan | any | disable}} }+

Revision 1 — August 2022 103


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
<filter-name> <string>
name A unique name to identify the filter.
disable | enable To enable or disable the field in the check.
dst-ipv4-addr The IPv4 destination address.
dst-ipv4-mask Wildcard mask to be applied to the IPv4 destination address.
Valid mask are prefix from 0 to 32 bits (ex. 0.0.0.0 -
255.255.255.255).
src-ipv4-addr The IPv4 source address.
src-ipv4-mask Wildcard mask to be applied to the IPv4 destination address.
Valid mask are prefix from 0 to 32 bits (ex. 0.0.0.0 -
255.255.255.255).
protocol Layer 4 protocol value (0 - 255).
header-length IPv4 header length in 32bit units (5 - 15).
ttl IPv4 time to live value (0 - 255).
icmp-type ICMP type (0 - 255).
icmp-code ICMP code (0 - 255).
destination-port Destination port for TCP and UDP protocols
(0 - 65535).
destination-port-last Destination port last value, used in range operation.
destination-port-oper Destination port operator. Valid operator types are: eq (equal) or
range (inclusive range).
source-port Source port for TCP and UDP protocols (0 - 65535).
source-port-last Source port last value, used in range operation.
source-port-oper Source port operator. Valid operator types are: eq (equal) or
range (inclusive range).
ip-qos-mode Choose between DSCP (RFC2474) or precedence (RFC791).
interpretation for the IP TOS field.
dscp The Diff-Serv CodePoint value (0 - 63).
dscp-last The last DSCP value, used in range operation.
dscp-oper Diff-Serv CodePoint operator. Valid operator types are: gt
(greater than), lt (less than), eq (equal) or range (inclusive range).
precedence The Precedence value (0 - 7).
precedence-last The last Precedence value, used in range operation.
precedence-oper Precedence field operator. Valid operator types are: gt (greater
than), lt (less than), eq (equal) or range (inclusive range).
ecn Explicit Congestion Notification value (0 - 3).
vlanstack-size Indicates the number of VLAN tags that packets must have in
order to match this filter (0 - 3).
vlan1-cfi First VLAN CFI may be 0 or 1. It is usually set to 0.
vlan2-cfi Second VLAN CFI may be 0 or 1. It is usually set to 0.
vlan1-id First VLAN ID may be any value between 0 and 4095.

Revision 1 — August 2022 104


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

vlan1-id-last First VLAN ID last value, used in range operation.


vlan1-id-oper First VLAN ID operator. Valid operator types are: gt (greater
than), lt (less than), eq (equal) or range (inclusive range).
vlan2-id Second VLAN ID may be any value between 0 and 4095.
vlan2-id-last Second VLAN ID last value, used in range operation.
vlan2-id-oper Second VLAN ID operator. Valid operator types are: gt (greater
than), lt (less than), eq (equal) or range (inclusive range).
vlan1-priority First VLAN priority can vary between 0 and 7.
vlan1-priority-last First VLAN priority last value, used in range operation.
vlan1-priority-oper First VLAN priority operator. Valid operator types are: gt (greater
than), lt (less than), eq (equal) or range (inclusive range).
vlan2-priority Second VLAN priority can vary between 0 and 7.
vlan2-priority-last Second VLAN priority last value, used in range operation.
vlan2-priority-oper Second VLAN priority operator. Valid operator types are: gt
(greater than), lt (less than), eq (equal) or range (inclusive range).
vlan1-ethertype First VLAN Ethertype, the Ethernet type identifies the following
VLAN if we expect a specific type or if we accept any.
vlan2-ethertype Second VLAN Ethertype, The Ethernet type identifies the
following VLAN if we expect a specific type or if we accept any.

4.158 Filter Add/Edit IPv6


filter add ipv6 - Add an IPv6 filter configuration
filter edit ipv6 - Change an IPv6 filter configuration
Description:
With these commands, you can create a new filter or change the parameters of an existing
filter instance.
Syntax:
filter {add|edit} ipv6 <filter-name> {
{name <filter-name>} |
{dst-ipv6-addr <ip-addr> {disable | enable} } |
{dst-ipv6-prefix <0-128>} |
{src-ipv6-addr <ip-addr> {disable | enable} } |
{src-ipv6-prefix <0-128>} |
{next-header <0-255> {disable | enable}} |
{hop-limit <0-255> {disable | enable}} |
{ip-cos-mode {dscp-mode | precedence-mode}} |
{dscp <0-63> {disable | enable}} |
{dscp-last <0-63> {disable | enable}} |
{dscp-oper {lt | gt | eq | range}} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 105


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{precedence <0-7> {disable | enable}} |


{precedence-last <0-7> {disable | enable}} |
{precedence-oper {lt | gt | eq | range}} |
{icmp-type <0-255> {disable | enable}} |
{icmp-code <0-255> {disable | enable}} |
{destination-port <0-65535> {disable | enable}} |
{destination-port-last <0-65535> {disable | enable}} |
{destination-port-oper {eq | range}} |
{source-port <0-65535> {disable | enable}} |
{source-port-last <0-65535> {disable | enable}} |
{source-port-oper {eq | range}} |
{vlan1-cfi <0-1> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan2-cfi <0-1> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan1-id <0-4095> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan1-id-last <0-4095> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan1-id-oper {lt | gt | eq | range}} |
{vlan2-id <0-4095> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan2-id-last <0-4095> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan2-id-oper {lt | gt | eq | range}} |
{vlan1-priority <0-7> {disable | enable} } |
{vlan1-priority-last <0-7> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan1-priority-oper {lt | gt | eq | range}} |
{vlan2-priority <0-7> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan2-priority-last <0-7> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan2-priority-oper {lt | gt | eq | range}} |
{vlan1-ethertype {c-vlan | s-vlan | both | disable}} |
{vlan2-ethertype {c-vlan | s-vlan | both | disable}} }+
Parameters:
<filter-name> <string>
name A unique name to identify the filter.
disable | enable To enable or disable the field in the check.
dst-ipv6-addr The IPv6 destination address.
dst-ipv6-prefix Prefix length to be applied to the IPv6 destination address. Valid
prefix are from 0 to 128.
src-ipv6-addr The IPv6 source address.
src-ipv6-prefix Prefix length to be applied to the IPv6 source address. Valid
prefix are from 0 to 32 bits.
next-header Next header value (0 - 255).
hop-limit Hop limit value (0 - 255).
icmp-type ICMP type (0 - 255).
icmp-code ICMP code (0 - 255).

Revision 1 — August 2022 106


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

destination-port Destination port for UDP protocol (0 - 65535).


source-port Source port for UDP protocol (0 - 65535).
ip-qos-mode Choose between DSCP (RFC2474) or precedence (RFC791).
interpretation for the IP TOS field.
dscp The Diff-Serv CodePoint value (0 - 63).
dscp-last The last DSCP value, used in range operation.
dscp-oper Diff-Serv CodePoint operator. Valid operator type are:
gt (greater than), lt (less than), eq (equal) or range (inclusive
range).
precedence The Precedence value (0 - 7).
precedence-last The last Precedence value, used in range operation.
precedence-oper Precedence field operator. Valid operator type are:
gt (greater than), lt (less than), eq (equal) or range (inclusive
range).
ecn Explicit Congestion Notification value (0 - 3).
vlan1-cfi First VLAN CFI may be 0 or 1. It is usually set to 0.
vlan2-cfi Second VLAN CFI may be 0 or 1. It is usually set to 0.
vlan1-id First VLAN ID may be any value between 0 and 4095.
vlan1-id-last First VLAN ID last value, used in range operation.
vlan1-id-oper First VLAN ID operator. Valid operator type are:
gt (greater than), lt (less than), eq (equal) or range (inclusive
range).
vlan2-id Second VLAN ID may be any value between 0 and 4095.
vlan2-id-last Second VLAN ID last value, used in range operation.
vlan2-id-oper Second VLAN ID operator. Valid operator type are:
gt (greater than), lt (less than), eq (equal) or range (inclusive
range).
vlan1-priority First VLAN priority can vary between 0 and 7.
vlan1-priority-last First VLAN priority last value, used in range operation.
vlan1-priority-oper First VLAN priority operator. Valid operator type are:
gt (greater than), lt (less than), eq (equal) or range (inclusive
range).
vlan2-priority Second VLAN priority can vary between 0 and 7.
vlan2-priority-last Second VLAN priority last value, used in range operation.
vlan2-priority-oper Second VLAN priority operator. Valid operator type are:
gt (greater than), lt (less than), eq (equal) or range (inclusive
range).
vlan1-ethertype First VLAN Ethertype, the Ethernet type identifies the following
VLAN if we expect a C-VLAN an S-VLAN or if we accept both.

Revision 1 — August 2022 107


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

vlan2-ethertype Second VLAN Ethertype, the Ethernet type identifies the


following VLAN if we expect a C-VLAN an S-VLAN or if we
accept both.

4.159 Filter Add/Edit L2


filter add l2 - Add a Layer 2 filter configuration
filter edit l2 - Change a Layer 2 filter configuration
Description:
With these commands, you can create a new filter or change the parameters of an existing
filter instance.
Syntax:
filter {add|edit} l2 <filter-name> {
{name <filter-name>} |
{dst-mac-addr <mac-addr> {disable | enable} } |
{dst-mac-mask <mac-addr>} |
{src-mac-addr <mac-addr> {disable | enable} } |
{src-mac-mask <mac-addr>} |
{ethertype <0-65535> {disable | enable} } |
{vlanstack-size <0-3> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan1-cfi <0-1> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan2-cfi <0-1> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan1-id <0-4095> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan1-id-last <0-4095> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan1-id-oper {lt | gt | eq | range}} |
{vlan2-id <0-4095> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan2-id-last <0-4095> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan2-id-oper {lt | gt | eq | range}} |
{vlan1-priority <0-7> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan1-priority-last <0-7> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan1-priority-oper {lt | gt | eq | range}} |
{vlan2-priority <0-7> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan2-priority-last <0-7> {disable | enable}} |
{vlan2-priority-oper {lt | gt | eq | range}}
{vlan1-ethertype {c-vlan | s-vlan | t-vlan | any | disable}} |
{vlan2-ethertype {c-vlan | s-vlan | t-vlan | any | disable}} |
{ip-cos-mode {dscp-mode | precedence-mode}} |
{dscp <0-63> {disable | enable}} |
{dscp-last <0-63> {disable | enable}} |
{dscp-oper {lt | gt | eq | range}} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 108


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{precedence <0-7> {disable | enable}} |


{precedence-last <0-7> {disable | enable}} |
{precedence-oper {lt | gt | eq | range}} }+
Parameters:
<filter-name> <string>
name A unique name to identify the filter.
disable | enable To enable or disable the field in the check.
dst-mac-addr Ethernet MAC destination address.
dst-mac-mask Wildcard mask to be applied to the MAC destination address.
Valid mask is a prefix of 16, 24, 25, 45, 48, or multicast bits (ex.
FF:FF:00:00:00:00, FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF, 01:00:00:00:00:00).
src-mac-addr Ethernet MAC source address.
src-mac-mask Wildcard mask to be applied to the MAC source address. Valid
mask is a prefix of 16, 24, 25, 45, 48, or multicast bits (ex.
FF:FF:00:00:00:00, FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF, 01:00:00:00:00:00).
ethertype The encapsulated Ethernet type identifies the 16-bit sub-protocol
label field or the original IEEE 802.3 length field.
vlanstack-size Indicates the number of VLAN tags that packets must have in
order to match this filter (0 - 3).
vlan1-cfi First VLAN CFI may be 0 or 1. It is usually set to 0.
vlan2-cfi Second VLAN CFI may be 0 or 1. It is usually set to 0.
vlan1-id First VLAN ID may be any value between 0 and 4095.
vlan1-id-last First VLAN ID last value, used in range operation.
vlan1-id-oper First VLAN ID operator. Valid operator type are: gt (greater than),
lt (less than), eq (equal) or range (inclusive range).
vlan2-id Second VLAN ID may be any value between 0 and 4095.
vlan2-id-last Second VLAN ID last value, used in range operation.
vlan2-id-oper Second VLAN ID operator. Valid operator type are: gt (greater
than), lt (less than), eq (equal) or range (inclusive range).
vlan1-priority First VLAN priority can vary between 0 and 7.
vlan1-priority-last First VLAN priority last value, used in range operation.
vlan1-priority-oper First VLAN priority operator. Valid operator type are: gt (greater
than), lt (less than), eq (equal) or range (inclusive range).
vlan2-priority Second VLAN priority can vary between 0 and 7.
vlan2-priority-last Second VLAN priority last value, used in range operation.
vlan2-priority-oper Second VLAN priority operator. Valid operator type are: gt
(greater than), lt (less than), eq (equal) or range (inclusive range).
vlan1-ethertype First VLAN Ethertype, the Ethernet type identifies the following
VLAN if we expect a specific type or if we accept any.
vlan2-ethertype Second VLAN Ethertype, the Ethernet type identifies the
following VLAN if we expect a specific type or if we accept any.

Revision 1 — August 2022 109


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

ip-qos-mode Choose between DSCP (RFC2474) or precedence (RFC791)


interpretation for the IP TOS field.
dscp The Diff-Serv CodePoint value (0 - 63).
dscp-last The last DSCP value, used in range operation.
dscp-oper Diff-Serv CodePoint operator. Valid operator type are: gt (greater
than), lt (less than), eq (equal) or range (inclusive range).
precedence The Precedence value (0 - 7).
precedence-last The last Precedence value, used in range operation.
precedence-oper Precedence field operator. Valid operator type are: gt (greater
than), lt (less than), eq (equal) or range (inclusive range).

4.160 Filter Show L2/IPv4/IPv6


filter show - Show filter configuration
Description:
This command displays a filter configuration. Specifying a filter name provides detailed
configuration about this filter. Otherwise, the command displays summary configuration for
all filters.
Syntax:
filter show {l2 | ipv4 | ipv6} [<filter-name>]
Parameters:
<filter-name> <string>

4.161 Firmware Activate


firmware activate - Activate the downloaded firmware file
Description:
Use this command to activate the firmware file that was previously downloaded to the flash.
Once it is activated, the unit will reboot.
Syntax:
firmware activate

4.162 Firmware Clear Download


firmware clear-download - Clear the downloaded firmware file
Description:
Use this command to delete the previously-downloaded firmware file from the flash memory.

Revision 1 — August 2022 110


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
firmware clear-download

4.163 Firmware Download


firmware download - Download a firmware file to the unit
Description:
Use this command to download a different firmware file to the unit for activation at a later
date. The unit's rollback firmware version (if any) is overwritten.
Syntax:
firmware download
{ftp | ftps | http | https | sftp | tftp}://[<user-name>:<password>@]<url>

Examples:
firmware download http://domain.com/AEN_6.4.2_35876.afl
firmware download ftp://username:password@domain.com/AEN_6.4.2_35876.afl
firmware download
ftps://username:password@domain.com:990/AEN_6.4.2_35876.afl
firmware download
sftp://username:password@domain.com:22/AEN_6.4.2_35876.afl
Parameters:
<user-name> <string>
<password> <string>

4.164 Firmware Rollback


firmware rollback - Roll back the unit's firmware to an alternate version
Description:
Use this command to revert the unit's firmware and configuration values back to the previous
version.

NOTES : Firmware prior to version 4.0 cannot be rolled back. The firmware on a unit
that has been factory reset cannot be rolled back (the rollback version is
unavailable).

If a firmware file has been downloaded as part of a two-step firmware upgrade, the
rollback version is no longer available.

Syntax:
firmware rollback

Revision 1 — August 2022 111


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.165 Firmware Upgrade


firmware upgrade - Perform a firmware upgrade
Description:
Use this command to upgrade the unit to a different firmware version.
Syntax:
firmware upgrade
{ftp | ftps | http | https | sftp | tftp}://[<user-name>:<password>@]<url>

Examples:
firmware upgrade http://domain.com/AEN_6.4.2_35876.afl
firmware upgrade ftp://username:password@domain.com/AEN_6.4.2_35876.afl
firmware upgrade
ftps://username:password@domain.com:990/AEN_6.4.2_35876.afl
firmware upgrade sftp://username:password@domain.com:22/AEN_6.4.2_35876.afl
Parameters:
<user-name> <string>
<password> <string>

4.166 Firmware Version


firmware version - Display the unit's firmware inventory
Description:
Use this command to display the unit's current firmware version, as well as the rollback
version or downloaded version (if any).
Syntax:
firmware version

4.167 GPS Edit


gps edit - Edit GPS settings
Description:
Configure the GPS receiver settings.
Syntax:
gps edit { state { enable | disable } }
Parameters:
state Enable or disable GPS synchronization.

Revision 1 — August 2022 112


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.168 GPS Show Configuration


gps show configuration - Show GPS configuration
Description:
Display the state of the GPS receiver, whether it is enabled or not.
Syntax:
gps show configuration

4.169 GPS Show Status


gps show status - Show the status of the GPS receiver
Description:
Show the status of the GPS receiver: fix status, latitude, longitude, Signal-to-Noise ratio,
expressed in dB-Hz, of each satellite in view.
Syntax:
gps show status

4.170 Help
help - Help will help you with commands you are not familiar with
Syntax:
help <command>
Parameters:
<command> <string>

4.171 History Edit File


history edit file - Change the report file generation parameters
Description:
history edit file allows to change parameters used to generate and upload the report files to a
remote server.
Syntax:
history edit file {
{period-mode {new | fixed | all}} |
{local-periods <1-128>} |
{include-disabled {enabled | disabled }} |
{include-previous {enabled | disabled }} |
{url <url>} }+

Revision 1 — August 2022 113


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
period-mode Selects the mode in which the periods are retrieved to generate a
report file.
new: only the periods since the last report.
fixed: fixed number of periods.
all: all available periods.
local-periods Specifies the number of local periods to process in fixed mode.
include-disabled Specifies if the report should include the statistics for disabled
objects.
include-previous Specifies if the report should include the periods included in a
previous aborted file transfer. This is only used if period-mode is
"new".
url URL to reach the server and directory e.g.
http://mypc.com
ftp://username:password@mypc.com
sftp://username@mypc.com
tftp://mypc.com
scp://username@mypc.com:/target_directory
scp-password Password used for SCP and SFTP transfers.

4.172 History Edit Local


history edit local - Change the local history parameters
Description:
With history local edit, you can change the parameters of the history buckets mechanism.
Syntax:
history edit local {
{paa-state {disable | enable}} |
{paa-filing {disable | enable}} |
{paa-period <1-60>} |
{policy-state {disable | enable}} |
{policy-filing {disable | enable}} |
{policy-period <1-60>} |
{port-state {disable | enable}} |
{port-filing {disable | enable}} |
{port-period <1-60>} |
{regulator-state {disable | enable}} |
{regulator-filing {disable | enable}} |
{regulator-period <1-60>} |
{sfp-state {disable | enable}} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 114


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{sfp-filing {disable | enable}} |


{sfp-period <1-60>} |
{shaper-state {disable | enable}} |
{shaper-filing {disable | enable}} |
{shaper-period <1-60>} |
{soamdmm-state {disable | enable}} |
{soamdmm-filing {disable | enable}} |
{soamdmm-period <1-60>} |
{soampl-state {disable | enable}} |
{soampl-filing {disable | enable}} |
{soampl-period <1-60>} |
{soamsa-state {disable | enable}} |
{soamsa-filing {disable | enable}} |
{soamsa-period <1-60>} |
{soamsametric-state {disable | enable}} |
{soamsametric-filing {disable | enable}} |
{soamsametric-period <1-60>} |
{soamslm-state {disable | enable}} |
{soamslm-filing {disable | enable}} |
{soamslm-period <1-60>} |
{systemhealth-state {disable | enable}} |
{systemhealth-filing {disable | enable}} |
{systemhealth-period <1-60>} |
{twamp-state {disable | enable}} |
{twamp-filing {disable | enable}} |
{twamp-period <1-60>}}+
Parameters:
paa-state Enable or disable PAA history.
paa-filing Enable filesystem storage of the PAA history buckets.
paa-period Reference period for the PAA history buckets.
policy-state Enable or disable policy history.
policy-filing Enable filesystem storage of the policy history buckets.
policy-period Reference period for the policy history buckets.
port-state Enable or disable port history.
port-filing Enable filesystem storage of the port history buckets.
port-period Reference period for the port history buckets.
regulator-state Enable or disable regulator history.
regulator-filing Enable filesystem storage of the regulator history buckets.
regulator-period Reference period for the regulator history buckets.
sfp-state Enable or disable SFP history.

Revision 1 — August 2022 115


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

sfp-filing Enable filesystem storage of the SFP history buckets.


sfp-period Reference period for the SFP history buckets.
shaper-state Enable or disable shaper history.
shaper-filing Enable filesystem storage of the shaper history buckets.
shaper-period Reference period for the shaper history buckets.
soamdmm-state Enable or disable SOAM DMM history.
soamdmm-filing Enable filesystem storage of the SOAM DMM history buckets.
soamdmm-period Reference period for the SOAM DMM history buckets.
soampl-state Enable or disable SOAM PL history.
soampl-filing Enable the filesystem storage of the SOAM PL history buckets.
soampl-period Reference period for the SOAM PL history buckets.
soamsa-state Enable or disable SOAM Service Availability history.
soamsa-filing Enable filesystem storage of the SOAM Service Availability
history buckets.
soamsa-period Reference period for the SOAM Service Availability service
history buckets.
soamsametric-state Enable or disable SOAM Service Availability metrics history.
soamsametric-filing Enable filesystem storage of the SOAM Service Availability
metrics history buckets.
soamsametric-period Reference period for the SOAM Service Availability metric history
buckets.
soamslm-state Enable or disable SOAM SLM history.
soamslm-filing Enable filesystem storage of the SOAM SLM history buckets.
soamslm-period Reference period for the SOAM SLM history buckets.
systemhealth-state Enable or disable SYSTEM HEALTH history.
systemhealth-filing Enable filesystem storage of the SYSTEM HEALTH history.
systemhealth-period Reference period for the SYSTEM HEALTH history
twamp-state Enable or disable TWAMP history.
twamp-filing Enable filesystem storage of the TWAMP history buckets.
twamp-period Reference period for the TWAMP history buckets.

4.173 History Edit Scheduling


history edit scheduling - Modify scheduling parameters
Description:
With the history edit scheduling command, you can modify how reporting history bucket data
is scheduled.
Syntax:
history edit scheduling {
{local-state {disable | enable}} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 116


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{local-hours {<hour-value>}+} |
{local-minutes {<minutes-value>}+} |
{local-offset <0-(local-period - 1)>} |
{local-random-offset <0-900>} |
{local-period <5|10|15|20|30|60>}|
{local-mode <hourly|periodic>}}+
Parameters:
local-state Enables or disables the scheduling mechanism on the local device.
local-hours Sets the hour(s) at which the local statistics are reported
{00H00|01H00|02H00 ...}.
local-minutes When in hourly mode, sets the minute(s) at which the local
statistics are reported with 15-minute. granularity
{00H00|00H15|00H30|00h45}.
local-offset Sets the offset to add to the local-minutes. Adding an offset
spreads out the load on the file servers by distributing the upload
moments over time.
local-random-offset Randomly generates an extra offset between 0 and the specified
value that is added to the local offset. Expressed in seconds.
local-period When in periodic mode, the period at which the local statistics
are retrieved. Similar to local-minutes, but statistics are reported
every local-period minutes for the selected local-hours.
When in hourly mode, this parameter is ignored and the value of
local-period is 15 minutes.
local-mode Sets either periodic or hourly mode. In periodic mode, the minutes
that trigger statistics reporting are set using local-period;
whereas in hourly mode, the minutes that trigger statistics
reporting are set using local-minutes.

4.174 History Show File


history show file - Show the report file generation parameters
Description:
history show file displays the report file generation configuration parameters.
Syntax:
history show file

4.175 History Show Local


history show local - Show the local history parameters
Description:
history show local displays the local history configuration parameters.

Revision 1 — August 2022 117


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
history show local

4.176 History Show Scheduling


history show scheduling - Show the scheduling parameters
Description:
history show scheduling displays the scheduling configuration parameters.
Syntax:
history show scheduling

4.177 Interface Add/Edit


interface add – Add a new interface
interface edit – Edit a new interface
Description:
Configure an IP interface for management purpose. Interfaces can be set to to acquire their IP
configuration from a DHCP server or can be manually configured with a static IP. The subnet
can be defined using the Address Prefix Length along with the IP (e.g. 192.168.1.100/24) or by
entering the network mask using the netmask keyword.

NOTES : IPv4 aliases: Interfaces can be configured for dual-homing by specifying an


alias name instead of an interface name. Currently only an alias ID of 0 (zero) can be
defined. When specifying an alias, only the address, netmask and gateway
parameters can be configured. An aliased interface is always set up as a static IP
address (no DHCP) and is on a distinct interface.

IPv6: Two IPv6 addresses can be configured (0 and 1). This is different from IPv4
aliases as the index is not specified in the interface name but as a p arameter of the
address. All IPv6 addresses are over the same interface.

Syntax:
interface {add|edit} <interface-name>|<alias-name>
{name <interface-name>|<alias-name>} |
{dhcp {enable|disable}} |
{dhcp-rt-info {enable|disable}} |
{dhcp-static {enable|disable}} |
{address {<ip-addr>|<ip-addr-prefix>}} |
{netmask {<ip-addr>}} |
{gateway {<ip-addr>}} |
{ipv6_enable {enable|disable}} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 118


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{ipv6_dhcp {disabled|stateless|stateful}} |
{ipv6_radv {enable|disable}} |
{ipv6_static {enable|disable}} |
{ipv6_address <0-1> {<ipv6-addr>/<ipv6-prefixLen>
[-<ipv6-gateway>]}} |
{vlan1-id <vlan-id>} |
{vlan2-id <vlan-id>} |
{vlan1-ethertype {c-vlan | s-vlan | t-vlan}} |
{vlan2-ethertype {c-vlan | s-vlan | t-vlan}} |
{vlan1-priority <0-7>} |
{vlan2-priority <0-7>} |
{type {standard|vlan|bridge|vlan-in-vlan|bridge-vlan}} |
{name <interface-name> } |
{port <port-name> } |
{sub-intf <sub-intf-name-list> } |
{ip-override {enable|disable} } |
{force {enable|disable} } |
{state {enable|disable} } |
{dhcp-relay {enable|disable}} |
{ipv4-fwd {enable|disable}} |
{stp {enable|disable}} }+
{icmp_redirect {enable|disable} } |
{ipv6_ icmp_redirect {enable|disable} } |

Parameters:
<interface-name> <string>
<alias-name> <string>:0
<ip-addr-prefix> <ip-addr>/{1-32}
<vlan-id> <decimal>
<port-name-list> <string> [, <string>]*
name Interface or alias name
dhcp Enable or disable DHCP
dhcp-rt-info Use routing information learned via DHCP
dhcp-static Note: This option can only be used when DHCP is enabled. Use
static IP until an address is resolved by DHCP.
Invalid on Auto interface.
address Static interface IP address
netmask Interface network mask for static IP address

Revision 1 — August 2022 119


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

gateway A default gateway address provides a shortcut to creating a


default gateway through the route configuration. Only one
default gateway can be set per unit.
ipv6_enable Enable or disable IPv6 on the interface.
ipv6_dhcp Enable DHCPv6 in stateful or stateless mode or disable it. (used if
IPv6 is enabled).
ipv6_radv Enable or disable IPv6 router advertisement autoconfiguration
(used if IPv6 is enabled).
ipv6_static Enable or disable IPv6 static addresses (used if IPv6 is enabled).
ipv6_address Static interface IPv6 addresses, with prefix and optional default
gateway (used if IPv6 and IPv6 static addresses are enabled).
Note: Can be reset by setting the value to ::/0.
type Interface type
vlan1-id VLAN ID for VLAN interface type (1 - 4094)
vlan2-id VLAN ID used when VLAN-in-VLAN type is chosen (1 - 4094)
vlan1-ethertype Ethertype used in the VLAN tag (C-VLAN, S-VLAN, or T-VLAN)
vlan2-ethertype Ethertype used in the VLAN-in-VLAN (.1q in .1q) tag (C-VLAN, S-
VLAN, or T-VLAN)
vlan1-priority Set VLAN priority
vlan2-priority Set VLAN priority in the VLAN-in-VLAN (.1q in .1q) tag
port Interface port
sub-intf Sub-interface list for bridge interface
ip-override Used on a bridge interface, to clear IP address of all sub-
interfaces to 0.0.0.0.
force Used to force a change to the interface that the user is currently
logged into.
state Enable or disable the interface.
dhcp-relay Enable or disable DHCP relaying on this interface.
ipv4-fwd Enable or disable IPv4 forwarding on this interface.
stp Enable or disable Spanning-Tree Protocol
icmp_redirect Enable or disable the global IPv4 ICMP redirects.
The default value is enable
ipv6_icmp_redirect Enable or disable the global IPv6 ICMP redirects.
The default value is enable

Syntax:
ipv4 edit options { { forwarding <enable|disable> } |
{ igmp-version <0,2,3> } }+

Revision 1 — August 2022 120


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
forwarding The IPv4 forwarding state.
igmp-version Set interface IGMP version (0, 2, 3). 0 means do not force any
version and use the system default.

4.178 Interface Advertisement Edit


interface advertisement edit - Edit an existing advertisement instance
attributes
Description:
Configure an advertisement instance on the interface for management purpose. An
advertisement instance may be configured to send interface information to another system
for inventory purposes. The advertisement instance is coupled with the interface of the same
name, so any change to the interface name or port will affect the advertisement instance.
Syntax:
interface {edit} <advertisement-name> { {state {enable|disable}} |
{ip-state {enable|disable}} |
{ip-address {<ip-addr> [, <ip-addr>]+}} |
{rate <transmission rate>} |
{format {ACP} |
{use-beacon-rate {enable|disable} }}+
Parameters:
<advertisement-name> <string>
state Enable or disable layer-2 advertisement frame transmission
ip-state Enable or disable layer-3 advertisement frame transmission
rate Transmission rate of advertisement frames, in seconds <3, 60,
600, 3600>
format Only ACP is supported for now.
use-beacon-rate When enabled, makes the advertisement transmission rate the
same as the beacon reception rate.
ip-address The list of destination IP addresses to be used in layer-3
advertisement frames.

4.179 Interface Advertisement Show


interface advertisement show - show advertisement configuration
Description:
Specifying an interface or alias name provides detailed configuration about this
advertisement, otherwise the command provides summary configuration for all
advertisements in a table format.

Revision 1 — August 2022 121


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
interface advertisement show [<interface-name>|<alias-name>]
Parameters:
<interface-name> <string>
<alias-name> <string>:0

4.180 Interface Auxiliary-MAC Show


interface auxiliary-mac show
Description:
Used to display information about the auxiliary MAC interface including the Port on which it is
configured and the MAC address assigned to this interface.
Syntax:
interface auxiliary-mac show

4.181 Interface Beacon Edit


interface beacon edit - Edit an existing beacon attributes
Description:
Configure a beacon instance on the interface for management purpose. A beacon may be
configured to discover remote devices by sending a special frame on the network, through the
interface it is tied to. The beacon is coupled with the interface of the same name, so any
change to the interface name or port will affect the beacon instance.
Syntax:
interface beacon {edit} <interface-name> { {state {enable|disable}} |
{rate <transmission rate>} |
{domain-id <domain>} |
{subnet {<ip-addr>}} |
{netmask {<ip-addr>}} |
{gateway {<ip-addr>}} |
{dhcp-hostname-option <none,custom,serial-number,current>} |
{dhcp-client-id-option <none,custom,serial-number>} |
{dhcp-hostname <hostname>} |
{dhcp-client-id <client-id>} |
{ip-config-mode {local|auto|dhcp|auto-static}} |
{id-mismatch {enable|disable} }}+
Parameters:
<interface-name> <string>

Revision 1 — August 2022 122


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

<domain> <string>
state Enable or disable beacon frame transmission
rate Transmission rate of beacon frames, in seconds <3, 60, 600,
3600>
subnet IP subnet used in auto IP config mode
netmask IP netmask used in auto IP config mode
gateway IP gateway used in auto IP config mode
ip-config-mode Tell which IP configuration mode to use on the remote device.
id-mismatch When enabled, tells the remote system to authorize beacon even
if domain IDs do not match.
dhcp-hostname-option Tell the remote unit what option to use as a hostname in its DNS
configuration.
dhcp-client-id-option Tell the remote unit what option to use as a client ID in its DNS
configuration.
dhcp-hostname The hostname to use when the hostname <custom> option is
chosen.
dhcp-client-id The client ID to use when the client ID <custom> option is chosen.
ip-exclusion In Auto and Auto IP Static configuration modes, a comma-
separated list of IP addresses to exclude on the remote units can
be specified. Up to 100 IP addresses can be specified. IP address
ranges can be expressed with dash (-) separated IP addresses.

4.182 Interface Beacon Show


interface beacon show - Show beacon configuration
Description:
Specifying an interface or alias name provides detailed configuration about this beacon,
otherwise the command provides summary configuration for all beacons in a table format.
Syntax:
interface beacon show [<interface-name>|<alias-name>]
Parameters:
<interface-name> <string>
<alias-name> <string>:0

4.183 Interface Delete


interface delete - Delete an existing interface
Description:
Delete an existing interface or alias. When deleting the interface, if an alias had been
previously configured, it will also be deleted.

Revision 1 — August 2022 123


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
interface delete <interface-name>|<alias-name>
Parameters:
<interface-name> <string>
<alias-name> <string>:0

4.184 Interface Discovery Edit


interface discovery edit - Edit the discovery instance attributes
Description:
Configure the attributes related to beacon discovery on the auto interface. The discovery
instance may be configured to listen for beacons on selected ports and automatically
configure an interface upon reception of a valid beacon.
Syntax:
interface discovery {edit} { {state {enable|disable}} |
{media-selection {enable|disable}} |
{id-matching {enable|disable}} |
{domain-id <domain_id>} |
{forward-on-bridge {enable|disable}} |
{discovery-ports <port_list>} |
{level [All,<0-7>]} |
{forward-match-ports {port_list|null}} |
{forward-mismatch-ports {port_list|null}}}+
Parameters:
state Enable or disable discovery on the auto interface
media-selection Enable or disable auto media selection for beacon discovery. Note
that when the Discovery state is disabled, auto media-selection is
also disabled.
id-matching When enabled, validate beacon by matching the domain ID from
the beacon with the locally-configured ID.
domain-id The local domain ID, used to match the beacon domain ID.
discovery-ports Ports on which to listen for beacon frames. At least one port
must be selected. Multiple ports in the list must be separated by
commas.
level Specifies level [All, [0-7]] given to ACP frames.
forward-on-bridge When enabled, forward all beacons and information frames on
the bridge, if the auto interface is part of a bridge
forward-match-ports Forward all beacons and information frames on these selected
ports when domain IDs match. Multiple ports in the list must be
separated by commas. The list can be cleared by using the value

Revision 1 — August 2022 124


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

"null" for this parameter. This is overridden by the forward-on-


bridge attribute, if enabled.
forward-mismatch-ports Forward all beacons and information frames on these selected
ports when domain IDs do not match. Multiple ports in the list
must be separated by commas. The list can be cleared by using
the value "null" for this parameter. This is overridden by the
forward-on-bridge attribute, if enabled.

4.185 Interface Discovery Show


interface discovery show - Show the discovery instance attributes
Description:
Show the attributes related to beacon discovery on the auto interface.
Syntax:
interface discovery {show}
Parameters:
Domain The local domain ID, used to match the beacon
domain ID.
State State of discovery on the auto interface.
Auto media-selection State of auto media selection for beacon
discovery.
ID matching State of beacon validation by matching the
domain ID with the locally configured one.
Level The level [All, [0-7]] given to ACP frames.
Last effective beaconer MAC The source MAC address of the last effective
beacon received that changed the configuration
of the Auto interface.
Discovery ports Ports on which we listen for beacon frames.
Forward on bridge Forwarding state of all beacons and information
frames on the bridge, if the auto interface is part
of a bridge.
Forward on match Forwarding state of all beacons and information
frames on these selected ports when domain IDs
match.
Forward on mismatch Forwarding state of all beacons and information
frames on these selected ports when domain IDs
do not match.

Revision 1 — August 2022 125


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.186 Interface Primary Clear


interface primary clear - Clear the system primary interface selection
Description:
This command is used to clear the system primary interface selection.
Syntax:
interface primary clear

4.187 Interface Primary Set


interface primary set - Select the system primary interface
Description:
This command is used to select the system primary interface generally used for management.
Syntax:
interface primary set <interface-name>
Parameters:
<interface-name> <string>

4.188 Interface Primary Show


interface primary show - Display the system primary interface name
Description:
This command is used to display the name of the system primary interface.
Syntax:
interface primary show

4.189 Interface Refresh


interface refresh - Send gratuitous ARP on all interfaces
Description:
Convert IP address into physical address for all interfaces.
Syntax:
interface refresh

Revision 1 — August 2022 126


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.190 Interface Show


interface show - Show IPv4 interface configuration
interface ipv6_show - Show IPv6 interface configuration
Description:
This command displays a summary of the configuration for all interfaces in a table format.
Specifying an interface or alias name will display the detailed configuration for this interface.
Syntax:
interface {show|ipv6_show} [<interface-name>|<alias-name>]
Parameters:
<interface-name> <string>
<alias-name> <string>:0
show To show interface IPv4 related configurations.
ipv6_show To show interface IPv6 related configurations.

NOTES : Alias name interface should not be used in this case.


The summary output will display the string "AuxMAC interface" in the Info column
to identify the interface which has the Auxiliary MAC enabled.

Display of the new field 'Auxiliary MAC' will always be present on those platforms
the Dual MAC feature is enabled.

Output:

IPv4 interface
C414-4358: interface show Management
Interface name: Management
Interface type : Standard
Interface state : Enabled
IPv4 forwarding : Disabled
DHCP relay : Disabled
On port : Management
DHCP : Yes
Static+DHCP : Yes
Static IP : 192.168.1.254
IP address : 10.231.60.51
Netmask : 255.255.0.0
Default gateway : 10.231.0.1
ICMP redirect : Enabled
IPv6 interface

Revision 1 — August 2022 127


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

C414-4358: interface ipv6_show Management


Interface name : Management
IPv6 enabled : Yes
Interface type : Standard
Interface state : Enabled
On port : Management
DHCPv6 : Disabled
Use Static Address : No
Use RADV address : Yes
Link address : fe80::215:adff:fe67:ed/64
ICMP redirect : Enabled

4.191 Inventory Edit


inventory edit - Change inventory related settings
Description:
Change inventory related settings
Syntax:
inventory edit {{state <enable | disable>}
{adv-filter <enable | disable> } }+
Parameters:
state Enable or disable inventory gathering.
adv-filter Enable of disable advertisement frame filtering. Use this option
to filter the advertisement frames based on the beacon
configuration state of the interfaces. The advertisement frames
will be taken into account only if they are received on a port that
has an interface configured with the beacon state set to "enable".
warning-threshold Threshold for the Inventory almost full value

4.192 Inventory Show


inventory show - Show the list of devices from which an advertisement has
been received
Description:
Shows an inventory of remote devices from which an advertisement has been received. If a
serial number is specified, detailed inventory information will be displayed for the
corresponding remote device.
Syntax:
inventory show <serial-number>

Revision 1 — August 2022 128


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
<serial-number> <string>

4.193 IPv4 Edit Options


ipv4 edit options - Edit IPv4 options
Description:
This command is used to modify IPv4 options.
Syntax:
ipv4 edit options { { forwarding <enable|disable> } |
{ icmp_redirect <enable | disable> } |
{ igmp-version <0,2,3> } }+

Parameters:
forwarding The IPv4 forwarding state.
icmp_redirect Enable or disable the global ICMP redirects.
The default value is enable
igmp-version Set interface IGMP version (0, 2, 3). 0 means do not force any
version and use the system default.

4.194 IPv4 Show Options


ipv4 show options - Display IPv4 options
Description:
This command displays configured IPv4 options.
Syntax:
ipv4 show options { forwarding <enable|disable> } |
{ icmp_redirect <enable|disable> } |
{ igmp-version <0,2,3> } }+
Parameters:
forwarding The IPv4 forwarding state.
icmp_redirect Enable or disable the global ICMP redirects.
The default value is enable
igmp-version Set interface IGMP version (0, 2, 3). 0 means do not force any
version and use the system default.

Revision 1 — August 2022 129


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Output:
C408-1777: ipv4 show options
Options Value
-------------------------------- ----------------
Forwarding Disabled
ICMP redirect Enabled
IGMP version 2

4.195 Keepalive
keepalive - Allow to keep a CLI session alive.
Description:
The CLI session is kept alive using this simple command.
Syntax:
keepalive

4.196 L2PT Add/Edit


l2pt add - Create a L2PT rule
l2pt edit - Modify an existing L2PT rule
Description:
Create or modify a Layer-2 Protocol Tunneling rule. Configure the rule operation mode and
parameters.
Syntax:
l2pt {add|edit} <rule-name> {
{state {disable | enable}} |
{catchall {disable | enable}} |
{mode {drop | forward | tunnel | peer} } |
{protocol {stp | lacp | lamp | oam | auth | e-lmi | lldp | cdp | bpdu |
gmrp | gvrp | uld | pagp | pvst | vtp | dtp | stp-uf |
pb-ga | pb-gvrp | cisco-cfm | pause}} |
{inport <port-name> } |
{outport <port-name> } |
{unique-id [<1-64>]} |
{replacement-mac {cisco | accedian}} |
{evc-mapping {none | push | pop}} |
{vlan1-type {c-vlan | s-vlan}} |
{vlan2-type {c-vlan | s-vlan}} |
{vid-list <list>}
{vlan-filtering {disable | enable}} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 130


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{rule-vid-from <vid>} |
{rule-vid-to <vid>} |
{rule-vid-pcp <pcp>} |
{rule-vid-cfi <cfi>} |
{rule-type {c-vlan | s-vlan}}
{cos-mapping <cos-mode>} |
{cos-map-pcp <pcp>} |
{cos-map-cfi <cfi>} |}+
Parameters:
<rule-name> L2PT rule name.
state Enable or disable the L2PT rule.
catchall Enable or disable the catchall mode of a rule.
mode Selects the operation mode of the L2PT rule:
drop: Frames matching the specific rule are dropped.
forward: Frames are sent unaltered from the incoming port to the
outgoing port. Optionally, EVC mapping can be enabled on
forwarding rules.
tunnel: Frames matching the specific rule get their destination MAC
address replaced by the MAC specified in the rule parameters
when ingressing the specified inport. Frames matching the
specific rule get their original destination MAC address put back
when ingressing the specified outport. Tunneling rules are
bidirectional.
peer: The frames are sent to software layers for further processing.
protocol The Layer-2 Control Protocol to be processed by this specific rule.
inport The rule's ingress port. For tunneling rules, this specifies the port
where the frames to be tunneled ingress.
outport The rule's egress port. For tunneling rules, this specifies the port
where the frames to be de-tunneled ingress.
unique-id The unique identifier used by the tunneling rules. This is used to
build a unique replacement MAC address.
replacement-mac The multicast MAC address to use as a replacement when
protocol tunneling is performed. The following replacement MAC
can be used:
cisco: 01:00:0C:CD:CD:D0 is used.
accedian: 01:15:AD:CC:xx:yy is used where:
xx: the unique-id.
yy: the protocol id.
evc-mapping Allows forwarding rules to perform EVC mapping:
none: Frames are forwarded unaltered.
push: A tag of vlan1-type is added.
pop: If the VLAN type and ID both match, the tag is removed.

Revision 1 — August 2022 131


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

replace: The tag in the incoming frame is replaced.


vlan1-type First VLAN ethertype. For tunneling rules, specifies the ethertype
of the first VLAN tag. For forwarding ethertype rules with EVC
mapping enabled, specifies the of the VLAN pushed to or popped
from the frame.
vlan2-type Second VLAN ethertype. For tunneling rules, specifies the
ethertype of the second VLAN tag.
vid-list Specifies which VLAN tags to insert in the tunneled or forwarded
frames. For tunnels, the format is a list of comma-separated
groups formatted as vlan1:vlan2. The second tag (Q-in-Q) entry is
optional.
For forwarding rules, the format is a single numerical vlan-id.
Double-tagging is not supported in this mode.
vlan-filtering Enables per-VLAN filtering for this L2PT rule. Only the frames
with a VLAN ID matching the one specified in the rule-vid and
with an ethertype matching the one specified in the rule-type
field will be accepted.
rule-vid-from Lower bound of the VLAN ID range used by the vlan-filtering.
Only the frames with VLAN IDs included in the specified range
will be accepted.
rule-vid-to Higher bound of the VLAN ID range used by the vlan-filtering.
Only the frames with VLAN IDs included in the specified range
will be accepted.
rule-vid-pcp Priority Code Point for the filtered VLAN ID. <0-7> for a specific
priority or "all" to accept any PCP.
rule-vid-pcp Canonical Format Indicator for the filtered VLAN ID. <0-1> for a
specific format or "all" to accept any CFI.
rule-type Ethertype used by the vlan-filtering. Only the frames with a
matching ethertype will be accepted.
cos-mapping Selects the CoS mapping mode of the rule:
map: The specified CoS PCP/CFI fields are mapped in the outgoing
frame.
preserve: The CoS PCP/CFI fields from the incoming frame are copied to the
outgoing frame.
cos-map-pcp Priority Code Point inserted in the outgoing frame in mapped
mode. Accepted values are in the <0-7> range.
cos-map-cfi Canonical Format Indicator inserted in the outgoing frame in
mapped mode. Accepted values are in the <0-1> range.

4.197 L2PT Clear


l2pt clear - Clear a L2PT rule statistics
Description:
Allows to clear a L2PT rule statistics.

Revision 1 — August 2022 132


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
l2pt clear [<rule-name>]
Parameters:
<rule-name> L2PT rule name.

4.198 L2PT Delete


l2pt delete - Delete a L2PT rule
Description:
Allows to delete a L2PT rule.
Syntax:
l2pt delete {<rule-name>}
Parameters:
<rule-name> L2PT rule name.

4.199 L2PT Edit Global


l2pt edit-global - Modify L2PT global settings
Description:
Allows to control L2PT global parameters, affecting the feature's general settings.
Syntax:
l2pt edit-global {
{state {disable | enable}} |
{management-state {disable | enable}} |
{port <port-name> state {disable | enable}} }
Parameters:
state Enable or disable L2PT on all traffic ports or on a specific port if
used with the port parameter.
management-state Enable or disable L2PT on all management ports.
<port-name> Port to which this options apply.

4.200 L2PT Show Configuration


l2pt show configuration - Show the L2PT configuration
Description:
Specifying a L2PT rule provides detailed configuration about this L2PT rule, otherwise the
command provides summary configuration for all L2PT rules in a table format.

Revision 1 — August 2022 133


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
l2pt show configuration [<rule-name>]
Parameters:
<rule-name> L2PT rule name.

4.201 L2PT Show Statistics


l2pt show statistics - Show the L2PT statistics
Description:
The command provides summary statistics for all L2PT rules in a table format.
Syntax:
l2pt show statistics

4.202 LACP Clear Statistics


lacp clear statistics - Clear LACP statistics
Description:
Clear the LACP aggregation group statistics. If <agg-identifier> is not specified, all aggregation
group statistics will be cleared.
Syntax:
lacp clear statistics [<agg-identifier>]
Parameters:
<agg-identifier> <string>

4.203 LACP Edit


lacp edit - Edit an LACP aggregation group configuration
Description:
Edit a LACP aggregation group configuration.
Syntax:
lacp edit <agg-identifier> {system-priority <decimal>} |
{timer-mode <custom|short|long|sub50ms>}}+
Parameters:
<agg-identifier> Aggregator group instance name.
system-priority Priority assigned to this system.
timer-mode Time to wait before sending LACPDU (custom, short, long,
sub50ms).

Revision 1 — August 2022 134


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.204 LACP Show Configuration


lacp show configuration - Show an LACP aggregation group configuration
Description:
Display an LACP aggregation group configuration.
Syntax:
lacp show configuration [<agg-identifier>]
Parameters:
<agg-identifier> <string>
State The state of the aggregator. The possible states are Enabled and
Disabled.
Timeout The time to wait before sending LACPDU. The choices are Long
(802.3ad Long Timeout), Short (802.3ad Short Timeout) and
Custom (Accedian Custom timeout allowing for sub-50ms
protection switching).
System priority The priority of the LACP system. The end of the LACP link that
has the highest priority determines which link is active. The
higher the number, the lower the priority. Range: 1 to 65535.
Port name The name of the port.
Port priority The port in the LAG that should be active for the LACP system.
The priority can change dynamically depending on the revertive
mode configuration.
Port number The number of the port.

4.205 LACP Show Statistics


lacp show statistics - Show an LACP aggregation group statistics
Description:
This command displays the statistics of link aggregation group (LAG), which contains:
aggregator-name: The name of the LAG
Tx LACPDU: Number of LACPDU transmitted
Rx LACPDU: Number of LACPDU received
Rx bad LACPDU: Number of unrecognized or invalid LACPDU received
If an aggregator identifier is specified, the command will display detailed statistics for the
ports that belong to the LAG.
Syntax:
lacp show statistics [<agg-identifier>]
Parameters:
<agg-identifier> <string>

Revision 1 — August 2022 135


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.206 LACP Show Status


lacp show status - Show an LACP aggregation group status
Description:
Display LACP aggregation group status which contains:
Aggregator Name: The name of the LAG group
System: The MAC address of the port set as working (actor) in the LACP
system.
System priority: The priority of the LACP system. The end of the LACP link that
has the highest priority determines which link is active. The
higher the number, the lower the priority. Range: 1 to 65535.
Key: The IEEE aggregation key of the port.
Port ID: The LACP port identifier.
Port MAC address: The port MAC address.
Port state: The state of the port. The port state is expressed as an
hexadecimal value, where individual bits within a single octet
represent different state elements. The actor and partner can
have one or more states numbered from 1 to 8.

NOTES : State variables for the port are encoded as individual bits within a single
octet as follows:

LACP_Activity is encoded in bit 0. This flag indicates the Activity controlval ue with
regard to this link. Active LACP is encoded as 1; Passive LACP is encoded as 0.

LACP_Timeout is encoded in bit 1. This flag indicates the Timeout control value with
regard to this link. Short Timeout is encoded as 1; Long Timeout is encoded as 0.

Aggregation is encoded in bit 2. If TRUE (encoded as 1), this flag indicates that the
system considers this link to be Aggregateable, i.e.: a potential candidate for
aggregation. If FALSE (encoded as 0), the link is considered to be Individual, i.e. this
link can be operated only as an individual link.

Synchronization is encoded in bit 3. If TRUE (encoded as 1), the system considers


this link to be IN_SYNC, i.e. it has been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation
Group, the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator, and the
identity of the Link Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and
operational Key information transmitted.

If FALSE (encoded as 0), then this link is currently OUT_OF_SYNC, i.e.: it is not in
the right Aggregation.

Collecting is encoded in bit 4. TRUE (encoded as 1) means collection of incoming


frames on this link is definitely enabled, i.e. collection is currently enabled and is not

Revision 1 — August 2022 136


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

expected to be disabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in


received protocol information. Its value is otherwise FALSE (encoded as 0).

Distributing is encoded in bit 5. FALSE (encoded as 0) means distribution of


outgoing frames on this link is definitely disabled, i.e. distribution is currently
disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence of administrative changes
or changes in received protocol information. Its value is otherwise TRUE (encoded as
1);

Defaulted is encoded in bit 6. If TRUE (encoded as 1), this flag indicates that the
Actor Receive machine is using Defaulted operational Partner information,
administratively configured for the Partner. If FALSE (encoded as 0), the operational
Partner information in use has been received in an LACPDU;

Expired is encoded in bit 7. If TRUE (encoded as 1), this f lag indicates that the Actor
Receive machine is in the EXPIRED state; if FALSE (encoded as 0), this flag indicates
that the Actor Receive machine is not in the EXPIRED state.

S PECIAL NOTE : The received values of Defaulted and Expired state are not used by
LACP. However, knowing their values can be useful when diagnosing protocol
problems.

Syntax:
lacp show status [<agg-identifier>]
Parameters:
<agg-identifier> <string>

4.207 LLDP Edit


lldp edit - Edit LLDP configuration for one port
Description:
Edit the configuration of LLDP for one port.
Syntax:
lldp edit <port-name> { {rate <1-3600>} |
{state <enable | disable>} }+
Parameters:
rate LLDP frame transmission rate in seconds [1-3600]. This
command is equivalent to "port edit <port-name> lldp-rate".
state Enable or disable LLDP frame transmission. This command is
equivalent to "port edit <port-name> lldp-state".

Revision 1 — August 2022 137


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.208 LLDP Show Configuration


lldp show configuration - Display LLDP configuration
Description:
Displays the configuration of LLDP globally or on a per-port basis.
Syntax:
lldp show configuration [<port-name>]

4.209 LLDP Show Local Info


lldp show local-info - Display LLDP information sent to neighbors
Description:
Displays LLDP information sent to neighbors for a specific port.
Syntax:
lldp show local-info <port-name>

4.210 LLDP Show Neighbors


lldp show neighbors - Display LLDP neighbors
Description:
Displays statistics for LLDP neighbors for one or all ports.
Syntax:
lldp show neighbors [<port-name>]

4.211 LLDP Show Statistics


lldp show statistics - Display LLDP statistics
Description:
Displays statistics for LLDP globally or on a per-port basis.
Syntax:
lldp show statistics [<port-name>]

Revision 1 — August 2022 138


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.212 Loopback Edit


loopback edit - Edit an OAM loopback configuration
Description:
loopback edit allows you to edit OAM loopback configurations
Syntax:
loopback edit <instance-name> {{timeout <decimal>} |
{ type {iometrix-l1 | exfo-l2 | exfo-l3 | anacise-l2 |
anacise-l3 | custom}} |
{ state {enable | disable}} |
{ filter {l2 | ipv4 | ipv6} <filter-name>} |
{ swap_mac {enable | disable}} |
{ swap-ip {enable | disable}} |
{ swap-port {enable | disable}} |
{ drop-opposite-traffic {enable | disable}} |
{ remote-lpbk-acterna {enable | disable}} |
{ remote-lpbk-perejil {enable | disable}} |
{ remote-lpbk-sunrise {enable | disable}} |
{ remote-lpbk-veex {enable | disable}} |
{ remote-lpbk-oam {enable | disable}} |
{ discovery-lpbk {enable | disable}} |
{ tagged-cmds {enable | disable} }} |
{ persistent {enable | disable} }} |
{ perejil-loopback-port {0..65535}}}+
Parameters:
<instance> <string>
<filter-name> <string>
type Set loopback type to:
iometrix-l1: Loop back all frames that have a destination MAC address of
00:30:79:FF:FF:FF.
exfo-l2: Loop back all frames that have a source MAC OUI of 00:03:01.
exfo-l3: Loop back all UDP echo service packets.
anacise-l2: Loop back all frames that have a source MAC OUI of 00:18:75.
anacise-l3: Loop back all UDP echo service packets.
custom: Loop back all traffic that match a user defined filter.
timeout Set a timeout period for the loopback to stay active
state Enable or disable the OAM loopback
filter Specify an associated filter type and name
swap-mac Enable or disable MAC address swapping
swap-ip Enable or disable IP address swapping

Revision 1 — August 2022 139


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

swap-port Enable or disable port swapping


drop-opposite-traffic Enable or disable dropping of opposite traffic
remote-lpbk-acterna Enable or disable remote loopback for JDSU/Acterna
remote-lpbk-perejil Enable or disable remote loopback for Perejil
remote-lpbk-sunrise Enable or disable remote loopback for Sunrise
remote-lpbk-veex Enable or disable remote loopback for VeEX
remote-lpbk-oam Enable or disable remote loopback for OAM 802.3ah
discovery-lpbk Enable (accept) or disable (discard) JDSU/Acterna discovery
loopback commands
tagged-cmds Enable (accept) or disable (discard) tagged loopback commands.
persistent Enable or disable loopback at startup time. This option can only
be set for manual loopbacks with no timeouts.

NOTE : swap-* actions apply only to custom loopbacks (user defined filter).

4.213 Loopback Show


loopback show - Show an OAM loopback configuration
Description:
loopback show allows you to see the configuration of the OAM loopback.
Syntax:
loopback show [<instance-name>]
Parameters:
<instance-name> <string>

4.214 Loop-Detection Add Link


loop-detection add link - Add a link-based loop-detection instance
Description:
Add a link-based loop-detection instance.
Syntax:
loop-detection add link <port-name> {{state {enable | disable} } |
{name <string> } |
{interval <1-30> } |
{index <1-200> } |
{auto-block {enable | disable} } |
{revertive {enable | disable} } }+

Revision 1 — August 2022 140


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
<port-name> Only physical, non-management ports are accepted.
state Enable execution of the loop-detection instance.
name A unique name. If the name is omitted, a free name is allocated
automatically.
interval Beacon transmission rate (1-30 seconds). Default: 1.
index A free index. If the index is omitted, a free index is allocated
automatically.
auto-block Enable auto-block mechanism.
revertive Enable revertive mode for auto-block mechanism.

4.215 Loop-Detection Add Tunnel


loop-detection add tunnel - Add a tunnel-based loop-detection instance
Description:
Add a tunnel-based loop-detection instance.
Syntax:
loop-detection add tunnel <interface-name> {{state {enable | disable} } |
{name <string> } |
{interval <1-30> } |
{index <1-200> } |
{auto-block {enable | disable} } |
{revertive {enable | disable} } }+
Parameters:
<interface-name> Only single-tagged VLAN interfaces are accepted.
state Enable execution of the loop-detection instance.
name A unique name. If the name is omitted, a free name is allocated
automatically.
interval Beacon transmission rate (2-30 seconds). Default: 2.
index A free index. If the index is omitted, a free index is allocated
automatically.
auto-block Enable auto-block mechanism.
revertive Enable revertive mode for auto-block mechanism.

Revision 1 — August 2022 141


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.216 Loop-Detection Clear All Counters


loop-detection clear all counters - Clear all loop-detection counters
Description:
Clear statistics of all loop-detection counters, including sent frames, received frames and loop-
detected frames.
Syntax:
loop-detection clear all counters

4.217 Loop-Detection Clear Global Counter


loop-detection clear global-counter - Clear loop-detection global counter
Description:
Clear statistics of loop-detection global counter, including sent frames, received frames and
loop-detected frames.
Syntax:
loop-detection clear global-counter

4.218 Loop-Detection Clear Link Counters


loop-detection clear link counters - Clear statistics of a link-based loop-
detection instance
Description:
Clear statistics of a link-based loop-detection instance, including sent frames, received frames
and loop-detected frames.
Syntax:
loop-detection clear link counters [<name | index>]
Parameters:
name Identifies the loop-detection instance to clear.
index Identifies the loop-detection instance to clear by index.

4.219 Loop-Detection Clear Tunnel Counters


loop-detection clear tunnel counters - Clear statistics of a tunnel-based
loop-detection instance
Description:
Clear statistics of a tunnel-based loop-detection instance, including sent frames, received
frames and loop-detected frames.

Revision 1 — August 2022 142


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
loop-detection clear tunnel counters [<name | index>]
Parameters:
name Identifies the loop-detection instance to clear.
index Identifies the loop-detection instance to clear by index.

4.220 Loop-Detection Delete Link


loop-detection delete link - Delete a link-based loop-detection instance
Description:
Delete an existing link-based loop-detection instance.
Syntax:
loop-detection delete link <name | index>
Parameters:
name Identifies the loop-detection instance to delete.
index Identifies the loop-detection instance to delete by index.

4.221 Loop-Detection Delete Tunnel


loop-detection delete tunnel - Delete a tunnel-based loop-detection
instance
Description:
Delete an existing tunnel-based loop-detection instance.
Syntax:
loop-detection delete tunnel index <name | index>
Parameters:
name Identifies the loop-detection instance to delete.
index Identifies the loop-detection instance to delete by index.

4.222 Loop-Detection Diagnostic Send


loop-detection diagnostic send - Send a one-shot loop-detection beacon
Description:
Send a one-shot loop-detection beacon.
Syntax:
loop-detection diagnostic send <port-name>

Revision 1 — August 2022 143


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{vlan-state <enable | disable> }


{vlan-id <0-4094> }
{vlan-ethertype <c-vlan | s-vlan | t-vlan> }
{timeout <3-30> }
Parameters:
port-name Outgoing physical port.
vlan-enable Enable encapsulation of VLAN in the beacon.
vlan-id VLAN ID.
vlan-ethertype VLAN ethertype.
timeout Timeout (3-30 seconds). Default: 3.

4.223 Loop-Detection Diagnostic Show Status


loop-detection diagnostic show-status - Show the loop-detection beacon
status
Description:
Show the loop-detection beacon status.
Syntax:
loop-detection diagnostic show-status

4.224 Loop-Detection Edit Link


loop-detection edit link - Edit link-based loop-detection instance
attributes
Description:
Edit link-based loop-detection instance attributes.
Syntax:
loop-detection edit link <name | index> {{state {enable | disable} } |
{new-name <string> } |
{interval <1-30> } |
{auto-block {enable | disable} } |
{revertive {enable | disable} } }+
Parameters:
name Identifies the loop-detection instance to edit.
index Identifies the loop-detection instance to edit by index.
state Enable execution of the loop-detection instance.
new-name Unique name associated to the loop-detection instance.
interval Beacon transmission rate in seconds.

Revision 1 — August 2022 144


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

auto-block Enable auto-block mechanism.


revertive Enable revertive mode for auto-block mechanism.

4.225 Loop-Detection Edit Tunnel


loop-detection edit tunnel - Edit tunnel-based loop-detection instance
attributes
Description:
Edit tunnel-based loop-detection instance attributes.
Syntax:
loop-detection edit tunnel <name | index> {{state {enable | disable} } |
{name <string> } |
{interval <2-30> } |
{auto-block {enable | disable} } |
{revertive {enable | disable} } }+
Parameters:
name Identifies the loop-detection instance to edit.
index Identifies the loop-detection instance to edit by index.
state Enable execution of the loop-detection instance.
new-name Unique name associated to the loop-detection instance.
interval Beacon transmission rate in seconds.
auto-block Enable auto-block mechanism.
revertive Enable revertive mode for auto-block mechanism.

4.226 Loop-Detection Show All Configuration


loop-detection show all configuration - Show loop-detection configuration
Description:
Display a configuration summary of all loop-detection instances.
Syntax:
loop-detection show all configuration

4.227 Loop-Detection Show All Counters


loop-detection show all counters - Show loop-detection beacon statistics
Description:
Display beacon statistics of each loop-detection instance, including sent frames, received
frames and loop-detected frames.

Revision 1 — August 2022 145


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
loop-detection show all counters

4.228 Loop-Detection Show All Status


loop-detection show all status - Show loop-detection status
Description:
Display the state of each loop-detection instance, whether it is loop-detected or not.
Syntax:
loop-detection show all status

4.229 Loop-Detection Show Global Counter


loop-detection show global-counter - Show loop-detection statistics summary
Description:
Display a summary beacon statistics for all instances, including sent frames, received frames
and loop-detected frames.
Syntax:
loop-detection show global-counter

4.230 Loop-Detection Show Link Configuration


loop-detection show link configuration - Show configuration of link-based
loop-detection instances
Description:
Display a configuration summary of all link-based loop-detection instances.
Syntax:
loop-detection show link configuration

4.231 Loop-Detection Show Link Counters


loop-detection show link counters - Show statistics of link-based loop-
detection instances
Description:
Display statistics of each link-based loop-detection instance, including sent frames, received
frames and loop-detected frames.

Revision 1 — August 2022 146


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
loop-detection show link counters

4.232 Loop-Detection Show Link Status


loop-detection show link status - Show status of link-based loop-detection
instances
Description:
Display the state of each link-based loop-detection instance, whether it is loop-detected or
not.
Syntax:
loop-detection show link status

4.233 Loop-Detection Show Tunnel Configuration


loop-detection show tunnel configuration - Show configuration of tunnel-
based loop-detection instances
Description:
Display a configuration summary of all tunnel-based loop-detection instances.
Syntax:
loop-detection show tunnel configuration

4.234 Loop-Detection Show Tunnel Counters


loop-detection show tunnel counters - Show statistics of tunnel-based loop-
detection instances
Description:
Display statistics of each tunnel-based loop-detection instance, including sent frames,
received frames and loop-detected frames.
Syntax:
loop-detection show tunnel counters

Revision 1 — August 2022 147


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.235 Loop-Detection Show Tunnel Status


loop-detection show tunnel status - Show status of tunnel-based loop-
detection instances
Description:
Display the state of each tunnel-based loop-detection instance, whether it is loop-detected or
not.
Syntax:
loop-detection show tunnel status

4.236 Loop-Detection Traffic Block Link


loop-detection traffic block link - Block traffic link-based loop-detection
instance attributes
Description:
Block traffic link-based loop-detection instance attributes.
Syntax:
loop-detection traffic block link <name | index>
Parameters:
name Identifies the loop-detection instance to edit.
index Identifies the loop-detection instance to edit by index.

4.237 Loop-Detection Traffic Block Tunnel


loop-detection traffic block tunnel - Block traffic tunnel-based loop-
detection instance attributes
Description:
Block traffic tunnel-based loop-detection instance attributes.
Syntax:
loop-detection traffic block tunnel <name | index>
Parameters:
name Identifies the loop-detection instance to edit.
index Identifies the loop-detection instance to edit by index.

Revision 1 — August 2022 148


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.238 Loop-Detection Traffic Clear Link


loop-detection traffic clear link - Clear traffic link-based loop-detection
instance attributes
Description:
Clear traffic link-based loop-detection instance attributes.
Syntax:
loop-detection traffic clear link <name | index>
Parameters:
name Identifies the loop-detection instance to edit.
index Identifies the loop-detection instance to edit by index.

4.239 Loop-Detection Traffic Clear Tunnel


loop-detection traffic clear tunnel - Clear traffic tunnel-based loop-
detection instance attributes
Description:
Clear traffic tunnel-based loop-detection instance attributes.
Syntax:
loop-detection traffic clear tunnel <name | index>
Parameters:
name Identifies the loop-detection instance to edit.
index Identifies the loop-detection instance to edit by index.

4.240 Mode Edit


mode edit - Edit the system settings
Description:
Configure the system settings in the unit.
Syntax:
mode {edit} { { svlan-type <ethertype-value> } |
{ igmp-version <0-3> } |
{ webs-port {443 | <1024-65535>} }}
Parameters:
svlan-type Set the system-wide S-VLAN Ethertype value.
<ethertype-value> The Ethertype value (0x88a8 or 0x9100).

Revision 1 — August 2022 149


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

igmp-version Set interface IGMP version (0-3). 0 means do not force any
version, use the kernel default.
webs-port Set the web server TCP port.

4.241 Mode Show


mode show - Show the general system settings
Description:
Displays the general system settings currently configured in the unit.
Syntax:
mode show

4.242 Monitor Edit


monitor edit - Edit the traffic monitors
Description:
Modifies the configuration of the traffic monitors.
Syntax:
monitor edit <monitor-name> {
{name <monitor-name>} |
{state <enable | disable>} |
{destination <port>}}+
Parameters:
<monitor-name> <string>
name Modify the name of the monitor.
state Enable or disable monitoring.
destination Specify the destination of the monitored traffic. This can be any
of the traffic ports (PORT-1, PORT-2, PORT-3, PORT-4).

4.243 Monitor Show Configuration


monitor show configuration - Show traffic monitor configuration
Description:
Displays the configuration of the traffic monitors. If a monitor name is specified, detailed
monitor configuration is displayed. Otherwise, a configuration summary is displayed in a table
format.
Syntax:
monitor show configuration [<monitor-name>]

Revision 1 — August 2022 150


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.244 MOTD Edit


motd edit - Edit the MOTD
Description:
Edit the "Message of the Day" that is displayed when users log in the unit.
Syntax:
motd edit <new-message>
Parameters:
<new-message> <string>

4.245 MOTD Show


motd show - Show the MOTD
Description:
Show the "Message of the Day" that is displayed when users log in the unit.
Syntax:
motd show

4.246 MTR Edit


mtr edit - Edit management traffic regulation parameters
Description:
Edit management traffic regulation parameters.
Syntax:
mtr edit { {state {enable | disable} } |
{rate <64-10000>} |
{latency <50-2000>} |
{burst <1522-4000>} }+
Parameters:
state Enable or disable management traffic regulation.
rate Specifies the average data rate in kilobits/second.
latency Specifies the transmit queue size by indicating the maximum
time, in milliseconds. Packets must wait inside the transmit
queue.
burst Specifies the maximum burst size in bytes.

Revision 1 — August 2022 151


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.247 MTR Enable/Disable


mtr enable - Enable management traffic regulation
mtr disable - Disable management traffic regulation
Description:
Enable or disable management traffic regulation. This is equivalent to mtr edit state {enable |
disable}.
Syntax:
mtr {enable | disable}

4.248 MTR Show


mtr show - Show management traffic regulation
Description:
Show management traffic regulation configuration.
Syntax:
mtr show

4.249 NETCONF Edit State


netconf edit - Edit the NETCONF agent configuration
Description:
Used to edit the NETCONF agent configuration.
Syntax:
netconf edit {
{state {disable | enable}}+
Parameters:
state Enable or disable the NETCONF agent.

4.250 NETCONF Show


netconf show - Show the NETCONF agent configuration
Description:
Used to display the NETCONF agent configuration.
Syntax:
netconf show

Revision 1 — August 2022 152


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.251 NTP Add


ntp add - Add a time server for the NTP service
Description:
Add an NTP (Network Time Protocol) to synchronize the clock with the remote server.
Syntax:
ntp add {<server-address>}
Parameters:
<server-address> <ip-addr> | <ipv6-addr> | <dns-name>
The name or the IP address of the NTP server to add.

4.252 NTP Delete


ntp delete - Remove a remote time server
Description:
Remove an NTP (Network Time Protocol) server from the list of servers.
Syntax:
ntp delete {<server-address>}
Parameters:
<server-address> <ip-addr> | <ipv6-addr> | <dns-name>

4.253 NTP Disable


ntp disable - Stop using an NTP server
Description:
Stop using the NTP service.
Syntax:
ntp disable

4.254 NTP Disable Server


ntp disable-server - Stop the NTP server
Description:
Stop the NTP server.
Syntax:
ntp disable-server

Revision 1 — August 2022 153


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.255 NTP Edit


ntp edit - Change time or NTP related settings
Description:
Change time or NTP related settings.
Syntax:
ntp edit {{tai-offset <decimal>}
{sync-mode <normal | highres>}
{dscp <0-63>}
{dst <enable | disable>}
{vlan-priority <0-7>}
{time-interval <10-300>}
{nbr-messages <5-60>}
{utc-hour <(-12)-(+14)>}
{utc-min <0-59>}
{dst-hour <0-23>}
{dst-min <0-59>}
{dst-start-month <month>}
{dst-start-week <1-5>}
{dst-start-day <day>}
{dst-start-hour <0-23>}
{dst-start-min <0-59>}
{dst-end-month <month>}
{dst-end-week <1-5>}
{dst-end-day <day>}
{dst-end-hour <0-23>}
{dst-end-min <0-59>}}+
Parameters:
tai-offset Offset in seconds to convert UTC time to TAI (Temps Atomique
International).
sync-mode Synchronization mode. In normal mode, the time is retrieved from
the NTP server and the local clock adjusted accordingly, without
further processing. In high resolution mode, hardware-assisted
synchronization is performed to achieve better accuracy.
dscp When using NTP, the priority can be set in the DiffServ Code
Point.
dst For regions of the world implementing Daylight Saving Time,
(DST), this can be enabled. Be aware that syslog and other
services that timestamp events using the current date and time
will be affected during transitions of DST periods. There will

Revision 1 — August 2022 154


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

possibly be an hour gap or duplicate time stamps because the


clock was set back.
vlan-priority When using NTP, the priority of the packets can be set in the
VLAN priority bits if the link is through a VLAN.
time-interval The time interval between requests to the NTP server (in
seconds).
nbr-messages The number of messages sent to the NTP server during a
request.
utc-hour Hour offset from Coordinated Universal Time. North America
would have negative values while Eastern Europe would have
positive values.
utc-min Minute offset from Coordinated Universal Time.
dst-hour Daylight Saving Time hour offset.
dst-min Daylight Saving Time minute offset.
dst-start-month
dst-start-week
dst-start-day
dst-start-hour
dst-start-min Period where Daylight Saving Time starts. The events are
described as: "the change will take place on the nth (week) of
(month) on a (day) at (hour) (min)". To configure the last day of
the month, use week=5.
dst-end-month
dst-end-week
dst-end-day
dst-end-hour
dst-end-min Period where daylight saving time ends. The events are
described as: "the change will take place on the nth (week) of
(month) on a (day) at (hour) (min)". To configure the last day of
the month, use week=5.

4.256 NTP Enable


ntp enable - Choose one or two NTP servers to use
Description:
Choose the NTP (Network Time Protocol) server you want to use for the clock
synchronization. You can enable up to two servers, but only one will be active at a time. This
command also starts the NTP service.
Syntax:
ntp enable { {<server-address>} |
{<server-address>} }

Revision 1 — August 2022 155


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
<server-address> <ip-addr> | <ipv6-addr> | <dns-name>

4.257 NTP Enable Server


ntp enable-server - Start the NTP server service
Description:
Start the NTP server service.
Syntax:
ntp enable-server

4.258 NTP Show


ntp show - Show the current NTP configuration and status
Description:
Show the current configuration and status for the NTP (Network Time Protocol) service.
Syntax:
ntp show

4.259 OAM Add/Edit


oam add - Add a new OAM instance
oam edit - Edit an existing OAM instance
Description:
Add a new OAM instance or edit attributes of an existing OAM instance.
Syntax:
oam {add|edit} <instance-name>
(not optional for add) {{port <port-name>} |
{name <oam-name>} |
{state {enable|disable}} |
{mode {active|passive}} |
{max-pdu-size <decimal>} |
{event-re-transmit <decimal>} |
{efe-threshold <decimal>} |
{efe-window <decimal>} |
{efpe-threshold <decimal>} |
{efpe-window <decimal>} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 156


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{efsse-threshold <decimal>} |
{efsse-window <10-9000>} }+
Parameters:
<instance-name> <string>
<oam-name> <string>
name New name assigned to the OAM instance
port Port to bind this OAM instance
state Administrative state
mode OAM instance mode, active or passive
max-pdu-size Max OAM PDU size
event-re-transmit Number of Event re-transmits
efe-threshold Errored Frame Event threshold
efe-window Errored Frame Event window
efpe-threshold Errored Frame Period Event threshold
efpe-window Errored Frame Period Event window
efsse-threshold Errored Frame Seconds Summary Event threshold
efsse-window Errored Frame Seconds Summary Event window

4.260 OAM Clear Statistics


oam clear statistics - Clear OAM instance statistics
Description:
Clear the statistics of an OAM instance. If <instance-name> is not specified, all OAM instances
statistics will be cleared.
Syntax:
oam clear statistics [<instance-name>]
Parameters:
<instance-name> <string>

4.261 OAM Delete


oam delete - Remove an OAM instance
Description:
Remove the OAM instance.
Syntax:
oam delete {<instance-name>}

Revision 1 — August 2022 157


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
<instance-name> <string>

4.262 OAM Show Configuration


oam show configuration - Show OAM instance configuration
Description:
Show the configuration of the OAM instance.
Syntax:
oam show configuration [<instance-name>]
Parameters:
<instance-name> <string>

4.263 OAM Show Events


oam show events - Show OAM events
Description:
OAM show events is a summary of all the events exchanged on an OAM connection. You can
see all details of received and transmit events.
Syntax:
oam show events [<instance-name>]
Parameters:
<instance-name> <string>

4.264 OAM Show Statistics


oam show statistics - Show OAM instance statistics
Description:
Show the statistics of the OAM instance.
Syntax:
oam show statistics [<instance-name>]
Parameters:
<instance-name> <string>

Revision 1 — August 2022 158


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.265 OAM Show Status


oam show status - Show OAM status
Description:
OAM show status is a summary of the status of each OAM instance.
Syntax:
oam show status [<instance-name>]
Parameters:
<instance-name> <string>

4.266 PAA Add/Edit L2


paa add l2 - Create a layer-2 PAA probe
paa edit l2 - Edit a layer-2 PAA probe configuration
Description:
Create or modify a PAA probe. Configure the probe operation mode, its addressing
parameters and various measurement parameters.

NOTE : One-way delay measurements require time synchronization using NTP/PT P


on units at each probe end.

Syntax:
paa {add|edit} l2 <probe-name> {
{state {disable | enable}} |
{mode { source | sink | bi-dir } } |
{local-index <decimal> } |
{peer-index <decimal> } |
{port <port-name> } |
{dst-mac-addr <mac-addr> } |
{vlan1-id [<0-4095>] [enable|disable] } |
{vlan1-priority <0-7> } |
{vlan2-id [<0-4095>] [enable|disable] } |
{vlan2-priority <0-7> } |
{vlan1-type {c-vlan | s-vlan}} |
{vlan2-type {c-vlan | s-vlan}} |
{pkt-size <66-1500> } |
{validate-vlan1-id {disable | enable} } |
{rx-vlan1-id [<0-4095>] } |
{couple-tx-rx-vlan1-id {disable | enable} } |

Revision 1 — August 2022 159


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{validate-vlan1-priority {disable | enable} } |


{rx-vlan1-priority <0-7> } |
{couple-tx-rx-vlan1-priority {disable | enable} } |
{validate-vlan2-id {disable | enable} } |
{rx-vlan2-id [<0-4095>] } |
{couple-tx-rx-vlan2-id {disable | enable} } |
{validate-vlan2-priority {disable | enable} } |
{rx-vlan2-priority <0-7> } |
{couple-tx-rx-vlan2-priority {disable | enable} } |
{sampling-period <decimal> } |
{cc-threshold <decimal> } |
{pkt-loss-ref-period <decimal> } |
{pkt-loss-threshold <decimal> } |
{ow-ref-period <decimal> } |
{ow-max-delay <decimal> } |
{ow-delay-threshold <decimal> } |
{ow-ad-threshold <decimal> } |
{ow-max-dv <decimal> } |
{ow-dv-threshold <decimal> } |
{ow-adv-threshold <decimal> } |
{tw-ref-period <decimal> } |
{tw-max-delay <decimal> } |
{tw-delay-threshold <decimal> } |
{tw-ad-threshold <decimal> } |
{tw-max-dv <decimal> } |
{tw-dv-threshold <decimal> } |
{tw-adv-threshold <decimal> }
{fault-propagation <enable | disable> }
{fp-port <port-name> } }+
Parameters:
<probe-name> Probe name.
state Enable or disable the PAA probe.
mode Indicates if a probe generates (source) or collects
(sink) measurement packets or does both (bi-
dir).
local-index Specifies the local identifier for the probe. If it is
omitted or set to 0 when the instance is added,
the system will automatically allocate a value to
the local identifier. The range is 0 to 300.
peer-index Specifies the remote peer identifier for the
probe. If peer-index is omitted or set to 0 when
the instance is added, the remote peer identifier

Revision 1 — August 2022 160


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

will be discovered dynamically based on the


probe name during the PAA association phase.
port Outgoing port name.
dst-mac-addr The peer MAC address. When set to
FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF, layer-2 peer address
discovery will be done automatically, i.e. it will
find the peer MAC address.
vlan1-id First VLAN ID. When enabled, layer-2 PAA
frames are encapsulated into the specified
VLAN.
vlan2-id Second VLAN ID. When enabled, layer-2 PAA
frames are encapsulated into a second VLAN.
Applies only when vlan1-id is enabled.
vlan1-type First VLAN type. When vlan1-id is enabled,
specifies the VLAN type of the first VLAN tag.
vlan2-type Second VLAN type. When vlan2-id is enabled,
specifies the VLAN type of the second VLAN tag.
vlan1-priority First VLAN priority bits. Applies only when vlan1-
id is enabled.
vlan2-priority Second VLAN priority bits. Applies only when
vlan2-id is enabled.
validate-vlan1-id Enable or disable VLAN 1 id validation.
couple-tx-rx-vlan1-id Couple Tx and Rx VLAN 1 id values for VLAN 1 id
validation.
rx-vlan1-id Expected VLAN 1 id value received by the
remote.
validate-vlan1-priority Enable or disable VLAN 1 priority validation.
couple-tx-rx-vlan1-priority Couple Tx and Rx Vlan 1 priority values for VLAN
1 priority validation.
rx-vlan1-priority Expected VLAN 1 priority value received by the
remote unit.
validate-vlan2-id Enable or disable VLAN 2 id validation.
couple-tx-rx-vlan2-id Couple Tx and Rx VLAN 2 id values for VLAN 2 id
validation.
rx-vlan2-id Expected VLAN 2 id value received by the
remote unit.
validate-vlan2-priority Enable or disable VLAN 2 priority validation.
couple-tx-rx-vlan2-priority Couple Tx and Rx VLAN 2 priority values for
VLAN 2 priority validation.
rx-vlan2-priority Expected VLAN 2 priority value received by the
remote unit.
pkt-size Packet size. Does not include the Ethernet
header and FCS bytes.

Revision 1 — August 2022 161


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

sampling-period Interval at which PAA measurement frames are


sent.
cc-threshold Continuity check threshold. Number of
consecutive sampling periods without receiving
peer frames before declaring loss of continuity.
pkt-loss-ref-period Packet loss reference period.
pkt-loss-threshold Packet loss threshold in %.
ow-ref-period One-way reference period.
ow-max-delay Maximum one-way delay.
ow-delay-threshold Maximum consecutive one-way delay samples
allowed greater than ow-max-delay.
ow-ad-threshold Maximum one-way average delay.
ow-max-dv Maximum one-way delay variation allowed.
ow-dv-threshold Maximum consecutive one-way delay variation
samples allowed greater than ow-max-dv.
ow-adv-threshold Maximum one-way average delay variation.
tw-ref-period Two-way reference period.
tw-max-delay Maximum two-way average delay.
tw-delay-threshold Maximum consecutive two-way delay samples
allowed greater than tw-max-delay.
tw-ad-threshold Maximum two-way average delay.
tw-max-dv Maximum two-way delay variation allowed.
tw-dv-threshold Maximum consecutive tw-way delay variation
samples allowed greater than tw-max-dv.
tw-adv-threshold Maximum two-way average delay variation.
fault-propagation Enable or disable EVC fault propagation.
fp-port Fault propagation port. Indicates toward which
port, EVC faults should be propagated.

4.267 PAA Add/Edit UDP


paa add udp - Create a UDP PAA probe
paa edit udp - Edit a UDP PAA probe configuration
Description:
Create or modify a PAA probe. Configure the probe operation mode, its addressing
parameters and various measurement parameters.

NOTE : One-way delay measurements require time synchronization using NTP/PTP


on units at each probe end.

Revision 1 — August 2022 162


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
paa {add|edit} udp <probe-name> {
{state {disable | enable}} |
{mode { source | sink | bi-dir } } |
{local-index <decimal> } |
{peer-index <decimal> }
{dst-ipv4-addr <ip-addr> } |
{udp-dest-port <decimal> } |
{udp-src-port <decimal> } |
{dscp <0-63> } |
{ecn <0-3> } |
{vlan1-priority <0-7> } |
{validate-vlan1-priority {disable | enable} } |
{rx-vlan1-priority <0-7> } |
{couple-tx-rx-vlan1-priority {disable | enable} } |
{validate-dscp {disable | enable} } |
{rx-dscp <0-7> } |
{couple-tx-rx-dscp {disable | enable} } |
{pkt-size <66-1472> } |
{sampling-period <decimal> } |
{cc-threshold <decimal> } |
{pkt-loss-ref-period <decimal> } |
{pkt-loss-threshold <decimal> } |
{ow-ref-period <decimal> } |
{ow-join-period <decimal> } |
{ow-max-delay <decimal> } |
{ow-delay-threshold <decimal> } |
{ow-ad-threshold <decimal> } |
{ow-max-dv <decimal> } |
{ow-dv-threshold <decimal> } |
{ow-adv-threshold <decimal> } |
{tw-ref-period <decimal> } |
{tw-max-delay <decimal> } |
{tw-delay-threshold <decimal> } |
{tw-ad-threshold <decimal> } |
{tw-max-dv <decimal> } |
{tw-dv-threshold <decimal> } |
{tw-adv-threshold <decimal> } |
{igmp-ref-period <decimal> } |
{join-max-delay <decimal> } |
{join-delay-threshold <decimal> } |

Revision 1 — August 2022 163


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{join-ad-threshold <decimal> } |
{leave-max-delay <decimal> } |
{leave-delay-threshold <decimal> } |
{leave-ad-threshold <decimal> } }+
Parameters:
<probe-name> Probe name.
state Enable or disable the PAA probe.
mode Indicates if a probe generates (source) or collects
(sink) measurement packets or does both (bi-
dir).
local-index Specifies the local identifier for the probe. If it is
omitted or set to 0 when the instance is added,
the system will automatically allocate a value to
the local identifier. The range is 0 to 300.
peer-index Specifies the remote peer identifier.
dst-ipv4-addr The peer IPv4 destination address.
udp-dest-port Specifies destination UDP port (default 8793,
valid ports > 1023).
udp-src-port Specifies source UDP port (default 8793, valid
ports > 1023).
dscp The Diff-Serv CodePoint value.
ecn The Explicit Congestion Notification value.
vlan1-priority First VLAN priority bits. This applies only if the
outgoing interface is encapsulated in a VLAN.
validate-vlan1-priority Enable or disable VLAN 1 priority validation.
couple-tx-rx-vlan1-priority Couple Tx and Rx VLAN 1 priority values for
VLAN 1 priority validation.
rx-vlan1-priority Expected VLAN 1 priority value received by the
remote unit.
validate-dscp Enable or disable DSCP validation.
couple-tx-rx-dscp Couple Tx and Rx DSCP values for DSCP
validation.
rx-dscp Expected DSCP value received by the remote
unit.
pkt-size Packet size. Does not include the headers (UDP,
IP, Ethernet) and the FCS bytes.
sampling-period Interval at which PAA measurement packets are
sent.
cc-threshold Continuity check threshold. Number of
consecutive sampling periods without receiving
peer packets before declaring loss of continuity.
pkt-loss-ref-period Packet loss reference period.

Revision 1 — August 2022 164


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

pkt-loss-threshold Packet loss threshold in %.


ow-ref-period One-way reference period.
ow-max-delay Maximum one-way delay.
ow-delay-threshold Maximum consecutive one-way delay samples
allowed greater than ow-max-delay.
ow-ad-threshold Maximum one-way average delay.
ow-max-dv Maximum one-way delay variation allowed.
ow-dv-threshold Maximum consecutive one-way delay variation
samples allowed greater than ow-max-dv.
ow-adv-threshold Maximum one-way average delay variation.
tw-ref-period Two-way reference period.
tw-max-delay Maximum two-way average delay.
tw-delay-threshold Maximum consecutive two-way delay samples
allowed greater than tw-max-delay.
tw-ad-threshold Maximum two-way average delay.
tw-max-dv Maximum two-way delay variation allowed.
tw-dv-threshold Maximum consecutive tw-way delay variation
samples allowed greater than tw-max-dv.
tw-adv-threshold Maximum two-way average delay variation.
ow-join-period Indicates that IGMP join and leave delay
measurements will be performed and the period
during which one-way and packet loss samples
will be collected. This value should represent
how long to collect measurements before issuing
an IGMP leave for each period.
Validity: UDP sink probe configured with a multicast
address.
Values (in milliseconds):
0: Constant, no join and leave measurement
Min: 10 * sampling period
Max: One-way ref. period
(5 * sampling period)
igmp-ref-period Defines a reference period for IGMP
measurements. This period needs to be a
multiple of the one-way reference period.
Validity: UDP sink probe configured with a multicast
address. One-way Join Period must be different
than 0
Values (in milliseconds):
0 (default): No IGMP measurement
Min: One-way reference period * 10
Max: One-way reference period * 9000

Revision 1 — August 2022 165


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

join-max-delay Defines the maximum join delay objective.


Validity: UDP sink probe configured with a multicast
address.
Values (in milliseconds):
Min: 100ms
Max: One-way join period
join-delay-threshold Defines the maximum consecutive join delay
samples allowed greater than the maximum join
delay.
Validity: UDP sink probe configured with a multicast
address
Values (in samples):
Min: 1
Max: (One-way join period / Sampling period)
join-ad-threshold Define the maximum join average delay.
Validity: UDP sink probe configured with a multicast
address
Values (in milliseconds):
Min: 100ms
Max: One-way join period
leave-max-delay Defines the maximum leave delay objective.
Validity: UDP sink probe configured with a multicast
address
Values (in milliseconds):
Min: 100ms
Max: (One-way ref. period - One-way join
period)
leave-delay-threshold Defines the maximum consecutive leave delay
samples allowed greater than the maximum
leave delay.
Validity: UDP sink probe configured with a multicast
address
Values (in samples):
Min: 1
Max: (One-way ref. period - One-way join
period)/ Sampling period
leave-ad-threshold Define the maximum leave average delay.
Validity: UDP sink probe configured with a multicast
address
Values (in milliseconds):
Min: 100ms

Revision 1 — August 2022 166


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Max: (One-way ref. period - One-way join


period)

4.268 PAA Add/Edit UDP IPv6


paa add udpipv6 - Create a UDP IPV6 PAA probe
paa edit udpipv6 - Edit a UDP IPV6 PAA probe configuration
Description:
Create or modify a PAA probe. Configure the probe operation mode, its addressing
parameters and various measurement parameters.

NOTE : One-way delay measurements require time synchronization using NTP/PTP


on units at each probe end.

Syntax:
paa {add|edit} udpipv6 <probe-name> {
{state {disable | enable}} |
{mode { bi-dir } } |
{local-index <decimal> } |
{peer-index <decimal> }
{dst-ipv6-addr <ip-addr> } |
{udp-dest-port <decimal> } |
{udp-src-port <decimal> } |
{traffic-class <0-63> } |
{ecn <0-3> } |
{vlan1-priority <0-7> } |
{validate-vlan1-priority {disable | enable} } |
{rx-vlan1-priority <0-7> } |
{couple-tx-rx-vlan1-priority {disable | enable} } |
{validate-traffic-class {disable | enable} } |
{rx-traffic-class <0-7> } |
{couple-tx-rx-traffic-class {disable | enable} } |
{pkt-size <66-1452> } |
{sampling-period <decimal> } |
{cc-threshold <decimal> } |
{pkt-loss-ref-period <decimal> } |
{pkt-loss-threshold <decimal> } |
{ow-ref-period <decimal> } |
{ow-max-delay <decimal> } |
{ow-delay-threshold <decimal> } |
{ow-ad-threshold <decimal> } |

Revision 1 — August 2022 167


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{ow-max-dv <decimal> } |
{ow-dv-threshold <decimal> } |
{ow-adv-threshold <decimal> } |
{tw-ref-period <decimal> } |
{tw-max-delay <decimal> } |
{tw-delay-threshold <decimal> } |
{tw-ad-threshold <decimal> } |
{tw-max-dv <decimal> } |
{tw-dv-threshold <decimal> } |
{tw-adv-threshold <decimal> } }+
Parameters:
<probe-name> Probe name.
state Enable or disable the PAA probe.
mode Indicates that a probe generates and collects
measurement packets (bi-dir).
local-index Specifies the local identifier for the probe. If it is
omitted or set to 0 when the instance is added,
the system will automatically allocate a value to
the local identifier. The range is 0 to 300.
peer-index Specifies the remote peer identifier.
dst-ipv6-addr The peer IPv6 destination address.
udp-dest-port Specifies destination UDP port (default 8793,
valid ports > 1023).
udp-src-port Specifies source UDP port (default 8793, valid
ports > 1023).
traffic-class The Differentiated Services Code Point value.
ecn The Explicit Congestion Notification value.
vlan1-priority First VLAN priority bits. This applies only if the
outgoing interface is encapsulated in a VLAN.
validate-vlan1-priority Enable or disable VLAN 1 priority validation.
couple-tx-rx-vlan1-priority Couple Tx and Rx VLAN 1 priority values for
VLAN 1 priority validation.
rx-vlan1-priority Expected VLAN 1 priority value received by the
remote unit.
validate-traffic-class Enable or disable traffic class validation.
couple-tx-rx-traffc-class Couple Tx and Rx traffic class values for traffic
class validation.
rx-traffic-class Expected traffic class value received by the
remote unit.
pkt-size Packet size. Does not include the headers (UDP,
IP, Ethernet) and the FCS bytes.

Revision 1 — August 2022 168


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

sampling-period Interval at which PAA measurement packets are


sent.
cc-threshold Continuity check threshold. Number of
consecutive sampling periods without receiving
peer packets before declaring loss of continuity.
pkt-loss-ref-period Packet loss reference period.
pkt-loss-threshold Packet loss threshold in %.
ow-ref-period One-way reference period.
ow-max-delay Maximum one-way delay.
ow-delay-threshold Maximum consecutive one-way delay samples
allowed greater than ow-max-delay.
ow-ad-threshold Maximum one-way average delay.
ow-max-dv Maximum one-way delay variation allowed.
ow-dv-threshold Maximum consecutive one-way delay variation
samples allowed greater than ow-max-dv.
ow-adv-threshold Maximum one-way average delay variation.
tw-ref-period Two-way reference period.
tw-max-delay Maximum two-way average delay.
tw-delay-threshold Maximum consecutive two-way delay samples
allowed greater than tw-max-delay.
tw-ad-threshold Maximum two-way average delay.
tw-max-dv Maximum two-way delay variation allowed.
tw-dv-threshold Maximum consecutive tw-way delay variation
samples allowed greater than tw-max-dv.
tw-adv-threshold Maximum two-way average delay variation.

4.269 PAA Delete


paa delete - Remove a PAA probe
Description:
Remove a PAA probe.
Syntax:
paa delete {<probe-name>}
Parameters:
<probe-name> <string>

Revision 1 — August 2022 169


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.270 PAA Show Configuration


paa show configuration - Show PAA configuration
Description:
Display a summary of the configured PAA instances. When an instance name is specified, a
detailed configuration report is displayed.
Syntax:
paa show configuration [<probe-name>]
Parameters:
<probe-name> <string>

4.271 PAA Show Result


paa show result - Show PAA results
Description:
Display PAA probe measurements and status.
Syntax:
paa show result [<probe-name>] {
{ type {historic}} |
{ buckets <0-16>} |
{ period <period-id>}}+
Parameters:
<probe-name> <string>
<period-id> <decimal>
type Type of statistics to display:
Historic: History buckets statistics. If the number of buckets is not
specified, the last 4 buckets will be displayed, starting from the
specified period. If no period is specified, the last 4 buckets will be
displayed.
buckets Number of PAA buckets to display.
period Reference period for the PAA history buckets. Zero for the most
recent period available.

4.272 PAA Show Status


paa show status - Show PAA status
Description:
Display PAA probe status.

Revision 1 — August 2022 170


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
paa show status [<probe-name>]
Parameters:
<probe-name> <string>

4.273 Permission-Group Add


permission-group add - Add user permissions groups
Description:
Add a permission group.
Syntax:
permission-group {add} <group-name> {
{ACL|Alarms|All-add|All-edit|All-enable|CFM|Config|
Filters|Firmware|
History|Log|L2PT|Management|OAM|PAA|Policies|Port|Protection|
RFC-2544|SAT-Protocol|SAT-reporting|Service Availability|
Service mapping|Sessions|Shaping|Traffic|Twamp|Users|Y.1564},+ }
Parameters:
<group-name> <string>

4.274 Permission-Group Delete


permission-group delete - Delete an existing permission-group
Description:
Delete an existing permission-group
Syntax:
permission-group delete <group-name>
Parameters:
<group-name> <string>

4.275 Permission-Group Edit


permission-group edit - Edit user permissions groups
Description:
Configure a permission group.

Revision 1 — August 2022 171


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
permission-group {edit|delete} <group-name> {
{ {add-permission|delete-permission}
{Acl|Alarms|All-add|All-edit|All-enable|CFM|Config|
Filters|Firmware|
History|Log|L2PT|Management|OAM|PAA|Policies|Port|Protection|
RFC-2544|SAT-Protocol|SAT-reporting|Service Availability|
Service mapping|Sessions|Shaping|Traffic|Twamp|Users|Y.1564},+ }
{sub-permission <permission group>
<sub-permission name> {enable|disable}} }
Parameters:
<group-name> <string>
add-permission Permission added to the permission-group.
delete-permission Permission deleted from the permission-group.
sub-permission Sub-permission of the permission group.
<permission group> Permission group which has sub-permission
<sub-permission name> Sub-permission depends on each permission group.

4.276 Permission-Group Show


permission-group show - Show permission-group configuration
Description:
Specifying a permission-group name provides detailed configuration about this group.
Otherwise, the command provides a summary configuration for all permission-groups in a
table format. Sub-permissions display sub-permissions for a specific user group and
permission group.
Syntax:
permission-group show [<group-name>] {{sub-permission <permission group>}}
Parameters:
<group-name> <string>
sub-permission Sub-permission of the permission group.
<permission group> Permission group which has sub-permission

4.277 Ping
ping - send ICMP ECHO_REQUEST to network hosts
Description:
Ping sends ICMP(v4 or v6) ECHO_REQUESTs to a network host which will send back and
ECHO_RESPONSE to test the path between the two hosts.

Revision 1 — August 2022 172


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Usage:
ping [OPTIONS] HOST
Options:
-4,-6 Force IP or IPv6 name resolution
-c CNT Send only CNT pings
-s SIZE Send SIZE data bytes in packets (default:56)
-I IFACE/IP Use interface or IP address as source
-W SEC Seconds to wait for the first response (default:10) (after all -c
CNT packets are sent)
-w SEC Seconds until ping exits (default:infinite) (can exit earlier with -c
CNT)
-q Quiet, only displays output at start and when finished

4.278 Ping6
ping6 - send ICMP ECHO_REQUEST to network hosts (IPv6)
Description:
ping6 is the IPv6 version of ping, it sends ICMPv6 ECHO_REQUESTs to a
network host which will send back and ECHO_RESPONSE to test the path
between the two hosts.
Usage:
ping6 [OPTIONS] HOST
Options:
-c CNT Send only CNT pings
-s SIZE Send SIZE data bytes in packets (default:56)
-I IFACE/IP Use interface or IP address as source
-W SEC Seconds to wait for the first response (default:10) (after all -c
CNT packets are sent)
-w SEC Seconds until ping exits (default:infinite) (can exit earlier with -c
CNT)
-q Quiet, only displays output at start and when finished

4.279 PMCollect Edit Configuration


pmcollect edit configuration - Editing command used by the Vision Collect
system
Description:
Change the agent's configuration parameters.

Revision 1 — August 2022 173


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
pmcollect edit configuration {<parameter> <value>}*

4.280 PMCollect Show Configuration


pmcollect show configuration - Show Vision Collect Agent configuration
Description:
Display the agent's configuration parameters.
Syntax:
pmcollect show configuration

4.281 PMCollect Show Descriptors


pmcollect show descriptors - Dump Vision Collect Agent JSON descriptors
Description:
Display the agent's JSON descriptors.
Syntax:
pmcollect show descriptors

4.282 Policy Clear Statistics


policy clear statistics - Clear policy statistics
Description:
Clear policy statistics. If <traffic-name> and <policy-id> are not specified, all policies statistics
for all traffic-names will be cleared. If, <traffic-name> is specified, the policies statistics for this
<traffic-name> will be cleared.
Syntax:
policy clear statistics [<Traffic-name>] [<policy_id>]
Parameters:
<Traffic-name> <string>
<policy-id> <decimal>

4.283 Policy Edit


policy edit - Edit an existing policy
Description:
This command defines the traffic filter and the action associated with an access policy.

Revision 1 — August 2022 174


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
policy edit { Traffic-x} <policy-id> {
{ state {enable | disable}} |
{ out-port <port-name>} |
{ queuing-profile <queuing-profile-name>} |
{ filter {l2 | ipv4 | ipv6 | vlan} <filter-name>} |
{ action {permit | drop | MGMT-OAM | MGMT-OAM-drop |
MGMT-OAM-fwd | none}} |
{ monitor {enable <monitor-name> | disable}} |
{ evc-encapsulation {none | push | pop | replace | pop-replace |
push-preserve | preserve-vlan-new-cfi-pcp |
push-push | pop-pop | push-replace}} |
{ evc-ethertype {c-vlan | s-vlan | t-vlan} |
{ evc-ethertype2 {c-vlan | s-vlan | t-vlan} |
{ evc-vlan-id <0-4095>} |
{ evc-vlan-id2 <0-4095>} |
{ cos-mapping {preserve | direct | map}} |
{ map1-state {enable | disable}} |
{ map1-type {pcp-vlan | pcp-vlaninvlan | precedence | dscp}} |
{ map1-cos-profile <cos-profile-name>} |
{ map1-regulator-set {enable <regulator-set-name> | disable}} |
{ map2-state {enable | disable}} |
{ map2-type {pcp-vlan | pcp-vlaninvlan | precedence | dscp}} |
{ map2-cos-profile <cos-profile-name>} |
{ map2-regulator-set {enable <regulator-set-name> | disable}}
|
{ green-cfi <0-1>} |
{ yellow-cfi <0-1>} |
{ green-pcp <0-7>} |
{ yellow-pcp <0-7>} |
{ pre-marking {green | yellow | red} |
{ regulator {enable <regulator-name> | disable}}
}+
Parameters:
<policy-id <decimal>
<filter-name> <string>
<regulator-name> <string>
state Enable or disable the policy.
out-port Outgoing port for this policy.
queuing-profile The queuing profile associated with this outgoing port.

Revision 1 — August 2022 175


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

filter Specify an associated filter type and name.


action Drop or Permit the traffic matching the filter.

NOTE : None, MGMT-OAM, MGMT-OAM & Drop and MGMT-OAM & Forward actions
are not supported when the filte r type is VID set .

monitor Allow monitoring the traffic on a monitor.


evc-encapsulation Ethernet Virtual Connection encapsulation. Possible values are:
push: Add VLAN tag.
pop: Remove outer VLAN tag.
replace: Replace outer VLAN tag.
pop-replace:
Pop outer VLAN tag and replace inner VLAN tag.
push-preserve:
Add VLAN tag using the VLAN ID of the inner VLAN (if any).
preserve-vlan-new-cfi-pcp:
Preserve the VLAN ID and remark the CFI and PCP values.
push-push: Add inner and outer VLAN tags.
pop-pop: Pop inner and outer VLAN tags.
push-replace:
Add an outer VLAN and replace the inner VLAN tag.
none: No tags are added to the incoming frames.
evc-ethertype Ethertype to use in the VLAN tag. Applies only if evc-
encapsulation is set to push, push-preserve, replace, push-push,
pop-pop, push-replace or pop-replace.
evc-vlan-id VLAN ID in the VLAN tag. Applies only if evc-encapsulation is set
to push, push-preserve, replace, push-push, pop-pop, push-
replace or pop-replace.
evc-ethertype2 Ethertype to use in the second VLAN tag. Applies only if evc-
encapsulation is set to push-push or push-replace.
evc-vlan-id2 VLAN ID in the second VLAN tag. Applies only if evc-
encapsulation is set to push-push or push-replace.
cos-mapping CoS mapping action. The action can be "preserve", "direct" or
"map".
map1-state First choice mapping state.
map1-type First choice mapping type. Which incoming traffic attribute to
use for traffic mapping.
map1-cos-profile First choice mapping CoS profile. Use this profile to map the
incoming traffic based on the traffic attribute selected in map1-
type.
map1-regulator-set First choice mapping regulator set. Regulator set to use for traffic
regulation based on the traffic attribute selected in map1-type.

Revision 1 — August 2022 176


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

map2-* Second choice mapping. Applies only if cos-mapping action is set


to map.
green-cfi Direct or default CFI/DEI bit for outgoing green traffic. The
default behavior is active when the cos-mapping is set to
preserve or map and the incoming traffic is neither handled by
the first nor by the second mapping choices.
green-pcp Direct or default PCP bits for outgoing green traffic.
yellow-cfi Direct or default CFI/DEI bit for outgoing yellow traffic.
yellow-pcp Direct or default PCP bits for outgoing yellow traffic.
pre-marking Direct or default pre-marking color.
regulator Direct or default traffic regulator.

4.284 Policy Show Configuration


policy show configuration - Show policy configuration
Description:
Display policy configuration. If a policy-id is specified, detailed policy configuration is
displayed, otherwise a configuration summary is displayed in a table format.
Syntax:
policy show configuration {Traffic-x} [<policy-id>]
Parameters:
<policy-id> <decimal>

4.285 Policy Show Statistics


policy show statistics - Show policy statistics
Description:
Display policy packet and byte counters.
Syntax:
policy show statistics {Traffic-x} <policy-id> {
{ type {clearable | persistent | historic}} |
{ buckets <0-16>} |
{ period <period-id>}}+
Parameters:
<policy-id> <decimal>
<period-id> <decimal>
type Type of statistics to display:
clearable: Current statistics since last clear command.

Revision 1 — August 2022 177


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

persistent: Current statistics since system start.


historic: History buckets statistics. If the number of buckets is not
specified, the last 4 buckets will be displayed, starting from the
specified period. If no period is specified, the last 4 buckets will be
displayed.
buckets: Number of policy buckets to display.
period: Reference period for the policy history buckets. Zero for the most
recent period available.

4.286 Port Clear Statistics


port clear statistics - Clear port statistics
Description:
Clear port statistics. If <port-name> is not specified, all ports statistics will be cleared.
Syntax:
port clear statistics [<port-name>]

4.287 Port Edit


port edit - Edit port attributes
Description
Edit port attributes. A port can be identified by its name or by the connector name. The port
speed and duplex mode are not relevant when auto-negotiation is enabled. Forcing the port
speed to 1G is not allowed because auto-negotiation is mandatory for Gigabit Ethernet.
Syntax
port edit <port-identifier> {{name <port-name>} |
{alias <port-alias>} |
{state {enable | disable}} |
{mtu <64-10240>} |
{lp-threshold <64-10240>} |
{llr {enable|disable}} |
{llr-period <decimal>} |
{internal-loopback {enable|disable}} |
{internal-loopback-timeout <0-60>} |
{auto-nego {enable|disable}} |
{speed {10M|100M|1G|10G}} |
{duplex {half|full}} |
{mdi {auto|mdi|mdix}} |
{advertisement {<advertisement-value>}+} |
{pause-mode {local|transparent|disable}} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 178


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{protection {enable|disable}} |
{protection-mode {link-status|lacp-status|
erp-status}} |
{working-connector <connector-name>} |
{revertive {enable|disable}} |
{revert-period <decimal>} |
{link-time-out <decimal>}
{lldp-state {enable|disable}}
{lldp-rate <decimal>}
{media-selection-mode {auto|manual}} |
{media-selection-conn {SFP|RJ45}} |
{version <1-2>} }+
Parameters
<port-identifier> <string>
<port-alias> <string>
<advertisement-value> {100M-HD|100M-FD|1G-HD|1G-FD|10G-
FD|pause|asym-pause}
name New name assigned to the port.
alias The "alias" name for the port, as specified by a
network manager.
state Port administrative state.
mtu Maximum transmission unit, which is platform
dependent and includes all headers.

NOTE : When the MTU is set to exceed a value of 2000, it is important that the ports
passing traffic through the unit be configured with a matching speed. If the speed
does not match, FIFO errors could occur.

lp-threshold Large packet threshold. Packets with a size


above this threshold will be classified as large
packets in the port statistics.
llr Enables or disables link lost return.
llr-period Period of time that the laser is turned on and off.
Entering a value of 0 puts the laser into a
disabled state waiting for the opposite side to
send a light pulse in order to re-establish the
link. So, for this reason, 0 should not be
configured on both sides or the link will never re-
establish.
internal-loopback Enable the internal loopback mode. The system
loopback mode redirect the transmit frames to
the receive path of the port.
internal-loopback-timeout Set timeout for the internal loopback mode.

Revision 1 — August 2022 179


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

auto-nego Enables or disables auto-negotiation.


speed Specifies link speed.
duplex Specifies duplex mode.
mdi Specifies the media dependent interface mode.
advertisement Specifies capabilities advertised during auto-
negotiation.
pause-mode Specifies whether pause frames are processed
locally, passed through transparently, or
disabled. When both pause-mode and auto-
negotiation are enabled, the exact behavior
depends on the auto-negotiation results.
protection Enables the protection for this port. Once
enabled, the protecting port is reserved by the
protection mechanism and can not be used for
monitoring purposes as long as the protection is
enabled. Protection is available on LAG ports
only.
protection-mode Selects the operation mode that triggers the
failover action.
working-connector Selects the working connector for the specified
port. The connector choice allows the user to
perform a switchover operation. Note that this
parameter is only available on LAG ports with
Protection Mode set to link status or LACP
status.
revertive If enabled, the traffic is switched back to the
main connector after the revert period has
expired.
revert-period Sets the time, in seconds, during which a
continuous signal must be detected on the main
connector. The timer is restarted if a signal loss is
detected during this period.
link-time-out Sets the time, in seconds, to wait for the link to
come up after switching to the standby
connector. If the timer expires and the linkstays
down, we switch back to the protected
connector.
lldp-state LLDP frame transmission state.
lldp-rate LLDP frame transmission rate in seconds [1-
3600].
media-selection-mode Selection mode for dual-media ports.
media-selection-conn Preferred media in automatic mode, or
alternatively the selected media in manual mode
for dual-media ports.

Revision 1 — August 2022 180


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

version The G.8032 protocol version used. Version 1 and


2 are supported. Version 1 allows a LAG port to
support one instance of ERP and version 2
allows it to support multiple instances of ERP.
Applies only if protection-mode is erp-status.

4.288 Port Show Configuration


port show configuration - Show port configuration
Description:
Without arguments or with the modifier summary, this command displays the port
configuration summary in a table format. When specifying a port name or a connector name,
this command displays detailed configuration for that port.
Syntax:
port show configuration [<port-name>]

4.289 Port Show Statistics


port show statistics - Show port statistics
Description:
Display port statistics.
Syntax:
port show statistics [<port-name>] {
{ type {clearable | persistent | historic}} |
{ buckets <0-16>} |
{ period <period-id>}}+
Parameters:
<port-name> <string>
<period-id> <decimal>
type Type of statistics to display:
clearable: Current statistics since last clear command.
persistent: Current statistics since system start.
historic: History buckets statistics. If the number of
buckets is not specified, the last 4 buckets will be
displayed, starting from the specified period. If
no period is specified, the last 4 buckets will be
displayed.
buckets: Number of port buckets to display.
period: Reference period for the port history buckets.
Zero for the most recent period available.

Revision 1 — August 2022 181


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.290 Port Show Status


port show status - Show port status
Description:
Display port status. Valid link state values are:
Up: The port is up and running.
Dormant Indicates that a signal is detected.
Protection-mode for the parent LAG port is 'Link-status'.
Port is the standby connector.
Down: The physical link is down and no signal is detected.
Syntax:
port show status [<port-name>]

4.291 PTP Edit


ptp edit - Change PTP related settings
Description:
Change PTP related settings
Syntax:
ptp edit { {state <enable|disable>} |
{pma <master-address>} |
{sma <master-address>} |
{utc <enable|disable>} |
{announce <-3,-2,-1,0,1,2 or 3>} |
{sync <-4,-3,-2,-1,0 or 1>} |
{pdn <0-255>} |
{sdn <0-255>} |
{dscp <0-63>} |
{vlan-priority <0-7>} }
Parameters:
state Enable or disable the PTP feature.
pma Primary master address (time server for the PTP client).
sma Secondary master address (time server for the PTP client).
<master-address> <ip-addr> | <ipv6-addr> | <dns-name>
utc Enable or disable the use of UTC offset from the master.
announce Specifies the interval of Announce message from the master.
Possible values:

Revision 1 — August 2022 182


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

-3 (8 messages / second)
-2 (4 messages / second)
-1 (2 messages / second)
0 (1 message / second)
1 (1 message / 2 seconds) <- default value
2 (1 message / 4 seconds)
3 (1 message / 8 seconds)
sync Specifies the interval of Sync message from the master.
Possible values:
-4 (16 messages / second)
-3 (8 messages / second)
-2 (4 messages / second)
-1 (2 messages / second)
0 (1 message / second) <- default value
1 (1 message / 2 seconds)
pdn Specifies the domain number of the primary PTP master.
Possible values: 0 to 255
Default value : 4
sdn Specifies the domain number of the secondary PTP master.
Possible values: 0 to 255
Default value : 4
dscp When using PTP, the priority of the packets can be set in the
DiffServ Code Point.
vlan-priority When using PTP, the priority of the packets can be set in the
VLAN priority bits if the link is through a VLAN.

NOTE : Communication with the grandmaster clock is only supported via unicast
negotiation (defined in clause 16.1 of IEEE 1588-2008). Multicast negotiation is not
supported.

4.292 PTP Reset


ptp reset - Reset to default PTP settings
Description:
Resets to default PTP settings.
Syntax:
ptp reset

Revision 1 — August 2022 183


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.293 PTP Show


ptp show - Show the current PTP configuration and status
Description:
Show the current configuration and status for the PTP (Precision Time Protocol) service.
Syntax:
ptp show

4.294 RADIUS Edit


radius edit - Allows you to edit the RADIUS configuration
Description:
radius edit allows you to change RADIUS parameters required to authenticate authorize
management access to the unit.

NOTE : The new parameters are only effective on the next login attempt.

Syntax:
radius edit {
{auth-method {pap}} |
{auth-server1-host {<ip-addr> | <ipv6-addr> | <dns-name>}} |
{auth-server1-port <decimal>} |
{auth-server1-secret <string>} |
{auth-server1-source <ip-addr>} |
{auth-server2-host {<ip-addr> | <ipv6-addr> | <dns-name>}} |
{auth-server2-port <decimal>} |
{auth-server2-secret <string>} |
{auth-server2-source <ip-addr>} |
{auth-server3-host {<ip-addr> | <ipv6-addr> | <dns-name>}} |
{auth-server3-port <decimal>} |
{auth-server3-secret <string>} |
{auth-server3-source <ip-addr>} |
{radius-timeout <decimal>} |
{radius-retries <decimal>} |
{realm <string>} |
{vendor-specific {enable | disable}} }+
Parameters:
auth-method Authentication method to use.
auth-server1-host RADIUS host server to authenticate to.

Revision 1 — August 2022 184


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

auth-server1-port RADIUS server UDP port to connect to.


auth-server1-secret Shared secret for server1.
auth-server1-source Optional bind address for the primary RADIUS server.
auth-server2-host Used only if first host server does not respond.
auth-server2-port RADIUS server UDP port to connect to.
auth-server2-secret Shared secret for server2.
auth-server2-source Optional bind address for the secondary RADIUS server.
auth-server3-host Used only if first and second host servers do not respond.
auth-server3-port RADIUS server UDP port to connect to.
auth-server3-secret Shared secret for server3.
auth-server3-source Optional bind address for the tertiary RADIUS server.
radius-timeout Time to wait for the RADIUS server to respond before retrying
connection. After the number of retries has been exhausted, a
connection to the next configured server will be attempted, in
which the same timeout and retry scheme will apply.
radius-retries Number of times to retry the server before trying the next
configured server.
realm Append this to user name. Mostly left blank.
vendor-specific Enable or disable the Vendor-Specific attribute in Access-
Request.

4.295 RADIUS Show


radius show - Show the RADIUS configuration
Description:
Show the RADIUS configuration.
Syntax:
radius show

4.296 Rate Edit


rate edit - Edit the working rate globally used in the unit
Description:
Configure the working rate used by different modules in the unit.
Syntax:
rate {edit} { { generator <layer-1 | layer-2> } |
{ regulator <layer-1 | layer-2> } |
{ shaper <layer-1 | layer-2> } }

Revision 1 — August 2022 185


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
generator Set the working rate for the RFC-2544 generator and testsuite,
and Y.1564 testing.
regulator Set the working rate for all bandwidth regulator.
shaper Set the working rate for the shaper.

4.297 Rate Show


rate show – Show the working rates
Description:
Display the working rate used by different modules in the unit.
Syntax:
rate show

4.298 Reboot
Reboots the unit

4.299 Regulator-Set Add/Edit DSCP


regulator-set add dscp - Add new DSCP regulator set instance
regulator-set edit dscp - Change a DSCP regulator set configuration
Description:
With these commands, you can create a new regulator set or change the parameters of an
existing regulator set.
Syntax:
regulator-set {add|edit} dscp <regulator-set-name> {
{name <regulator-set-name>} |
{input-list {<0-63> [,|- <0-63>]}+ } |
{regulator {disable | enable} [<regulator-name>]} |
{default-regulator {enable | disable}
[<regulator-name>]} }+
Parameters:
<regulator-set-name> <string>
<regulator-name> <string>
input-list A comma-separated list of DSCP values and DSCP range (x-y)
values.

Revision 1 — August 2022 186


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

regulator Bandwidth regulator to be used for all packets that have a DSCP
in input-list.
default-regulator Bandwidth regulator to be used for all packets that do NOT have
a DSCP in input-list.

NOTE : If input-list is omitted, the default-regulator parameter interprets the input-


list as a 0-63 range.

4.300 Regulator-Set Add/Edit PCP


regulator-set add pcp - Add new PCP regulator set instance
regulator-set edit pcp - Change a PCP regulator set configuration
Description:
With these commands, you can create a new regulator set or change the parameters of an
existing regulator set.
Syntax:
regulator-set {add|edit} pcp <regulator-set-name> {
{name <regulator-set-name>} |
{input-list {<0-7> [,|- <0-7>]}+ } |
{regulator {disable | enable} [<regulator-name>]} |
{default-regulator {enable | disable}
[<regulator-name>]} }+
Parameters:
<regulator-set-name> <string>
<regulator-name> <string>
input-list A comma-separated list of PCP values and PCP range (x-y)
values.
regulator Bandwidth regulator to be used for all packets that have a PCP in
input-list.
default-regulator Bandwidth regulator to be used for all packets that do NOT have
a PCP in input-list.

NOTE : If input-list is omitted, the default-regulator parameter interprets the input-


list as 0-7 range.

Revision 1 — August 2022 187


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.301 Regulator-Set Add/Edit Precedence


regulator-set add precedence - Add new IP precedence regulator set
instance
regulator-set edit precedence - Change an IP precedence set configuration
Description:
With these commands, you can create a new IP precedence regulator set or change the
parameters of an existing IP precedence regulator set.
Syntax:
regulator-set {add|edit} precedence <regulator-set-name> {
{name <regulator-set-name>} |
{input-list {<0-7> [,|- <0-7>]}+ } |
{regulator {enable | disable} [<regulator-name>]} |
{default-regulator {enable | disable}
[<regulator-name>]} }+
Parameters:
<regulator-set-name> <string>
<regulator-name> <string>
input-list A comma-separated list of IP precedence values and IP
precedence range (x-y) values.
regulator Bandwidth regulator to be used for all packets that have an IP
precedence in input-list.
default-regulator Bandwidth regulator to be used for all packets that do NOT have
an IP precedence in input-list.

NOTE : If input-list is omitted, the default-regulator parameter interprets the input-


list as a 0-7 range.

4.302 Regulator-Set Delete


regulator-set delete - Delete the specified regulator set
Description:
Delete the specified regulator set.
Syntax:
regulator-set delete <regulator-set-name>
Parameters:
<regulator-set-name> <string>

Revision 1 — August 2022 188


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.303 Regulator-Set Show Configuration


regulator-set show configuration - Show regulator set configuration
Description:
Displays regulator set configuration. Specifying a regulator set name displays the detailed
configuration for this regulator set. Otherwise, the command displays a configuration
summary for all regulator sets.
Syntax:
regulator-set show configuration [<regulator-set-name>]
Parameters:
<regulator-set-name> <string>

4.304 RFC-2544 Generator Edit


rfc2544 generator edit - Change RFC-2544 traffic generator configuration
Description:
rfc2544 generator edit controls the traffic generator output.

NOTE : All units contain pre-programmed RFC-2544 loopbacks for "layer-2" and "l2-
accedian" frames. When testing with "l2-generic" frames or layer-3 packets, you
need to configure a custom loopback in the peer unit. This loopback must perform a
swap action on the MAC addresses, IP addresses and port numbers, as applicable.
Refer to the "oam loopback" command for more information on how to create a
custom loopback.

Packet and Flow are sub-sections of the generator and have their own exclusive set of
parameters, as described below.
Syntax:
rfc2544 generator edit {{port <port-name>} |
{exclude-vlan-size {yes | no}} |
{packet1 <packet-params>} |
{packet2 <packet-params>} |
{flow1 <flow-params>} |
{flow2 <flow-params>}} }+
Parameters:
port Name of the port to which to send the flow(s).
exclude-vlan-size The frame length is increased by the size of the
VLAN tag header(s) being added to the frame.
<packet-params> Generator packet header configuration (see below).
<flow-params> Generator flow profile configuration (see below).

Revision 1 — August 2022 189


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Packet syntax:
rfc2544 generator edit <packet-name>
{ {dst-mac-addr <mac-addr>} |
{packet-type {layer-2 | layer-3 | l2-accedian |
l2-generic | ip-multicast | l3-generic}} |
{ethertype <0-65535>} |
{vlan1-header {enable | disable}} |
{vlan1-ethertype {0x8100 | 0x88a8 | 0x9100}} |
{vlan1-priority <0-7>} |
{vlan1-id <0-4095>} |
{vlan1-cfi <0-1>} |
{vlan2-header {enable | disable}} |
{vlan2-ethertype {0x8100 | 0x88a8 | 0x9100}} |
{vlan2-priority <0-7>} |
{vlan2-cfi <0-1>} |
{vlan2-id <0-4095>} |
{dscp <0-63>} |
{ecn <0-3>} |
{ttl <0-255>} |
{dst-ipv4-addr <ip-addr>} |
{src-ipv4-addr <ip-addr>} |
{destination-port <0-65535>} |
{source-port <0-65535>} |
{y1731-level <0-7>}}+
Packet parameters:
packet-name packet[n] where "n" is included in <1-2> (not modifiable).
packet-type Used to define specific fields in the test packet.

NOTE : ip-multicast packet-type is only used to generate traffic frames, not to


analyze received frames.

ethertype The Ethernet type identifies the frame contents. This parameter
is deprecated and no longer needed. Its syntax still remains valid
for backward compatibility. Its value is set automatically based
on the value of packet-type. For example: 0x0800 for Layer-3,
0x8902 for Layer-2, 0x88FC for Layer-2 Accedian or Layer-2
generic.
dst-mac-addr This is the Ethernet MAC destination address.
vlan1-header Enable or disable VLAN 1 parameters in the frames.
vlan1-ethertype First VLAN protocol ID set to C-VLAN (0x8100) for 802.1Q
network, T-VLAN (0x9100) for 802.1Q tunneling network, or S-
VLAN (0x88A8) for 802.1AD network.

Revision 1 — August 2022 190


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

vlan1-cfi First VLAN CFI may be 0 or 1. It is usually set to 0.


vlan1-id First VLAN ID may be any value between 0 and 4095.
vlan1-priority First VLAN priority. The range is 0 to 7, with 7 being the highest
priority. Normal traffic has priority 0.
vlan2-header Enable or disable VLAN 2 parameters in the frames.
vlan2-ethertype Second VLAN protocol ID set to C-VLAN (0x8100) for 802.1Q
network, T-VLAN (0x9100) for 802.1Q tunneling network, or S-
VLAN (0x88A8) for 802.1AD network.
vlan2-cfi Second VLAN CFI may be 0 or 1. It is usually set to 0.
vlan2-id Second VLAN ID may be any value between 0 and 4095.
vlan2-priority Second VLAN priority. The range is 0 to 7, with 7 being the
highest priority. Normal traffic has priority 0.
dscp The Diff-Serv CodePoint value (0 - 63).
ecn The Explicit Congestion Notification value (0 - 3).
ttl This is the IPv4 time to live value (0 - 255).
dst-ipv4-addr The IPv4 destination address.
src-ipv4-addr The IPv4 source address (valid only for IP multicast destination
and l3-generic).
destination-port This is the destination port for UDP protocol (0 - 65535).
source-port This is the source port for UDP protocol (0 - 65535).
y1731-level Y.1731 Maintenance Entity Group level (0-7).
Flow syntax:
rfc2544 generator edit <flow-name> {
{description <description-text>} |
{traffic-type {constant {rate <0 to max-port-speed>}} |
burst {{packets <1 to max-packets>} |
{burst-gap <1 to 60000>}}} |
{packet-size {fixed <64-10240>} |
random {{min-size <64-10240>} |
{max-size <64-10240>}}} |
{payload-pattern {fixed-data <hexadecimal>} |
incremental {bytes | words} |
random {2e11-random | 2e11inv-random |
2e15-random | 2e15inv-random |}} |
{duration {continuous} |
{seconds <1-86400>} |
{bytes <64-4000000000>} |
{packets <1-4000000000>}} |
{type {in-service | out-of-service}} |
{regulator <regulator-name>}}+

Revision 1 — August 2022 191


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
flow-name flow[n] where "n" is included in <1-2> (not modifiable).
description <string> Description identifying the packet and its characteristics.
traffic-type Type of traffic may be one of the following:
constant: To send frames at a specific bit rate (Kbps). You
need to specify the Bit rate.
burst: To send a predefined number of frames at every
period. You must specify the Packets per Burst. For the Constant
traffic type, specify the bit rate (expressed in Kbps).
Supported values are:
0 to < 12.5 Mbps: Steps of 0.125 Mbps
> 13 Mbps to 1 Gbps: Steps of 1 Mbps
For Burst traffic type, specify the number of frames to send per
period (Packets per Burst) and the period, expressed in
milliseconds, between each burst of frames (Inter-Burst Gap).
You must select a Bit Rate that does not exceed the capacity of
the outgoing port used for that test. Failure to do so will result in
inaccurate results.
packet-size Define the packet size, this includes the Ethernet header and the
FCS. The size can be a fixed value or a random value, chosen
between a minimum and a maximum value.
payload-pattern Define the pattern to fill the remaining spaces in the transmitted
packet. The pattern can be a 32-bit value, an incremental byte, an
incremental word or a random pattern from the list.
duration Duration of the flow can be specified in seconds, in bytes, in
packets or can be continuous until user interruption.
type Type of flow testing being done:
out-of-service:
two-way loopback using the full link bandwidth.
in-service:
one-way test for sharing a traffic regulator with client traffic.
Note that when the flow type is In-service, you must
select a Regulator.
regulator Regulator selected for in-service testing.

Revision 1 — August 2022 192


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.305 RFC-2544 Generator Show Configuration


rfc2544 generator show configuration - Show RFC-2544 generator
configuration
Description:
This command displays the RFC-2544 generator configuration. Specifying a packet or flow
name will display a detailed configuration for this packet or flow descriptor. Otherwise, the
command will display the generator summary configuration.
Syntax:
rfc2544 generator show configuration [<packet-name>] [<flow-name>]
Parameters:
<packet-name> packet[n] where "n" is included in <1-2>.
<flow-name> flow[n] where "n" is included in <1-2>.

4.306 RFC-2544 Generator Show Results


rfc2544 generator show results - Show RFC-2544 generator results
Description:
This command displays the RFC-2544 generator results. Specifying a flow name will display
detailed results for this flow. Otherwise, the command will display a summary of the
generator results.
Syntax:
rfc2544 generator show results [<flow-name>]
Parameters:
<flow-name> flow[n] where "n" is included in <1-2>.

4.307 RFC-2544 Generator Start


rfc2544 generator start - Start RFC-2544 generator
Description:
Start RFC-2544 generator.
Syntax:
rfc2544 generator start

Revision 1 — August 2022 193


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.308 RFC-2544 Generator Stop


rfc2544 generator stop - Stop RFC-2544 generator
Description:
Stop RFC-2544 generator.
Syntax:
rfc2544 generator stop

4.309 RFC-2544 Monitor Clear Statistics


rfc2544 monitor clear statistics - Clear RFC-2544 traffic monitor
statistics
Description:
Clear RFC-2544 monitor statistics.
Syntax:
rfc2544 monitor clear statistics <monitor-name>
Parameters:
<monitor-name> <string> Name of the monitor to clear. When no monitor name is
specified, the function will clear all RFC-2544 monitors.

4.310 RFC-2544 Monitor Edit


rfc2544 monitor edit - Change RFC-2544 traffic monitor configuration
Description:
rfc2544 monitor edit controls the traffic monitor behavior.
Syntax:
rfc2544 monitor edit <monitor-name> { {name <monitor-name>}
{description <monitor-desc>}
{port <port-name>} |
{packet <packet-params>} |
{mode {bypass | terminal} |
{state {enable | disable}}
}+
Parameters:
name <string> Unique name for this monitor.
description <string> Description identifying the monitor and its
characteristics.
port Name of the input port from which to monitor traffic.

Revision 1 — August 2022 194


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

packet Monitor packet header configuration (see below).


mode Operational mode of the monitor.
terminal: The RFC-2544 test will terminate at this unit.
bypass: The RFC-2544 test measurements will be taken
but the traffic will follow the rules configured in
the policies for this specific traffic type.
state Operational state of the monitor, enabled or disabled.
Packet syntax:
rfc2544 monitor edit <monitor-name> packet
{ {packet-type {layer-2 | layer-3 | l2-accedian |
l2-generic | l3-generic}} |
{ethertype <0-65535>} |
{dst-mac-addr <mac-addr>} |
{vlan1-header {enable | disable}} |
{vlan1-ethertype {0x8100 | 0x88a8 | 0x9100}} |
{vlan1-priority <0-7>} |
{vlan1-id <0-4095>} |
{vlan1-cfi <0-1>} |
{vlan2-header {enable | disable}} |
{vlan2-ethertype {0x8100 | 0x88a8 | 0x9100}} |
{vlan2-priority <0-7>} |
{vlan2-cfi <0-1>} |
{vlan2-id <0-4095>} |
{dscp <0-63>} |
{ecn <0-3>} |
{ttl <0-255>} |
{dst-ipv4-addr <ip-addr>} |
{destination-port <0-65535>} |
{src-ipv4-addr <ip-addr>} |
{source-port <0-65535>} |
{y1731-level <0-7>}}+
Packet parameters:
packet-type Used to define specific fields in the test packet.
ethertype The Ethernet type identifies the frame contents. This parameter
is deprecated and no longer needed. Its syntax still remains valid
for backward compatibility. Its value is set automatically based
on the value of packet-type. For example: 0x0800 for Layer-3,
0x8902 for Layer-2, 0x88FC for Layer-2 Accedian or Layer-2
generic.
dst-mac-addr This is the Ethernet MAC destination address.
vlan1-header Enable or disable VLAN 1 parameters in the frames.

Revision 1 — August 2022 195


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

vlan1-ethertype First VLAN protocol ID set to C-VLAN (0x8100) for 802.1Q


network, T-VLAN (0x9100) for 802.1Q tunneling network, or S-
VLAN (0x88A8) for 802.1AD network.
vlan1-cfi First VLAN CFI may be 0 or 1. It is usually set to 0.
vlan1-id First VLAN ID may be any value between 0 and 4095.
vlan1-priority First VLAN priority. The range is 0 to 7, with 7 being the highest
priority. Normal traffic has priority 0.
vlan2-header Enable or disable VLAN 2 parameters in the frames.
vlan2-ethertype Second VLAN protocol ID set to C-VLAN (0x8100) for 802.1Q
network, T-VLAN (0x9100) for 802.1Q tunneling network, or S-
VLAN (0x88A8) for 802.1AD network.
vlan2-cfi Second VLAN CFI may be 0 or 1. It is usually set to 0.
vlan2-id Second VLAN ID may be any value between 0 and 4095.
vlan2-priority Second VLAN priority. The range is 0 to 7, with 7 being the
highest priority. Normal traffic has priority 0.
dscp The Diff-Serv CodePoint value (0 - 63).
ecn The Explicit Congestion Notification value (0 - 3).
ttl This is the IPv4 time to live value (0 - 255).
dst-ipv4-addr The IPv4 destination address.
destination-port This is the destination port for UDP protocol (0 - 65535).
src-ipv4-addr The IPv4 source address.
source-port This is the source port for UDP or (0 - 65535).
y1731-level Y.1731 Maintenance Entity Group level (0-7).

4.311 RFC-2544 Monitor Show Configuration


rfc2544 monitor show configuration - Show RFC-2544 monitor configuration
Description:
This command displays the RFC-2544 monitor configuration. Specifying a monitor name
provides detailed configuration about this monitor descriptor. Otherwise, the command
provides the monitor configuration summary.
Syntax:
rfc2544 monitor show configuration [<monitor-name>]
Parameters:
<monitor-name> <string>

Revision 1 — August 2022 196


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.312 RFC-2544 Monitor Show Results


rfc2544 monitor show results - Show RFC-2544 monitor results
Description:
This command displays the RFC-2544 monitor results. Specifying a monitor name provides
detailed results from this monitor. Otherwise, the command provides the monitor results
summary.
Syntax:
rfc2544 monitor show results [<monitor-name>]
Parameters:
<monitor-name> <string>

4.313 RFC-2544 Test Suite Add


rfc2544 testsuite add - Create a RFC-2544 testsuite
Description:
rfc2544 testsuite add creates a new RFC-2544 testsuite instance.
Syntax:
rfc2544 testsuite add <testsuite-name>
{ {name <testsuite-name>}
{description <testsuite-desc>}
{port <port-name>} |
{jumbo <0-10240>} |
{binary-duration <decimal>} |
{strict-failure {enable | disable}} |
{verbose {enable | disable}} |
{exclude-vlan-size {yes | no}} |
{peer <packet-params> } |
{back2back {{duration <decimal>} |
{repeat <decimal>} |
{sizes {64bytes | 128bytes |
256bytes | 512bytes |
1024bytes | 1280 bytes|
1514bytes | jumbo}}
{state {enable | disable}} |
}
}
{delay {{duration <decimal>} |
{frameloss <decimal>} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 197


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{sizes {64bytes | 128bytes |


256bytes | 512bytes |
1024bytes | 1280 bytes |
1514bytes | jumbo}}
{state {enable | disable}} |
}
}
{throughput {{duration <decimal>} |
{frameloss <decimal>} |
{minimum <decimal>} |
{maximum <decimal>} |
{step <decimal>} |
{fine-stepping {enable |
disable}} |
{sizes {64bytes | 128bytes |
256bytes | 512bytes |
1024bytes | 1280 bytes |
1514bytes | jumbo}}
{state {enable | disable}} |
}
}
{frameloss {{duration <decimal>} |
{step <decimal>} |
{sizes {64bytes | 128bytes |
256bytes | 512bytes |
1024bytes | 1280 bytes |
1514bytes | jumbo}}
{state {enable | disable}} |
}
}
}+
Parameters:
name <string> Unique name for this testsuite.
description <string> Description identifying the testsuite and its
characteristics.
port Name of the port to which to send the flow(s).
jumbo Size of the jumbo frames <0-10240>.
binary-duration Duration of each trial during the binary search for the maximum
throughput. By default, this is set to 2 seconds. Binary duration
can vary from 1 to 10 seconds.
strict-failure Failure on Duplicate or Out-Of-Order.

Revision 1 — August 2022 198


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

verbose Display all attempts in report file.


exclude-vlan-size The frame length is increased by the size of the
VLAN tag header(s) being added to the frame.
peer Peer packet header configuration (see packet syntax and
parameters below).
back2back Back-to-back test settings.
duration: Duration of the test in milliseconds.
repeat: Number of bursts to perform for each packet size.
sizes: Frame sizes to use. Any combination is valid.
state: Enable or disable back2back test settings.
delay Delay and delay variation test settings.
duration: Duration of the test in seconds.
frameloss: Acceptable difference between measured frame
loss (0.1%).
sizes: Frame sizes to use. Any combination is valid.
state: Enable or disable delay test settings.
throughput Throughput test settings.
duration: Duration of the test in seconds.
step: Granularity of the min-max range.
fine-stepping: Enable fine stepping in case of low bandwidth
testing (below 12 Mbps).
minimum: Minimum rate in Mbps.
maximum: Maximum rate in Mbps.
frameloss: Acceptable difference between measured frame
loss (0.1%).
sizes: Frame sizes to use. Any combination is valid.
state: Enable or disable throughput test settings.
frameloss Frameloss test settings.
duration: Duration of the test in seconds.
step: Granularity of the min-max range.
sizes: Frame sizes to use. Any combination is valid.
state: Enable or disable frameloss test settings.
Packet syntax:
rfc2544 testsuite add <testsuite-name> peer
{ {packet-type {layer-2 | l2-accedian | l2-generic |
layer-3 | l3-generic}} |
{dst-mac-addr <mac-addr>} |
{ethertype <0-65535>} |
{vlan1-header {enable | disable}} |
{vlan1-ethertype {0x8100 | 0x88a8 | 0x9100}} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 199


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{vlan1-priority <0-7>} |
{vlan1-id <0-4095>} |
{vlan1-cfi <0-1>} |
{vlan2-header {enable | disable}} |
{vlan2-ethertype {0x8100 | 0x88a8 | 0x9100}} |
{vlan2-priority <0-7>} |
{vlan2-cfi <0-1>} |
{vlan2-id <0-4095>} |
{dscp <0-63>} |
{ecn <0-3>} |
{ttl <0-255>} |
{dst-ipv4-addr <ip-addr>} |
{src-ipv4-addr <ip-addr>} |
{destination-port <0-65535>} |
{source-port <0-65535>} |
{y1731-level <0-7>}}+
Packet parameters:
packet-type Used to define specific fields in the test packet.
dst-mac-addr This is the Ethernet MAC destination address.
ethertype The Ethernet type identifies the frame contents. This parameter
is deprecated and no longer needed. Its syntax still remains valid
for backward compatibility. Its value is set automatically based
on the value of packet-type. For example: 0x0800 for Layer-3,
0x8902 for Layer-2, 0x88FC for Layer-2 Accedian or Layer-2
generic.
vlan1-header Enable or disable VLAN 1 parameters in the frames.
vlan1-ethertype First VLAN protocol ID set to C-VLAN (0x8100) for 802.1Q
network, T-VLAN (0x9100) for 802.1Q tunneling network, or S-
VLAN (0x88A8) for 802.1AD network.
vlan1-cfi First VLAN CFI may be 0 or 1. It is usually set to 0.
vlan1-id First VLAN ID may be any value between 0 and 4095.
vlan1-priority First VLAN priority. The range is 0 to 7, with 7 being the highest
priority. Normal traffic has priority 0.
vlan2-header Enable or disable VLAN 2 parameters in the frames.
vlan2-ethertype* Second VLAN protocol ID set to C-VLAN (0x8100) for 802.1Q
network, T-VLAN (0x9100) for 802.1Q tunneling network, or S-
VLAN (0x88A8) for 802.1AD network
vlan2-cfi Second VLAN CFI may be 0 or 1. It is usually set to 0.
vlan2-id Second VLAN ID may be any value between 0 and 4095.
vlan2-priority Second VLAN priority. The range is 0 to 7, with 7 being the
highest priority. Normal traffic has priority 0.
dscp The Diff-Serv CodePoint value (0 - 63).

Revision 1 — August 2022 200


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

ecn The Explicit Congestion Notification value (0 - 3).


ttl This is the IPv4 time to live value (0 - 255).
dst-ipv4-addr The IPv4 destination address.
src-ipv4-addr The IPv4 source address (valid only for l3-generic).
destination-port This is the destination port for UDP protocol (0 - 65535).
source-port This is the source port for UDP protocol (0 - 65535).
y1731-level Y.1731 Maintenance Entity Group level (0-7).

4.314 RFC-2544 Test Suite Delete


rfc2544 testsuite delete - Delete a RFC-2544 testsuite or report
Description:
This command deletes an existing RFC-2544 testsuite instance or an existing RFC-2544
testsuite report.
Syntax:
rfc2544 testsuite delete { {<testsuite-name>} |
reports {<report-name>}}+
Parameters:
testsuite-name <string> Unique name for this testsuite.
report-name <string> Unique name for this report.

4.315 RFC-2544 Test Suite Edit


rfc2544 testsuite edit - Change a RFC-2544 testsuite
Description:
rfc2544 testsuite edit changes the configuration of an existing RFC-2544 testsuite instance.
Syntax:
rfc2544 testsuite edit <testsuite-name>
{ {name <testsuite-name>}
{description <testsuite-desc>}
{port <port-name>} |
{jumbo <0-10240>} |
{binary-duration <decimal>} |
{strict-failure {enable | disable}} |
{verbose {enable | disable}} |
{exclude-vlan-size {yes | no}} |
{peer <packet-params> } |
{back2back {{duration <decimal>} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 201


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{repeat <decimal>} |
{sizes {64bytes | 128bytes |
256bytes | 512bytes |
1024bytes | 1280 bytes |
1514bytes | jumbo}}
{state {enable | disable}} |
}
}
{delay {{duration <decimal>} |
{frameloss <decimal>} |
{sizes {64bytes | 128bytes |
256bytes | 512bytes |
1024bytes | 1280 bytes |
1514bytes | jumbo}}
{state {enable | disable}} |
}
}
{throughput {{duration <decimal>} |
{frameloss <decimal>} |
{minimum <decimal>} |
{maximum <decimal>} |
{step <decimal>} |
{fine-stepping {enable | disable}} |
{sizes {64bytes | 128bytes |
256bytes | 512bytes |
1024bytes | 1280 bytes |
1514bytes | jumbo}}
{state {enable | disable}} |
}
}
{frameloss {{duration <decimal>} |
{step <decimal>} |
{sizes {64bytes | 128bytes |
256bytes | 512bytes |
1024bytes | 1280 bytes |
1514bytes | jumbo}}
{state {enable | disable}} |
}
}
}+

Revision 1 — August 2022 202


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
name <string> Unique name for this testsuite.
description <string> Description identifying the testsuite and its
characteristics.
port Name of the port to which to send the flow(s).
jumbo Size of the jumbo frames <0-10240>.
binary-duration Duration of each trial during the binary search for the maximum
throughput. By default, this is set to 2 seconds. Binary duration
can vary from 1 to 10 seconds.
strict-failure Failure on Duplicate or Out-Of-Order.
verbose Display all attempts in report file.
exclude-vlan-size The frame length is increased by the size of the
VLAN tag header(s) being added to the frame.
peer Peer packet header configuration (see packet syntax and
parameters below).
back2back Back-to-back test settings.
duration: Duration of the test in milliseconds.
repeat: Number of bursts to perform for each packet size.
sizes: Frame sizes to use. Any combination is valid.
state: Enable or disable back2back test settings.
delay Delay and delay variation test settings.
duration: Duration of the test in seconds.
frameloss: Acceptable difference between measured frame
loss (0.1%).
sizes: Frame sizes to use. Any combination is valid.
state: Enable or disable delay test settings.
throughput Throughput test settings.
duration: Duration of the test in seconds.
step: Granularity of the min-max range.
fine-stepping: Enable fine stepping in case of low bandwidth
testing (below 12 Mbps).
minimum: Minimum rate in Mbps.
maximum: Maximum rate in Mbps.
frameloss: Acceptable difference between measured frame
loss (0.1%).
sizes: Frame sizes to use. Any combination is valid.
state: Enable or disable throughput test settings.
frameloss Frameloss test settings.
duration: Duration of the test in seconds.
step: Granularity of the min-max range.

Revision 1 — August 2022 203


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

sizes: Frame sizes to use. Any combination is valid.


state: Enable or disable frameloss test settings.
Packet syntax:
rfc2544 testsuite edit <testsuite-name> peer
{ {packet-type {layer-2 | l2-accedian | l2-generic |
layer-3 | l3-generic}} |
{dst-mac-addr <mac-addr>} |
{ethertype <0-65535>} |
{vlan1-header {enable | disable}} |
{vlan1-ethertype <0-65535>} |
{vlan1-priority <0-7>} |
{vlan1-id <0-4095>} |
{vlan1-cfi <0-1>} |
{vlan2-header {enable | disable}} |
{vlan2-ethertype <0-65535>} |
{vlan2-priority <0-7>} |
{vlan2-cfi <0-1>} |
{vlan2-id <0-4095>} |
{dscp <0-63>} |
{ecn <0-3>} |
{ttl <0-255>} |
{dst-ipv4-addr <ip-addr>} |
{src-ipv4-addr <ip-addr>} |
{destination-port <0-65535>} |
{source-port <0-65535>} |
{y1731-level <0-7>}}+
Packet parameters:
packet-type Used to define specific fields in the test packet.
dst-mac-addr This is the Ethernet MAC destination address.
ethertype The Ethernet type identifies the frame contents. This parameter
is deprecated and no longer needed. Its syntax still remains valid
for backward compatibility. Its value is set automatically based
on the value of packet-type. For example: 0x0800 for Layer-3,
0x8902 for Layer-2, 0x88FC for Layer-2 Accedian or Layer-2
generic.
vlan1-header Enable or disable VLAN 1 parameters in the frames.
vlan1-ethertype First VLAN protocol ID set to C-VLAN (0x8100) for 802.1Q
network, T-VLAN (0x9100) for 802.1Q tunneling network, or S-
VLAN (0x88A8) for 802.1AD network.
vlan1-cfi First VLAN CFI may be 0 or 1. It is usually set to 0.
vlan1-id First VLAN ID may be any value between 0 and 4095.

Revision 1 — August 2022 204


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

vlan1-priority First VLAN priority. The range is 0 to 7, with 7 being the highest
priority. Normal traffic has priority 0.
vlan2-header Enable or disable VLAN 2 parameters in the frames.
vlan2-ethertype Second VLAN protocol ID set to C-VLAN (0x8100) for 802.1Q
network, T-VLAN (0x9100) for 802.1Q tunneling network, or S-
VLAN (0x88A8) for 802.1AD network.
vlan2-cfi Second VLAN CFI may be 0 or 1. It is usually set to 0.
vlan2-id Second VLAN ID may be any value between 0 and 4095.
vlan2-priority Second VLAN priority. The range is 0 to 7, with 7 being the
highest priority. Normal traffic has priority 0.
dscp The Diff-Serv CodePoint value (0 - 63).
ecn The Explicit Congestion Notification value (0 - 3).
ttl This is the IPv4 time to live value (0 - 255).
dst-ipv4-addr The IPv4 destination address.
src-ipv4-addr The IPv4 source address (valid only for l3-generic).
destination-port This is the destination port for UDP protocol (0 - 65535).
source-port This is the source port for UDP protocol (0 - 65535).
y1731-level Y.1731 Maintenance Entity Group level (0-7).

4.316 RFC-2544 Test Suite Show Configuration


rfc2544 testsuite show configuration - Show RFC-2544 testsuite
configuration
Description:
This command displays the RFC-2544 testsuite configuration. Specifying a testsuite name
displays the detailed configuration for this testsuite. Otherwise, the command provides a
summary of the configured testsuites.
Syntax:
rfc2544 testsuite show configuration [<testsuite-name>]
Parameters:
<testsuite-name> <string> Name of the specific testsuite for which to display the
configuration.

4.317 RFC-2544 Test Suite Show Reports


rfc2544 testsuite show reports - Show RFC-2544 testsuite reports
Description:
This command displays the RFC-2544 testsuite reports. Specifying a report name displays the
complete report on the screen. Otherwise, the command provides a summary of the
configured reports.

Revision 1 — August 2022 205


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

The displayed status for each report can be one of the following:
Failed: An error occurred during the testsuite execution.
Running: The testsuite is currently running.
Stopped: A user stopped the testsuite during its execution.
Completed: The testsuite has completed.
Syntax:
rfc2544 testsuite show reports [<filename>]
Parameters:
<filename> <string> Unique filename associated with the report.

4.318 RFC-2544 Test Suite Start


rfc2544 testsuite start - Starts a RFC-2544 testsuite and produces a report
Description:
This command starts the specified and creates a new report.
Syntax:
rfc2544 testsuite start filename <filename> suite <testsuite-name>
{ {description <report-desc>} |
{technician <report-tech>} |
{note <report-note>} }+
Parameters:
filename <string> Unique filename for the report.
suite <string> Name for the testsuite to run.
description <string> Description for this report.
technician <string> Name of the technician running this testsuite.
note <string> Note associated to this testsuite. This note will be
included in the report.

4.319 RFC-2544 Test Suite Stop


rfc2544 testsuite stop - Stops a running RFC-2544 testsuite
Description:
This command stops the execution of a running RFC-2544 testsuite.
Syntax:
rfc2544 testsuite stop <filename>

Revision 1 — August 2022 206


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
filename <string> Unique filename associated with the testsuite.

4.320 RFC-2544 Test Suite Upload


rfc2544 testsuite upload - Uploads a RFC-2544 report file
Description:
This command is used to upload an RFC-2544 report file to a remote location.
Syntax:
rfc2544 testsuite upload <filename> <url>
Parameters:
filename <string> Unique filename associated with the testsuite.
url URL to reach the server and directory, e.g.:
ftp://username:password@mypc.com
ftps://username:password@192.168.10.10
sftp://username:password@192.168.10.10
tftp://192.168.1.5
scp://username:password@192.168.10.10:/target_directory
The filename of the report will be automatically appended to the specified URL.

4.321 Route Add/Edit and Route IPv6 Add/Edit


route add - Add a new IPv4 route
route edit - Edit an existing IPv4 route
route ipv6_add - Add a new IPv6 route
route ipv6_edit - Edit an existing IPv6 route
Description:
The route add/edit or ipv6_add/ipv6_edit command lets you add or modify the IPv4 or IPv6
system routing table.
Syntax:
route {add|edit} <route-name> { {type {host | net}} |
{destination <ip-addr>} |
{netmask <ip-addr>} |
{gateway <ip-addr>} |
{interface <interface-name>} }+

route {ipv6_add|ipv6_edit} <route-name> {

Revision 1 — August 2022 207


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{destination <ipv6-addr>/<ipv6-
prefixLen>} |
{gateway <ipv6-addr>} |
{interface <interface-name>} }+
Parameters:
<route-name> <string> The name of the route. It can be a brief description of
the route, e.g. "Default".
<interface-name> <string> The interface with which the route is associated. This is
only for specific situations when a target exists on a different
network for that interface. In most situations, the interface is
determined automatically.
type Route type may either be Network for a range of addresses or
Host for a specific IP address.
destination Network or host address of the route. Use 0.0.0.0 (for IPv4) or
::/0 (for IPv6) to denote the default route.
netmask Mask assigned to the route. Only used for network routes.
gateway Gateway address associated with this route or default gateway
address.
interface The interface with which the route is associated. This is only for
specific situations when a target exists on a different network for
that interface. In most situations, the interface is determined
automatically.

4.322 Route Delete and Route IPv6 Delete


route delete - Delete an existing IPv4 route
route ipv6_delete - Delete an existing IPv6 route
Description:
The route delete or ipv6_delete commands let you delete configured IPv4 or IPv6 routes in
the system.
Syntax:
route {delete|ipv6_delete} <route-name>
Parameters:
<route-name> <string>

Revision 1 — August 2022 208


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.323 Route Show


route show configuration - Display statically configured IPv4 routes
route show active - Display active IPv4 routes
route ipv6_show configuration - Display statically configured IPv6 routes
route ipv6_show active - Display active IPv6 routes
Description:
The route show or route ipv6_show commands let you show active and configured IPv4 or
IPv6 routes in the system.
Syntax:
route {show|ipv6_show} active
route {show|ipv6_show} [configuration [<route-name>]]
Parameters:
<route-name> <string>

4.324 SA Add Metric


sa add metric - Add a performance metric to an Service Availability
instance
Description:
Add a performance metric to Service Availability instance.
Syntax:
sa add metric <sa-name> <metric-name> {
{paa-plr <paa-id>} |
{paa-ow-delay <paa-id>} |
{paa-ow-dv <paa-id>} |
{paa-tw-delay <paa-id>} |
{paa-tw-dv <paa-id>} |
{cfm-plr <pl-id>} |
{dmm-ow-delay <dmm-id>} |
{dmm-ow-dv <dmm-id>} |
{dmm-tw-delay <dmm-id>} |
{dmm-tw-dv <dmm-id>} |
{slm-near-end-plr <slm-id>} |
{slm-far-end-plr <slm-id>} |
{threshold <decimal>} }+

<dmm-id> = <decimal> | <string>


<paa-id> = <decimal> | <string>

Revision 1 — August 2022 209


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

<pl-id> = <decimal> | <string>


<slm-id> = <decimal> | <string>
<metric-name> = <string>
<sa-name> = <string>
Parameters:
<sa-name> The name of a service availability instance.
<metric-name> A unique name to identify a metric instance inside a service
availability instance.
<paa-id> The identifier of a PAA instance. Instance number or instance
name.
<pl-id> CFM packet loss instance identifier. Instance number or instance
name.
<dmm-id> CFM DMM instance identifier. Instance number or instance name.
<threshold> The threshold used to determine if the metric performs correctly.
paa-plr The performance metric is packet loss from a PAA instance.
paa-ow-delay The performance metric is one way delay from a PAA instance.
paa-ow-dv The performance metric is one way delay variation from a PAA
instance.
paa-tw-delay The performance metric is two way delay from a PAA instance.
paa-tw-dv The performance metric is two way delay variation from a PAA
instance.
cfm-plr The performance metric is a CFM packet loss instance.
dmm-ow-delay The performance metric is one way delay from a DMM instance.
dmm-ow-dv The performance metric is one way delay variation from a PAA
instance.
dmm-tw-delay The performance metric is two way delay from a DMM instance.
dmm-tw-dv The performance metric is two way delay variation from a PAA
instance.
slm-near-end-plr The performance metric is near end SLM packet loss.
slm-far-end-plr The performance metric is far end SLM packet loss.

4.325 SA Add Service


sa add service - Creates a Service Availability instance
Description:
Creates a Service Availability instance.
Syntax:
sa add service <sa-name> {
{window-size <decimal>} |
{reporting-period <decimal>} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 210


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{hli-window-size <decimal>} |
{time-interval <decimal>}}+
Parameters:
<sa-name> A unique name to identify a service availability instance.
window-size The number of consecutive Time Intervals used to assess Service
Availability for this instance. Default value is 10.
reporting-period A reporting period over which periodic availability counters are
evaluated in addition to the monotonic counters.
time-interval The interval of time during which the metric is evaluated. Default
value is 1 second. Allowed values are 1, 5, 10, 20, or 60 seconds.
hli-window-size The number of consecutive Time Intervals used to assess
Consecutive High Loss Intervals for this instance. Default value is
3.

4.326 SA Clear Service Counters


sa clear service counters - Clear service availability counters
Description:
Clear service availability counters.
Syntax:
sa clear service counters [name <sa-name>] [type {periodic|monotonic|all}]

<sa-name> = <string>
Parameters:
name The name of a service availability instance. If omitted, clears all
instances of the selected counters.
type The type of counter to clear:
periodic : Clear periodic counters. Default.
monotonic: Clear monotonic counters.
all: Clear all counters.

4.327 SA Delete Metric


sa delete metric - Remove a performance metric from a Service Availability
instance
Description:
Remove a performance metric from a Service Availability instance.
Syntax:
sa delete metric <sa-name> <metric-name>

Revision 1 — August 2022 211


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

<sa-name> = <string>
<metric-name> = <string>
Parameters:
<sa-name> The name of a service availability instance.
<metric-name> The name of the metric to remove.

4.328 SA Delete Service


sa delete service - Delete a Service Availability instance
Description:
Delete a Service Availability instance.
Syntax:
sa delete service <sa-name>

<sa-name> = <string>
Parameters:
<sa-name> A unique name identifying a service availability instance.

4.329 SA Edit Metric


sa edit metric - Modify a performance metric on a Service Availability
instance
Description:
Modify a performance metric on a Service Availability instance.
Syntax:
sa edit metric <sa-name> <metric-name> {
name <metric-name> threshold {<plr-thld> | <delay-thld>}}

<sa-name> = <string>
<metric-name> = <string>
<delay-thrld> = <decimal>
<plr-thld> = <decimal>
Parameters:
<sa-name> The name of a service availability instance.
<metric-name> The name of metric instance inside the service availability
instance.
name The new name to assign to the metric instance

Revision 1 — August 2022 212


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

threshold A packet loss ratio threshold or a delay threshold depending on


metric type.

4.330 SA Edit Service


sa edit service - Modify a Service Availability instance
Description
Use this command to edit an existing Service Availability (SA) instance. SA is used to calculate
the number of seconds for which a specific service is unavailable. Each SA instance is
configured with one or more SA metrics such as CFM frame loss that are used to determine
the unavailable seconds.
Syntax
sa edit service <sa-name> {{name <string>} |
{window-size <decimal>} |
{time-interval <decimal>} |
{hli-window-size <decimal>} |
{reporting-period <decimal>} |
{state <is | oos>} |
{client-port-cutoff-state <enable | disable>} |
{client-port <port-name>} |
{client-port-cutoff-delay <decimal>} |
{client-port-restore-delay <decimal>}}+

<sa-name> = <string>
<port-name> = <string>
Parameters
<sa-name> The name of the SA instance.
name A new name to assign to the service instance.
window-size The number of consecutive seconds over which
to assess availability. Default is 10.
time-interval The interval of time during which the metric is
evaluated. Default value is 1 second. Allowed
values are 1, 5, 10, 20 or 60 seconds.
hli-window-size The number of consecutive time intervals used
to assess Consecutive High Loss Intervals for this
instance. Default value is 3.
reporting-period A reporting period over which availability
counters are evaluated in addition to the
monotonic counters. Default value is 15 minutes.
state The instance state:is (In Service): Availability
must be assessed.

Revision 1 — August 2022 213


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

oos (Out of Service):


Availability assessment is suspended. This is the
default state.
client-port-cutoff-state Specifies whether or not the Client Port Cut-Off
feature is enabled. When the functionality of the
client-port-cut-off-state is enabled, it monitors
SA availability. If the SA no longer meets any of
its configured parameters, it sends a trigger to
suspend traffic on the port specified by the
client-port. Default value is disabled.
client-port Specifies the name of the traffic port whose
operations will be suspended when the SA
instance is not meeting the threshold of one or
more of its service metrics. Default value is the
first traffic port, such as PORT-1.
client-port-cutoff-delay The amount of time to wait after experiencing a
network link degradation, before disabling the
port. The default value of 0 means that the port
will be turned off immediately when the criteria
is detected. Range is 0 to 120 seconds.
client-port-restore-delay The amount of time to wait after the network
link recovers from a degradation, before enabling
the port. A value of 0 means that the port will be
turned on immediately when the criteria is
detected. Range is 0 to 300 seconds, with a
default value of 120.

4.331 SA Show Metric Configuration


sa show metric configuration - Display detailed performance metric
configuration
Description:
Display detailed performance metric configuration.
Syntax:
sa show metric configuration <sa-name> <metric-name>

<metric-name> = <string>
<sa-name> = <string>
Parameters:
<sa-name> The name of a service availability instance.
<metric-name> The name of the metric to display.

Revision 1 — August 2022 214


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.332 SA Show Metric Counters


sa show metric counters - Display metric counters for a service
availability instance
Description:
Display metric counters for a service availability instance. When a metric instance name is
specified, detailed availability counters are displayed for the specified instance. Otherwise, a
summary of all metric counters for the service instance are displayed.
Syntax:
sa show metric counters <sa-name> [<metric-name>] [type historic
{buckets | period } value]

<sa-name> = The name of a service availability instance.


Parameters:
<metric-name> An optional metric instance name to display.
type historic The type of history statistics to retrieve. Options are buckets or
periods.
value the period index or the number of buckets to display.

4.333 SA Show Service Configuration


sa show service configuration - Display service availability configuration
Description:
Display service availability configuration. When an instance name specified, a detailed
configuration report is displayed for the specified instance. Otherwise, a configuration
summary for all instances is displayed.
Syntax:
sa show service configuration [<sa-name>]

<sa-name> = <string>
Parameters:
<sa-name> Optional service instance name to display.

4.334 SA Show Service Counters


sa show service counters - Display service availability counters
Description:
Display service availability counters. When an instance name is specified, detailed availability
counters are displayed for the specified instance. Otherwise, a summary of all availability

Revision 1 — August 2022 215


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

counters for all instances are displayed. Additionally, if the history feature is enabled, history
information may be displayed by specifying the type.
Syntax:
sa show service counters [<sa-name>] [type historic {buckets | period }
value]

<sa-name> = <string>
Parameters:
<sa-name> An optional instance name to display.
type historic The type of history statistics to retrieve. Options are buckets or
periods.
value the period index or the number of buckets to display.

4.335 SAT Protocol Clear Statistics


sat-protocol clear statistics - Clear SAT protocol statistics
Description:
This command is used to clear all the SAT protocol server statistics.
Syntax:
sat-protocol clear statistics

4.336 SAT Protocol Edit


sat-protocol edit - Change SAT protocol configuration
Description:
This command is used to modify the SAT protocol configuration parameters.
Syntax:
sat-protocol edit {
{state {enable | disable}} |
{sat-udp-port <1025-32767>} |
{ow-udp-port <1025-32767>}}+
Parameters:
state Enable the SAT protocol on this unit.
sat-udp-port This is the UDP port used for this protocol (1025-32767).
ow-udp-port This is the One-way traffic UDP port (1025-32767).

Revision 1 — August 2022 216


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.337 SAT Protocol Show Configuration


sat-protocol show configuration - Show SAT protocol configuration
Description:
This command displays the protocol configuration.
Syntax:
sat-protocol show configuration

4.338 SAT Protocol Show Sessions


sat-protocol show sessions - Show SAT protocol current server sessions
Description:
This command displays the protocol current server sessions.
Syntax:
sat-protocol show sessions

4.339 SAT Protocol Show Statistics


sat-protocol show statistics - Show SAT protocol server statistics
Description:
This command displays the SAT protocol server statistics.
Syntax:
sat-protocol show statistics

4.340 SAT Reporting Edit


sat-reporting edit - Change SAT reporting configuration
Description:
This command allows to change the parameters of the SAT reporting feature.
Syntax:
sat-reporting edit {
{rfc2544-reporting {disable | enable}} |
{rfc2544-txt-transfer {disable | enable}} |
{rfc2544-xml-transfer {disable | enable}} |
{y1564-reporting {disable | enable}} |
{y1564-txt-transfer {disable | enable}} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 217


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{y1564-xml-transfer {disable | enable}} |


{url <url>} |
{scp-password <password>}}+
Parameters:
rfc2544-reporting Enable transfer of RFC-2544 report.
rfc2544-txt-transfer Send RFC-2544 text file to the server.
rfc2544-xml-transfer Send RFC-2544 XML file to the server.

y1564-reporting Enable transfer of Y.1564 report.


y1564-txt-transfer Send Y.1564 text file to the server.
y1564-xml-transfer Send Y.1564 XML file to the server.

url URL to reach the server and directory e.g.


ftp://username:password@mypc.com
sftp://username@mypc.com
tftp://mypc.com
scp://username@mypc.com:/target_directory

scp-password Password used for SCP and SFTP transfers.

4.341 SAT Reporting Show Configuration


sat-reporting show configuration - Show SAT reporting configuration
Description:
The command displays the SAT reporting configuration.
Syntax:
sat-reporting show configuration

4.342 Session Edit


session edit - Allows you to edit the session configuration
Description
session edit allows you to change the maximum number of sessions allowed at one time as
well as the timeout values for idle sessions.
Syntax
session edit {
{auth-order {local | radius | local-radius |
radius-local | strict-radius-local |

Revision 1 — August 2022 218


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

tacacs+ | local-tacacs+ |
tacacs+-local | strict-tacacs+-local}} |
{maxsessions <decimal>} |
{maxclisessions <decimal>} |
{maxwebsessions <decimal>} |
{maxnetconfsessions <decimal>} |
{timeoutcli <0-1800>} |
{timeoutweb <0-1800>} |
{timeoutnetconf <0-1800>} |
{telnet-server {enable | disable}} |
{file-transfer-timeout <decimal>}}+
Parameters
auth-order Authentication client to use in order of availability.
maxsessions Total number of CLI and WEB sessions that are supported at the
same time.
maxclisessions Maximum number of WEB sessions that are supported at the
same time.
maxwebsessions Maximum number of WEB sessions that are supported at the
same time.
maxnetconfsessions Maximum number of NETCONF sessions that are supported at
the same time.
timeoutcli Maximum number of seconds that a CLI session can remain idle
before it is automatically logged out. (0 means use maximum
timeout).
timeoutweb Maximum number of seconds that a WEB session can remain idle
before it is automatically logged out. (0 means use maximum
timeout).
timeoutnetconf Maximum number of seconds that a NETCONF session can
remain idle before it is automatically logged out. (0 means use
maximum timeout).
telnet-server Enable or disable the telnet server on the unit.
file-transfer-timeout Maximum number of seconds that a file Transfer
session can remain idle before it automatically
close the connection.
(min. 900sec and max. 3600sec)
notices Enable or disable notices.

Revision 1 — August 2022 219


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.343 Session Show Configuration


session show configuration - Show the session configuration parameters
Description:
session show configuration will show the maximum number of sessions allowed at a time as
well as the timeout values for idle sessions.
Syntax:
session show configuration

4.344 Session Show Status


session show status - Show logged users information
Description:
session show status will show the status and information about all logged in users.
Syntax:
session show status

4.345 Session Terminate


session terminate - Terminate the specified session
Description:
session terminate will terminate the specified GUI or CLI session. The session identifier is listed
in session show status.
Syntax:
session terminate {<session-id>}
Parameters:
<session-id> <decimal>

4.346 SFP Dump


sfp dump - Dump SFP memory
Description:
sfp dump prints SFP memory contents.
Syntax:
sfp dump {<connector-name> | <port-name>}

Revision 1 — August 2022 220


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.347 SFP Edit


sfp edit - Edit SFP configuration
Description
Used to edit the SFP identified by connector-name or port-name and change its configuration
according to the parameters provided.
Syntax
sfp edit {<port-name>|<connector-name>} {speed {Auto|100M|1G|10G}}+

4.348 SFP Show


sfp show - Show SFP information
Description:
sfp show prints SFP thresholds and status, as well as vendor information.
Syntax:
sfp show [<connector-name> | <port-name>]

4.349 SFP Show Configuration


sfp show configuration - Show SFP configuration
Description:
Used to display the SFP configuration. When the port or connector name identifier is omitted,
a summary table for all ports is printed. When a port or connector name is specified then the
detailed SFP configuration is displayed.
Syntax:
sfp show configuration [<port-name> | <connector-name>]

4.350 SFP Show Status


sfp show status - Show SFP status
Description:
Used to display the SFP status. When the port or connector name identifier is omitted, a
summary table for all ports is printed. When a port or connector name is specified then the
detailed SFP status is displayed.
Syntax:
sfp show status [<connector-name> | <port-name>]

Revision 1 — August 2022 221


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

NOTE : A speed marked with a * in the output identifies the overridden speed as
oppose to the detected speed.

4.351 Shaping Clear Queue Statistics


shaping clear queue statistics - Clear the queue statistics
Description:
Clear the queue statistics. If no parameters are passed, all queue statistics will be cleared. If
port is specified, only the queue statistics associated to this port will be cleared.
Syntax:
shaping clear queue statistics {
{name <queue name>} |
{port <port-name>}}+
Parameters:
name Queue name for which statistics will be cleared
port Port name for which all queues statistics will be cleared.

4.352 Shaping Edit Port Shaper


shaping edit port-shaper - Edit the configuration of a port shaper
Description:
Allow a user to modify the configuration of a Port Shaper.
Syntax:
shaping edit port-shaper <port name> {
{cbs <1-2047>} if cir <= 500000 |
{cbs <2-2047>} if cir > 500000 |
{cir <0-1000000>} |
{cpu-cir-state <enable | disable>} |
{state <enable | disable>}}+
Parameters:
cbs Commited Burst Size. (in steps of 1KiB (1024 bytes))
cir Commited Information Rate. (in steps of 125Kbps)
cpu-cir-state CPU traffic is debited from the CIR.

NOTE : CPU traffic is never shaped by the shaper

state Enable/Disable Port Shaper

Revision 1 — August 2022 222


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.353 Shaping Edit Queue


shaping edit queue - Edit queue configuration
Description:
Allow a user to modify the Queue configuration parameters.
Syntax:
shaping edit queue <queue name> {
{blue-state <enable | disable>} |
{blue-decrement <0-25>} |
{blue-freeze-time <0-655350>} |
{blue-increment <0-25>} |
{blue-max-level <5-98>} |
{blue-min-level <5-98>} |
{color <green | yellow>} |
{max-queue-size <16-2044>} |
{name <new name>} |
priority <0-7>} |
{yellow-threshold <16-Maximum Queue Size>}}+
Parameters:
blue-state Enable the Blue algorithm for this queue.
blue-decrement Blue drop probability decrement (steps of 1%)
blue-freeze-time Blue minimum interval time, in us, between two successive
updates of the marking probability. (steps of 10us)
blue-increment Blue drop probability increment (steps of 1%)
blue-max-level Blue level for which drop probability increase (% of queue length)
blue-min-level Blue level for which drop probability decrease (% of queue
length)
color Frame color when shaping is disabled.
max-queue-size Threshold from which tail drop begin on green frame (steps of
1KiB (1024 bytes)). User Assignable queue range: 16-2044
name Queue name
priority Queue priority, used for round-robin purpose.
yellow-threshold Threshold from which tail drop begin on yellow frame (steps of
1KiB (1024 bytes)) Range: 16-Maximum Queue Size.

Revision 1 — August 2022 223


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.354 Shaping Show Port Shaper Configuration


shaping show port-shaper configuration - Show configuration for a port-
shaper
Description:
Without arguments, this command displays the port shaper summary in a table format. When
specifying a port shaper name, this command displays detailed configuration for that port
shaper. The paging option allow to display result in page style.
Syntax:
shaping show port-shaper configuration {
{paging} |
{port <port-name>}}+
Parameters:
paging enable the paging option
port name of the port

4.355 Shaping Show Queue Configuration


shaping show queue configuration - Show queue configuration
Description:
Without arguments or with the port argument, this command displays the queue
configuration summary in a table format. When specifying a queue name, this command
displays detailed configuration for that queue. The paging option allow to display result in
page style.
Syntax:
shaping show queue configuration {
{name <queue name>} |
{paging} |
{port <port-name>}}+
Parameters:
name name of the queue
paging enable the paging option
port name of the port

Revision 1 — August 2022 224


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.356 Shaping Show Queue Statistics


shaping show queue statistics - Show queue statistics
Description:
Without arguments or with the port argument, this command displays the queue statistics
summary in a table format. When specifying a queue name, this command displays detailed
statistics for that queue. The paging option allow to display result in page style.
Syntax:
shaping show queue statistics {
{name <queue name>} |
{paging} |
{port <port-name>}}+
Parameters:
name name of the queue
paging enable the paging option
port name of the port

4.357 Shaping Show Queuing Profile Configuration


shaping show queuing-profile configuration - Show configuration of a
queuing-profile
Description:
Without arguments or with the port argument, this command displays the queuing-profile
configuration summary in a table format. When specifying a queuing profile name, this
command displays detailed configuration for that queuing profile. The paging option allow to
display result in page style.
Syntax:
shaping show queuing-profile configuration {
{name <queuing profile name>} |
{paging} |
{port <port-name>}}+
Parameters:
name name of the queuing profile
paging enable the paging option
port name of the port

Revision 1 — August 2022 225


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.358 SNMP Edit


snmp edit - Edit SNMP agent configuration
Description:
snmp edit allows you to change the SNMP agent configuration.
Syntax:
snmp edit {
{state {disable | enable}} |
{use-host-name {enable | disable} |
{agent-port <1-65535>} |
{contact-info <string>} |
{ro-community <string>} |
{rw-community <string> } |
{system-location <string>} |
{system-name <string>} |
{authentication-trap {enable | disable}} |
{link-trap {enable | disable}}+
Parameters:
state Enable or disable the SNMP agent.
use-host-name Use the configured host name as system-name.
agent-port Makes the agent listen on the specified UDP port on all
interfaces.

NOTE : Changing this value restarts the SNMP agent.

contact-info The textual identification of the contact person for this managed
node, together with information on how to contact this person
(see RFC-1213 for more details).
ro-community Community string used for Read-Only operations.
rw-community Community string used for Read-Write operations.
system-location The physical location of this node. For instance, it can be the
address of the building and the floor number (see RFC-1213 for
more details).
system-name An administratively-assigned name for this managed node. By
convention, this is the node's fully-qualified domain name (see
RFC-1213 for more details).
authentication-trap Enable this option to have a trap generated when authentication
to the agent fails. Map to the generic trap 4(1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5).
link-trap Enable this option to have a trap generated when link status
changes. Maps to generic traps 2(1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3 linkDown) and
3(1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4 linkUp).

Revision 1 — August 2022 226


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.359 SNMP Show


snmp show - Show snmp configuration
Description:
snmp show displays the SNMP configuration
Syntax:
snmp show

4.360 SNMP Trap Edit Auto


snmp-trap edit auto - Edit automatic SNMP trap handler configuration
Description:
This command allows you to change the automatic SNMP trap handler configuration.
Syntax:
snmp-trap edit auto {
{host-state {enable | disable}} |
{host-community <string>} |
{host-port <1-65535>}
{trap-version {v1 | v2c}}
{host-name-refresh}
}+
Parameters:
host-state Enable/Disable the sending of SNMP traps to the configured
host.
host-community Community string used to send SNMP traps to configured host.
host-port This command defines the UDP port to use when sending SNMP
traps (the well-known SNMP trap port 162 is used by default).
trap-version Set the version (v1 or v2c) of the configured host SNMP traps.
host-name-refresh Refresh of the configured host name for SNMP traps.

4.361 SNMP Trap Edit V1


snmp-trap edit v1 - Edit SNMP v1 trap handler configuration
Description:
This command allows you to change the SNMP v1 trap handler configuration.
Syntax:
snmp-trap edit v1 <host-id> {
{host-state {enable | disable}} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 227


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{host-community <string>} |
{host-name <string>} |
{host-port <1-65535>}}+
Parameters:
host-state Enable/Disable the sending of traps to the configured host.
host-community Community string used to send SNMP traps to configured host.
host-name This command defines the host name or IP address of the server
to which the traps (and/or inform notifications) are sent. The unit
sends a Cold Start trap when it starts and upon authentication
failure.
host-port This command defines the UDP port to use when sending traps
(the well-known SNMP trap port 162 is used by default).

4.362 SNMP Trap Edit V2c


snmp-trap edit v2c - Edit SNMP v2c trap handler configuration
Description:
This command allows you to change the SNMP v2c trap handler configuration.
Syntax:
snmp-trap edit v2c <host-id> {
{host-state {enable | disable}} |
{host-community <string>} |
{host-name <string>} |
{host-port <1-65535>}}+
Parameters:
host-state Enable/Disable the sending of traps to the configured host.
host-community Community string used to send SNMP traps to configured host.
host-name This command defines the host name or IP address of the server
to which the traps (and/or inform notifications) are sent. The unit
sends a Cold Start trap when it starts and upon authentication
failure.
host-port This command defines the UDP port to use when sending traps
(the well-known SNMP trap port 162 is used by default).

4.363 SNMP Trap Show


snmp-trap show - Show SNMP trap handler configuration
Description:
snmp-trap show displays the SNMP trap handler configuration.

Revision 1 — August 2022 228


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
snmp-trap show

4.364 Statistics Clear


statistics clear - clear all statistics
Description:
After issuing this command, the following statistics will be cleared:
All ports statistics.
All policies statistics.
All bandwidth regulators statistics.
All OAM instances statistics.
Syntax:
statistics clear

4.365 Syntax
syntax - Display CLI syntax
Description:
Display CLI syntax explanations.
Syntax:
syntax

4.366 Syslog Edit


syslog edit - Change syslog settings
Description:
syslog edit controls the system logger. All messages are reported into the system logger and
they are kept or trashed depending on the system logger level. The system logger also
supports remote logging. You can send messages to an external computer. The different
levels for the syslog are:
1. Emergency: System is unusable
2. Alert: Action must be taken immediately
3. Critical: Critical conditions
4. Error: Error conditions
5. Warning: Warning conditions

Revision 1 — August 2022 229


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

6. Notice: Normal, but significant, condition


7. Info: Informational message
8. Debug: Debug-level message
The syslog level you choose enables all messages from the specified level and all messages
from lower levels. When dev-facility is enabled, all messages are logged using the user-
defined facility instead of the default ones.
Syntax:
syslog edit {{dev-facility {enable | disable} <facility>}
{remote {disable | enable}} |
{host {<host-name>}} |
{remote-priority {<level>}} |
{priority {<level>}} }+
Parameters:
<host-name> <ip-addr> | <FQHN>
<FQHN> <string>
<level> <Emergency|Alert|Critical|Error|Warnin
g|Notice|Info|Debug>
<facility> <LOCAL0|LOCAL1|LOCAL2|LOCAL3|LOCAL4|LO
CAL5|LOCAL6|LOCAL7>
dev-facility Enable or disable device facility to log all messages using a user-
defined facility instead of the default ones.
host The remote address to log messages to.
remote-priority The remote priority level, as listed above.
priority The priority level, as listed above.
remote Enable or disable the sending of messages to a remote syslog
server.

4.367 Syslog Show Configuration


syslog show configuration - Show syslog configuration
Description:
syslog show prints the syslog configuration.
Syntax:
syslog show configuration

Revision 1 — August 2022 230


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.368 Syslog Show Log


syslog show log - Show the system log
Description:
syslog show log display the system log.
Syntax:
syslog show log

4.369 Syslog Show Log Continuous


syslog show log continuous - Show the system log without page breaks
Description:
syslog show log continuous displays the system log without page breaks. Press CTRL-C to
interrupt.
Syntax:
syslog show log continuous

4.370 System Add OS-Service http-server http-origin


system add os-service http-server http-origin - Add an authorized HTTP
Origin
Description:
This command is used to add a new HTTP Origin to the authorized origins list.
Syntax:
system add os-service http-server http-origin list <http-origin>
Parameters:
<http-origin> Authorized/white-listed URL

4.371 System Edit OS-Service http-server


system edit os-service http-server - Edit http-server configuration
Description:
Use the command system edit os-service http-server to modify http-server configuration.
Syntax:
system edit os-service http-server {
{http-redirect <enable | disable>} |
{CSRF Protection: <enable | disable>} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 231


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{http-service <enable | disable>} |


{https-port 443 | <1024-65535>} |
{http-origin <enable | disable>} }+
Parameters:
<http-redirect> HTTP Redirect option, enable this option to allow redirect from
HTTP to HTTPS.
While disable this option to prevent redirection from HTTP to
HTTPS and turn off HTTP support.
<http-service> HTTP Service, enable or disable HTTP Service is equivalent to
turn on/off the HTTP Server
<https-port> HTTPS Port, set HTTPS Port which is 443 or in range 1024-65535
<http-origin> HTTP Origin, enable or disable HTTP Origin validation.

4.372 System Show OS-Service


system show os-service - List available OS services
system show os-service http-server - Show http-server configuration
Description:
Show all available OS services. If an OS service is specified, the detail configuration of that
service will be displayed.
Syntax:
system show os-service {
……………………………… {http-server}}

4.373 System Monitor Edit


system-monitor edit - Edit system monitor configuration
Description:
Use the system-monitor edit command to modify the system monitor parameters.
Syntax:
system-monitor edit {{configuration <config-params>} |
{system-probe <system-probe-params>} |
{disk-space-probe <disk-space-probe-params>} |
{network-probe <network-probe-params>}}+
Parameters:
<config-params> The general configuration (see below).
<system-probe-params> The system-probe configuration (see below).
<disk-space-probe-params> The disk-space-probe configuration (see below).
<network-probe-params> The network-probe configuration (see below).

Revision 1 — August 2022 232


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

General configuration syntax:


system-monitor edit configuration { {state <enable | disable>} |
{mode <Debug | Normal>} |
{output-type <syslog>} |
General configuration parameters:
state Enable or disable the system-monitor.
mode The working mode.
output-type The output interface type.
output-format The output format when output-type is file or tream.
server-address IP address of stream server.
server-port Stream server port.
server-type Stream server type.
System probe syntax:
system-monitor edit system-probe { {state <enable | disable>} |
{interval <1-60>} |
{cpu-critical <1-99>} |
{mem-critical <1-99>} |
{cpu-warning <1-99>} |
{mem-warning <1-99> } |
{top-process-num <1-10> } |
{sort-by <mem | cpu>} }+
System probe parameters:
state Enable or disable the system-probe.
interval Interval in seconds at which the probe should collect data.
cpu-critical The threshold in percentage for cpu load in which
a critical alarm will be raised in normal mode.
mem-critical The threshold in percentage for in which a critical alarm will be
raised in normal mode.
cpu-warning The threshold in percentage for cpu load in which a warning
alarm will be raised in normal mode.
mem-warning The threshold in percentage for memory usagein which a
warning alarm will be raised in normal mode.
top-process-num The number of processes are reported to output interface.
sort-by The criteria to sort the processes.
Disk space probe syntax:
system-monitor edit disk-space-probe { {state <enable | disable>} |
{interval <1-60>} |
{usage-critical <1-99>} |
{usage-warning <1-99>} }+

Revision 1 — August 2022 233


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Disk space probe parameters:


state Enable or disable the disk space probe.
interval Interval in seconds at which the probe should collectdata.
cpu-critical The threshold in percentage for disk space usage in which a
critical alarm will be raised in normal mode.
mem-critical The threshold in percentage for disk space usage in which a
warning alarm will be raised in normal mode.
Network probe syntax:
system-monitor edit network-probe { {state <enable | disable>} |
{interval <1-60>} }+
Network probe parameters:
state Enable or disable the network probe.
interval Interval in seconds at which the probe should collect data.

4.374 System Monitor Show


system-monitor show - Show system monitor configuration
Description:
system-monitor show displays the current system monitor configuration.
Syntax:
system-monitor show

4.375 System Show Status


system show status - Display system status
Description:
This command displays system status (operational readiness).
Syntax:
system show status

4.376 TACACS-plus Edit


tacacs-plus edit - Used to edit TACACS+ configuration values
Description:
Use the tacacs-plus edit command to modify the TACACS+ parameters required to
authenticate, then authorize management access to the unit.

Revision 1 — August 2022 234


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Note: The new parameters take effect upon the next login attempt.

Syntax:
tacacs-plus edit <parameter> <value>

{auth-method {ascii | chap | pap}} |


{auth-server1-host {<ip-addr> | <ipv6-addr> | <dns-name>}} |
{auth-server1-port <decimal>} |
{auth-server1-secret <string>} |
{auth-server1-source <ip-addr>} |
{auth-server2-host {<ip-addr> | <ipv6-addr> | <dns-name>}} |
{auth-server2-port <decimal>} |
{auth-server2-secret <string>} |
{auth-server2-source <ip-addr>} |
{timeout <decimal>} |
{retries <decimal>} }+
Parameters:
auth-method Authentication method to use.
auth-server1-host TACACS+ host server to authenticate to.
Enter '0.0.0.0' or '::' to disable this server.
auth-server1-port TACACS+ server TCP port to connect to.
auth-server1-secret Shared secret for server1.
auth-server1-source Optional bind address to access server1.
auth-server2-host Only used if the first host server does not respond.
Enter '0.0.0.0' or '::' to disable this server.
auth-server2-port TACACS+ server TCP port to connect to.
auth-server2-secret Shared secret for server2.
auth-server2-source Optional bind address to access server2.
timeout The time to wait for the TACACS+ server to respond before
retrying the connection, in seconds. After the number of retries
has been exhausted, a connection to the next configured server
will be attempted, in which the same timeout and retry scheme
will apply.
retries Number of times to retry the server before trying with the next
configured server.

Revision 1 — August 2022 235


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.377 Help TACACS-plus edit


Description:
Show help for command TACACS-plus edit.

Note: The new parameters take effect upon the next login attempt.

Syntax:
tacacs-plus edit {

{auth-method {ascii | chap | pap}} |


{auth-server1-host {<ip-addr> | <ipv6-addr> | <dns-name>}} |
{auth-server1-port <decimal>} |
{auth-server1-secret <string>} |
{auth-server1-source <ip-addr>} |
{auth-server2-host {<ip-addr> | <ipv6-addr> | <dns-name>}} |
{auth-server2-port <decimal>} |
{auth-server2-secret <string>} |
{auth-server2-source <ip-addr>} |
{timeout <decimal>} |
{retries <decimal>} }+
Parameters:
auth-method Authentication method to use.
auth-server1-host TACACS+ host server to authenticate to.
Enter '0.0.0.0' or '::' to disable this server.
auth-server1-port TACACS+ server TCP port to connect to.
auth-server1-secret Shared secret for server1.
auth-server1-source Optional bind address to access server1.
auth-server2-host Only used if the first host server does not respond.
Enter '0.0.0.0' or '::' to disable this server.
auth-server2-port TACACS+ server TCP port to connect to.
auth-server2-secret Shared secret for server2.
auth-server2-source Optional bind address to access server2.
timeout The time to wait for the TACACS+ server to respond before
retrying the connection, in seconds. After the number of retries
has been exhausted, a connection to the next configured server
will be attempted, in which the same timeout and retry scheme
will apply.
retries Number of times to retry the server before trying with the next
configured server.

Revision 1 — August 2022 236


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.378 TACACS-plus Show


tacacs-plus show - Show the TACACS+ configuration
Description:
Used to show the summary of TACACS+ configurations.
Syntax:
tacacs-plus show

4.379 Help TACACS-plus show


Description:
Show help for command TACACS-plus show.
Syntax:
tacacs-plus show

4.380 TCP Connect


tcp-connect - Test that a TCP service is responding
Description:
Test is similar to a ping but at a higher level in the protocol stack. The test attempts to
connect to a TCP port to verify if a service is reachable.
Syntax:
tcp-connect host {host | net} |
{port <tcp-port>} |
{timeout <time-in-seconds>} }
Parameters:
host The remote address or domain name to test.
port TCP port (service) to test.
timeout Time in seconds before giving up.

4.381 Tech Support Export


tech-support export - Export tech-support report
Description:
The tech-support export command allows you to export the existing report.

Revision 1 — August 2022 237


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
tech-support {export}
[{ ftp | ftps |
scp | sftp | tftp }://[<user-name>:<password>@]<url>]
Parameters:
<user-name> <string>
<password> <string>
Examples:
tech-support export ftp://username:password@mypc.com/nnewreport.bz2
tech-support export ftps://username:password@mypc.com:990/newreport.bz2
tech-support export sftp://username:password@mypc.com:22/newreport.bz2
tech-support export scp://username:password@mypc.com:22/newreport.bz2

4.382 Tech Support Generate


tech-support generate - Generate report from current system health state
Description:
The tech-support generate command allows you to generate a report from current system
health state.
Syntax:
tech-support generate

4.383 Tech Support Show


tech-support show - Display available report
Description:
The tech-support show command allows you to display the latest report available.
Syntax:
tech-support show

4.384 Tech-Support Show Report-Transmission


tech-support show report transmission - Display configuration of report
transmission
Description:
The tech-support show report transmission command allows you to display the latest report
transmission available.

Revision 1 — August 2022 238


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
{show report-transmission} |

4.385 Tech-Support Edit Report-Transmission


tech-support show report transmission - Edit configuration of report
transmission
Description:
The tech-support edit report transmission command allows you to edit the report
transmission configuration.
Syntax:
{edit report-transmission <config-params>}

4.386 Traceroute
traceroute - Trace the route to HOST (IPv4)
Description:
traceroute tracks the route packets take through an IP network on their way to a given host.

NOTE : traceroute -6 is equivalent to traceroute6, however some parameters


mentioned here may not be valid for IPv6. See traceroute6 for help.

Usage:
traceroute [-46FIldnrv] [-f 1ST_TTL] [-m MAXTTL] [-p PORT] [-q PROBES]
[-s SRC_IP] [-t TOS] [-w WAIT_SEC] [-g GATEWAY] [-i IFACE]
[-z PAUSE_MSEC] HOST [BYTES]
Options:
-4,-6 Force IP or IPv6 name resolution
-F Set the don't fragment bit
-I Use ICMP ECHO instead of UDP datagrams
-l Display the TTL value of the returned packet
-d Set SO_DEBUG options to socket
-n Print numeric addresses
-r Bypass routing tables, send directly to HOST
-v Verbose
-m Max time-to-live (max number of hops)
-p Base UDP port number used in probes
(default 33434)
-q Number of probes per TTL (default 3)

Revision 1 — August 2022 239


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

-s IP address to use as the source address


-t Type-of-service in probe packets (default 0)
-w Time in seconds to wait for a response (default 3)
-g Loose source route gateway (8 max)

4.387 Traceroute6
traceroute6 - Trace the route to HOST (IPv6)
Description:
traceroute6 tracks the route packets take through an IPv6 network on their way to a given
host.

NOTE : The traceroute command supports both IPv4 and IPv6, so traceroute6 is
equivalent to traceroute -6, however some parameters used in IPv4 may not be
valid for IPv6.

Usage:
traceroute6 [-dnrv] [-m MAXTTL] [-p PORT] [-q PROBES]
[-s SRC_IP] [-t TOS] [-w WAIT_SEC] [-i IFACE]
HOST [BYTES]

Trace the route to HOST


Options:
-d Set SO_DEBUG options to socket
-n Print numeric addresses
-r Bypass routing tables, send directly to HOST
-v Verbose
-m Max time-to-live (max number of hops)
-p Base UDP port number used in probes
(default is 33434)
-q Number of probes per TTL (default 3)
-s IP address to use as the source address
-t Type-of-service in probe packets (default 0)
-w Time in seconds to wait for a response (default 3)

Revision 1 — August 2022 240


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.388 Traffic Edit Mode


traffic edit mode - Allows to edit the policy list VLAN mode configuration
Description:
Traffic edit allows you to configure options related to VID sets associated with traffic policy
lists.
Syntax:
traffic edit mode [policy_list] {
{vid-set {inner | outer}} }+
Parameters:
vid-set When using traffic policies with VLAN sets, this option is used to
define whether frame inspection is performed on the Outer
VLAN only (option: outer), or the combination of the Outer and
Inner VLANs (option: inner), for each policy list. The default is
outer VLAN.

4.389 Traffic Show


traffic show - Shows policy list VLAN filtering parameters
Description:
Displays which VLAN (inner or outer) is inspected by policy lists.
Syntax:
traffic show

4.390 TWAMP Clear Statistics


twamp clear statistics - Clear TWAMP flows statistics
Description:
Clear TWAMP flows statistics.
Syntax:
twamp clear statistics [<identifier>]
<identifier> = <decimal>
Parameters:
<identifier> An optional unique index identifying the instance.

Revision 1 — August 2022 241


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.391 TWAMP Edit


twamp edit - Edit TWAMP configuration
Description:
Edit TWAMP configuration
Syntax:
twamp edit {
{udp-port <decimal>} |
{state <enable | disable>}}+
Parameters:
state The state of the instance (disabled by default).
udp-port The UDP port used (default 862, 1025-65535).

4.392 TWAMP Generator Add


twamp-gen add - Create a TWAMP session
Description:
Create a TWAMP session.

NOTE : One-way delay measurements require time synchronization using NTP/PTP


on units at each probe end.

Syntax:
twamp-gen add {
{name <string>} |
{state {enable | disable}} |
{interval <decimal>} |
{reference-period <decimal> } |
{pkt-loss-threshold <0-100>} |
{continuity-check <decimal>} |
{tw-avg-delay-thrs <decimal>} |
{tw-avg-dv-thrs <decimal>} |
{tw-max-delay-thrs <decimal>} |
{tw-max-dv-thrs <decimal>} |
{tw-max-delay <decimal>} |
{tw-max-dv <decimal>} |
{ow-near-end-avg-delay-thrs <decimal>} |
{ow-near-end-avg-dv-thrs <decimal>} |
{ow-near-end-max-delay-thrs <decimal>} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 242


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{ow-near-end-max-dv-thrs <decimal>} |
{ow-near-end-max-delay <decimal>} |
{ow-near-end-max-dv <decimal>} |
{ow-far-end-avg-delay-thrs <decimal>} |
{ow-far-end-avg-dv-thrs <decimal>} |
{ow-far-end-max-delay-thrs <decimal>} |
{ow-far-end-max-dv-thrs <decimal>} |
{ow-far-end-max-delay <decimal>} |
{ow-far-end-max-dv <decimal>} |
{dscp <0-63>} |
{ecn <0-3>} |
{pkt-size <14-1472>} |
{vlan1-priority <0-7>} |
{src-port <decimal>} |
{dst-port <decimal>}
{dst-ip <ip-addr>}}+
Parameters:
name A name assigned to reference this instance.
state Enable or disable generating TWAMP packets.
interval Interval in milliseconds at which TWAMP
packets should be sent.
reference-period Reference period in minutes.
pkt-loss-threshold Threshold (in %) at which an Excessive Packet
Loss (EPL) alarm is declared.
continuity-check Maximum number of consecutive lost packets
allowed.
tw-max-delay Maximum two-way delay allowed.
tw-max-dv Maximum two-way delay variation allowed.
tw-max-delay-thrs Maximum consecutive two-way delay samples
allowed greater than tw-max-delay.
tw-max-dv-thrs Maximum consecutive two-way delay samples
allowed greater than tw-max-dv.
tw-avg-delay-thrs Maximum two-way average delay.
tw-avg-dv-thrs Maximum two-way average delay variation.
ow-near-end-max-delay Maximum one-way near-end delay allowed.
ow-near-end-max-dv Maximum one-way near-end delay variation
allowed.
ow-near-end-max-delay-thrs Maximum consecutive one-way near-end delay
samples allowed greater than ow-near-end-
max-delay.

Revision 1 — August 2022 243


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

ow-near-end-max-dv-thrs Maximum consecutive one-way near-end delay


samples allowed greater than ow-near-end-
max-dv.
ow-near-end-avg-delay-thrs Maximum one-way near-end average delay.
ow-near-end-avg-dv-thrs Maximum one-way near-end average delay
variation.
ow-far-end-max-delay Maximum one-way far-end delay allowed.
ow-far-end-max-dv Maximum one-way far-end delay variation
allowed.
ow-far-end-max-delay-thrs Maximum consecutive one-way far-end delay
samples allowed greater than ow-far-end-max-
delay.
ow-far-end-max-dv-thrs Maximum consecutive one-way far-end delay
samples allowed greater than ow-far-end-max-
dv.
ow-far-end-avg-delay-thrs Maximum one-way far-end average delay.
ow-far-end-avg-dv-thrs Maximum one-way far-end average delay
variation.
dscp The Diff-Serv CodePoint value.
ecn The Explicit Congestion Notification value.
vlan1-priority First VLAN priority bits. This applies only if the
outgoing interface is encapsulated in a VLAN.
dst-ip The peer IPv4 or IPv6 destination address.
dst-port Specifies destination UDP port (default 862, valid
ports: 1024-65535)
src-port Specifies source UDP port (default 10000, valid
ports: 1024-65535).
pkt-size Packet size. Does not include the headers (UDP,
IP, Ethernet) and the FCS bytes.

4.393 TWAMP Generator Delete


twamp-gen delete - Delete a TWAMP session
Description:
Delete a TWAMP session.
Syntax:
twamp-gen delete <index>
<index> = <decimal>
Parameters:
index Specifies the TWAMP instance.

Revision 1 — August 2022 244


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.394 TWAMP Generator Edit


twamp-gen edit - Edit a TWAMP session
Description:
Edit a TWAMP session.

NOTE : One-way delay measurements require time synchronization using NTP/PTP


on units at each probe end.

Syntax:
twamp-gen edit <index>
{{name <string>} |
{state {enable | disable}} |
{interval <decimal>} |
{reference-period <decimal> } |
{pkt-loss-threshold <0-100>} |
{continuity-check <decimal>} |
{tw-avg-delay-thrs <decimal>} |
{tw-avg-dv-thrs <decimal>} |
{tw-max-delay-thrs <decimal>} |
{tw-max-dv-thrs <decimal>} |
{tw-max-delay <decimal>} |
{tw-max-dv <decimal>} |
{ow-near-end-avg-delay-thrs <decimal>} |
{ow-near-end-avg-dv-thrs <decimal>} |
{ow-near-end-max-delay-thrs <decimal>} |
{ow-near-end-max-dv-thrs <decimal>} |
{ow-near-end-max-delay <decimal>} |
{ow-near-end-max-dv <decimal>} |
{ow-far-end-avg-delay-thrs <decimal>} |
{ow-far-end-avg-dv-thrs <decimal>} |
{ow-far-end-max-delay-thrs <decimal>} |
{ow-far-end-max-dv-thrs <decimal>} |
{ow-far-end-max-delay <decimal>} |
{ow-far-end-max-dv <decimal>} |
{dscp <0-63>} |
{ecn <0-3>} |
{pkt-size <14-1472>} |
{vlan1-priority <0-7>} |
{src-port <decimal>} |
{dst-port <decimal>}

Revision 1 — August 2022 245


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{dst-ip <ip-addr>}}+

<index> = <decimal>
Parameters:
name A name assigned to reference this instance.
state Enable or disable generating TWAMP packets.
interval Interval in milliseconds at which TWAMP
packets should be sent.
reference-period Reference period in minutes.
pkt-loss-threshold Threshold (in %) at which an Excessive Packet
Loss (EPL) alarm is declared.
continuity-check Maximum number of consecutive lost packets
allowed.
tw-max-delay Maximum two-way delay allowed.
tw-max-dv Maximum two-way delay variation allowed.
tw-max-delay-thrs Maximum consecutive two-way delay samples
allowed greater than tw-max-delay.
tw-max-dv-thrs Maximum consecutive two-way delay samples
allowed greater than tw-max-dv.
tw-avg-delay-thrs Maximum two-way average delay.
tw-avg-dv-thrs Maximum two-way average delay variation.
ow-near-end-max-delay Maximum one-way near-end delay allowed.
ow-near-end-max-dv Maximum one-way near-end delay variation
allowed.
ow-near-end-max-delay-thrs Maximum consecutive one-way near-end delay
samples allowed greater than ow-near-end-
max-delay.
ow-near-end-max-dv-thrs Maximum consecutive one-way near-end delay
samples allowed greater than ow-near-end-
max-dv.
ow-near-end-avg-delay-thrs Maximum one-way near-end average delay.
ow-near-end-avg-dv-thrs Maximum one-way near-end average delay
variation.
ow-far-end-max-delay Maximum one-way far-end delay allowed.
ow-far-end-max-dv Maximum one-way far-end delay variation
allowed.
ow-far-end-max-delay-thrs Maximum consecutive one-way far-end delay
samples allowed greater than ow-far-end-max-
delay.
ow-far-end-max-dv-thrs Maximum consecutive one-way far-end delay
samples allowed greater than ow-far-end-max-
dv.

Revision 1 — August 2022 246


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

ow-far-end-avg-delay-thrs Maximum one-way far-end average delay.


ow-far-end-avg-dv-thrs Maximum one-way far-end average delay
variation.
dscp The Diff-Serv CodePoint value.
ecn The Explicit Congestion Notification value.
vlan1-priority First VLAN priority bits. This applies only if the
outgoing interface is encapsulated in a VLAN.
dst-ip The peer IPv4 or IPv6 destination address.
dst-port Specifies destination UDP port (default 862, valid
ports: 1024-65535).
src-port Specifies source UDP port (default 10000, valid
ports: 1024-65535).
pkt-size Packet size. Does not include the headers (UDP,
IP, Ethernet) and the FCS bytes.

4.395 TWAMP Generator Show Configuration


twamp-gen show configuration - Show TWAMP session's configuration
Description:
Display a summary of the configured TWAMP instances. When an instance index is specified,
a detailed configuration report is displayed.
Syntax:
twamp-gen show configuration [<index>]
<index> - <decimal>
Parameters:
index Specifies the TWAMP instance.

4.396 TWAMP Generator Show Results


twamp-gen show results - Show TWAMP session's results
Description:
Display TWAMP session measurements and status.
Syntax:
twamp-gen show results [<index>] {
{ type {historic}} |
{ buckets <0-16>} |
{ period <period-id>}}+
<index> - <decimal>
<period-id> - <decimal>

Revision 1 — August 2022 247


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
index Specifies the TWAMP instance.
period-id Specifies the period id.
type Type of results to display:
Historic: History buckets results. If the number of buckets
is not specified, the last 4 buckets will be
displayed, starting from the specified period. If
no period is specified, the last 4 buckets will be
displayed.
buckets Number of TWAMP buckets to display.
period Reference period for the TWAMP history
buckets. Zero for the most recent period
available.

4.397 TWAMP Generator Show Status


twamp-gen show status - Show TWAMP session's status
Description:
Display TWAMP sessions's status.
Syntax:
twamp-gen show status [<index>]
<index> - <decimal>
Parameters:
index Specifies the TWAMP instance.

4.398 TWAMP Show Configuration


twamp show configuration - Display TWAMP configuration
Description:
Display TWAMP configuration.
Syntax:
twamp show configuration

4.399 TWAMP Show Statistics


twamp show statistics - Display TWAMP flows statistics
Description:
Display TWAMP statistics.

Revision 1 — August 2022 248


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
twamp show statistics

4.400 User Add/Edit


user add - Add a new user
user edit - Edit an existing user
Description:
The user add command allows you to add users who can access the unit. You can use user edit
when you need to modify a user configuration.
If you use the <password> keyword in one of these commands, you will be prompted to enter
your password after the command. You will need to confirm your password as well. If you do
not use the password keyword with <user add>, the password will be set the same as the
user name.
Syntax:
user {add | edit} <user-name> {{first <string>} |
{last <string>} |
{email <string>} |
{phone <string>} |
{clearpass <string>} |
{password}}+
Parameters:
<user-name> <string>
first First name of the user.
last Last name of the user.
email The email address of the user.
phone The telephone number of the user.
password Allows to set a password for the user.
clearpass Enter password in cleartext without confirmation.

4.401 User Delete


user delete - Remove an existing user
Description:
user delete allows you to delete an existing user profile.
Syntax:
user delete {<user-name>}

Revision 1 — August 2022 249


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
<user-name> <string>

4.402 User Permissions Edit


user permissions edit - Edit the user permissions
Description:
user permissions edit allows you to modify the permissions that are associated with a
specified user.
Syntax:
user permissions edit {<user-name>} {add-group | delete-group} {<group-
name>}
Parameters:
<user-name> <string>
<group-name> <string>

4.403 User Permissions Show


user permissions show - Shows the user permissions
Description:
This command displays the permission of the group to which the specified user belongs.
Syntax:
user permissions show [<user-name>]
Parameters:
<user-name> <string>

4.404 User Show


user show - Show user information
Description:
user show displays the contact information for a given user.
Syntax:
user show [<user-name>]
Parameters:
<user-name> <string>

Revision 1 — August 2022 250


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.405 VCAgent Edit Collection


vcagent edit collection - Editing command used by EMS Vision Collect
Description:
Change vcagent related collection setting.
Syntax:
vcagent edit collection

4.406 VCAgent Edit Configuration


vcagent edit configuration - Editing command used by EMS Vision Collect
Description:
Change vcagent related configuration setting.
Syntax:
vcagent edit configuration

4.407 VCAgent Show Configuration


vcagent show configuration - Show Vision Collect Agent configuration
Description:
vcagent show configuration displays the agent configuration parameters.
Syntax:
vcagent show configuration

4.408 VCAgent Show Descriptors


vcagent show descriptors - Dump Vision Collect Agent JSON descriptors
Description:
vcagent show descriptors displays the agent JSON descriptors.
Syntax:
vcagent show descriptors

4.409 Version
version - Display CLI version
Description:
Display CLI version.

Revision 1 — August 2022 251


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
version

4.410 VID-Set Add


vid-set add - Add a VID set
Description:
The vid-set command is used to add a new VID set.
Syntax:
vid-set add <vset-name> {
{policy-list <policy list>} |
{vlan-type {c-vlan | s-vlan | t-vlan}} |
{vid-list <vlist>} |
{outer-vlan-etype {c-vlan | s-vlan | t-vlan}} |
{outer-vlan-id <vid>}}+
Parameters:
<vset-name> <string>
policy-list Name of the policy list to which the VID set will be associated.
vlan-type VLAN type associated with the VID set.
vid-list List of VIDs to include in this VID set. Specify a list of VIDs in the
following format: [- ], [- ]...(e.g. 1,2,10-20 will include VIDs 1, 2,
and 10 to 20).
outer-vlan-etype VLAN type associated with the outer VID. This is only relevant
when the VLAN level of the policy list associated with the current
VID-set is configured as Inner.
outer-vlan-id Outer VLAN id. This is only relevant when the VLAN level of the
policy list associated with the current VID-set is configured as
Inner.

4.411 VID-Set Delete


vid-set delete - Delete a VID set
Description:
vid-set delete allows you to delete an existing VID set.
Syntax:
vid-set delete <vset-name>
Parameters:
<vset-name> <string>

Revision 1 — August 2022 252


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.412 VID-Set Edit


vid-set edit - Change vid-set parameters
Description:
vid-set edit allows you to change the parameters in existing VID sets.
Syntax:
vid-set edit <vset-name> {
{name <vset-name>} |
{vid-list <vlist>}}+
{outer-vlan-id <vid>}}+
Parameters:
<vset-name> <string>
name New name given to this VID set.
vid-list List of VIDs to include in this VID set. Specify a list of VIDs in the
following format: [- ], [- ]...(e.g. 1,2,10-20 will include VIDs 1, 2,
and 10 to 20).
outer-vlan-id Outer VLAN id. This is only relevant when the VLAN level of the
policy list associated with the current VID-set is configured as
Inner.

4.413 VID-Set Show Set


vid-set show set - Display VID set configuration
Description:
Specifying an attribute provides detailed configuration about the matching VID set. A
combination of policy list and VLAN type is also allowed.
Otherwise, the command provides a summary configuration for all VID sets in a table format.
Syntax:
vid-set show set {
{name <vset-name>} |
{paging {enable | disable}} |
{policy-list <policy list>} |
{vlan-type {c-vlan | s-vlan | t-vlan}}}+
Parameters:
<vset-name> <string>
<policy list> <string>
name VID set name is given to show configuration.
paging Enable/Disable the paging option
policy-list Name of the policy list to which the VID set will be associated.

Revision 1 — August 2022 253


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

vlan-type VLAN type associated with the VID set.

4.414 VID-Set Show VID


vid-set show vid - Display VID configuration
Description:
Specifying an attribute provides detailed configuration about the matching VID set. A
combination of policy list, VLAN type and state is also allowed. Otherwise, the command
provides a summary configuration for all VID sets in a table format.
Syntax:
vid-set show vid {
{paging {enable | disable}} |
{policy-list <policy list>} |
{vlan-type {c-vlan | s-vlan | t-vlan}}
{state {any | assigned | free | mapped}}}+
Parameters:
<policy list> <string>
paging Enable/Disable the paging option
policy-list Name of the policy list to which the VID set will be associated.
vlan-type VLAN type associated with the VID set.
state The state of the VID set.

4.415 Virtual-Connection Add VCA


virtual-connection add vca - Add a VCA instance
Description:
Used to add a new virtual connection association by specifying a list of one or more VCEs or
VCAs.
Syntax:
virtual-connection add vca <vca-name> {{vc-list <vc-name>+} }+
Parameters:
<vca-name> <string>. Unique name associated to the VCA instance.
vc-list A comma separated list of VCE or implicit VCA containing a VCE
Tunnel instance referenced by name.

Revision 1 — August 2022 254


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.416 Virtual-Connection Add VCE


virtual-connection add vce - Add a VCE instance
Description:
Used to add a new Virtual Connection Element.
Syntax:
virtual-connection add vce <vce-name> <type> {Customer | Operator | Tunnel}
{
{tpid {0x8100 | 0x88a8 | 0X9100} |
{component-id <decimal>} |
{tp-a {internal | external} |
{tp-a-port {PORT-n, LAG-n} |
{tp-a-vid <1-4095>} |
{tp-a-pcp-mapping <string> |
{tp-z {internal | external} |
{tp-z-port {PORT-n, LAG-n} |
{tp-z-vid <1-4095>} |
{tp-z-pcp-mapping <string> |
{frame-type {all-to-one | untagged | vlan-tagged | any}} |
{vid-relay-action {preserve | untag | translate | tag}} }+
Parameters:
<vce-name> <string>. Unique name associated to the VCE instance.
type Choose the type of VCE component: Customer, Operator or
Tunnel.
tpid The VLAN TPID attributed to this VCE (0x8100, 0x88a8 or
0x9100).
component-id The ID of the Component into which the VCE will be attached.
Specifying 0 indicates that the system shall automatically assign
a component ID.
tp-a Defines the type of interface tp-a is connected to. The TP can be
connected to another VCE (internal) or an external port
(external).
tp-a-port Specifies the physical port when tp-a is configured as external.
tp-a-vid For VID values 1-4095, all combinations are allowed. Ex: <1-10, 15,
20-25>.
tp-a-pcp-mapping CoS profile name with the type PCP.
tp-z Defines the type of interface tp-z is connected to. The TP can be
connected to another VCE (internal) or an external port
(external).
tp-z-port Specifies the physical port when tp-z is configured as external.

Revision 1 — August 2022 255


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

tp-z-vid It is applicable when 'vid-relay-action' is set to 'translate' or 'tag'.


Only a single VID may be specified.
tp-z-pcp-mapping CoS profile name with the type PCP.
frame-type Defines the acceptable frames coming to a VCE.
vid-relay-action Usage is dependent on VCE type. Used to translate tp-a-vid to
tp-z-vid when a single VLANID is used. If a set of VIDs is
provided for 'tp-a-vid' then this parameter must be set to
'preserve'.
When 'all-to-one' is enabled and type is 'Operator' or type is
'Tunnel', the value should be 'tag'.
For all other cases, set as required.

4.417 Virtual-Connection Delete VCA


virtual-connection delete vca - Delete a VCA instance
Description:
Used to delete a VCA object.
Syntax:
virtual-connection delete vca <vca-name>
Parameters:
<vca-name> <string>

4.418 Virtual-Connection Delete VCE


virtual-connection delete vce - Delete a VCE instance
Description:
Used to delete an existing VCE object.
Syntax:
virtual-connection delete vce <vce-name>
Parameters:
<vce-name> <string>

4.419 Virtual-Connection Edit VCA


virtual-connection edit vca - Edit a VCA instance
Description:
Used to edit an existing VCA object. An implicit VCA cannot be modified.

Revision 1 — August 2022 256


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
virtual-connection edit vca <vca-name> {
{name <vca-name>} |
{vc-list <vc-name>+} }+
Parameters:
<vca-name> <string>. Unique name associated to the VCA instance.
name A new name for the VCA instance.
vc-list A comma separated list of VCE or implicit VCA containing a VCE
tunnel instances referenced by name.

4.420 Virtual-Connection Edit VCE


virtual-connection edit vce - Edit a VCE instance
Description:
Used to edit an existing VCE object.
Syntax:
virtual-connection edit vce <vce-name> {
{name <vce-name>} |
{component-id <decimal>} |
{tp-a {internal | external} |
{tp-a-port {PORT-n, LAG-n} |
{tp-a-vid <1-4095>} |
{tp-a-pcp-mapping <string> |
{tp-z {internal | external} |
{tp-z-port {PORT-n, LAG-n} |
{tp-z-vid <1-4095>} |
{tp-z-pcp-mapping <string> |
{frame-type {all-to-one | untagged | vlan-tagged | any}} |
{vid-relay-action {preserve | untag | translate | tag}} }+
Parameters:
<vce-name> <string>. Unique name associated to the VCE instance.
name A new name for the VCE instance.
component-id The ID of the Component into which the VCE will be attached.
Specifying 0 indicates that the system shall automatically assign
a component ID.
tp-a Defines the type of interface tp-a is connected to. The TP can be
connected to another VCE (internal) or an external port
(external).
tp-a-port Specifies the physical port when tp-a is configured as external.

Revision 1 — August 2022 257


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

tp-a-vid For VID values 1-4095, all combinations are allowed. Ex: <1-10, 15,
20-25>.
tp-a-pcp-mapping CoS profile name with the type PCP.
tp-z Defines the type of interface tp-z is connected to. The TP can be
connected to another VCE (internal) or an external port
(external).
tp-z-port Specifies the physical port when tp-z is configured as external.
tp-z-vid It is applicable when 'vid-relay-action' is set to 'translate' or 'tag'.
Only a single VID may be specified.
tp-z-pcp-mapping CoS profile name with the type PCP.
frame-type Defines the acceptable frames coming to a VCE.
vid-relay-action Usage is dependent on VCE type. Used to translate tp-a-vid to
tp-z-vid when a single VLANID is used. If a set of VIDs is
provided for 'tp-a-vid' then this parameter must be set to
'preserve'.
When 'all-to-one' is enabled and type is 'Operator' or type is
'Tunnel', the value should be 'tag'.
For all other cases, set as required.

4.421 Virtual-Connection Show VCA Configuration


virtual-connection show vca configuration - Show vca configuration
Description:
Without arguments, this command displays the VCA configuration summary in a table format.
When specifying a VCA name, this command displays the detailed configuration for that VCA.
Syntax:
virtual-connection shows vca configuration [<vca-name>]
Parameters:
<vca-name> <string>

4.422 Virtual-Connection Show VCE Configuration


virtual-connection show vce configuration - Show vce configuration
Description:
Used to display a summary of vce configurations.
Syntax:
virtual-connection shows vce configuration {<layer-2> | <vce-name>}
Parameters:
<vce-name> <string>

Revision 1 — August 2022 258


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.423 Y.1564 Add Test


y1564 add test - Create an instance of Y.1564 test
Description:
With y1564 add test, you can create a new Y.1564 test and set its parameters.
Syntax:
y1564 add test <test-name> {
{description <string>} |
{configuration {enable | disable}} |
{step-duration {1-60} |
{performance {enable | disable}} |
{test-duration {1-1440} |
{parallel {enable | disable}} |
{burst-sla {enable | disable}} |
{port <port-name>} |
{delay-type {one-way-delay | two-way-delay}} |
{time-sync-mandatory {enable | disable}} |
{packet-type {layer-2|layer-3| l2-accedian| l2-generic}} |
{dst-ipv4-addr <ip-addr>} |
{destination-port <0-65535>} |
{source-port <0-65535>} |
{dscp <0-63>} |
{dst-mac-addr <mac-addr>} |
{y1731-level <0-7>}}+
{dst-ipv4-addr <ip-addr>} |
{destination-port <0-65535>} |
{source-port <0-65535>} |
{dscp <0-63>} |
{dst-mac-addr <mac-addr>} |
{y1731-level <0-7>}}+
Parameters:
description Short description of the Y.1564 test.
configuration Enable Y.1564 configuration test.
step-duration Duration of each step during the configuration test in seconds.
performance Enable Y.1564 performance test.
test-duration Duration of each step during the performance test in minutes.
parallel Enable Y.1564 parallel service configuration test.
burst-sla Enable Y.1564 burst SLA test.
port Name of the port to which to send the test traffic.
delay-type Type of delay measurement.

Revision 1 — August 2022 259


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

time-sync-mandatory Enable time synchronization verification.


packet-type Used to define specific fields in the test packet.
dst-ipv4-addr The IPv4 destination address.
destination-port The destination port for UDP protocol (0 - 65535).
source-port The source port for UDP protocol (0 - 65535).
dscp The Diff-Serv CodePoint value (0 - 63).
dst-mac-addr This is the Ethernet MAC destination address.
y1731-level Y.1731 Maintenance Entity Group level (0-7).

4.424 Y.1564 Delete Report


y1564 delete report - Delete an instance of Y.1564 test report
Description:
Delete an instance of Y.1564 test report.
Syntax:
y1564 delete report <report-name>
<report-name> = <string>
Parameters:
<report-name> A unique name to identify an instance of Y.1564 test report.

4.425 Y.1564 Delete Test


y1564 delete test - Delete an instance of Y.1564 test
Description:
Delete an instance of Y.1564 test.
Syntax:
y1564 delete test <test-name>
<test-name> = <string>
Parameters:
<test-name> A unique name to identify an instance of Y.1564 test.

4.426 Y.1564 Edit Report


y1564 edit report - Change Y.1564 test activation information
Description:
After a Y.1564 test has completed, the report can be edited to modify or add information such
as: name, description, note, technician's name.

Revision 1 — August 2022 260


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
y1564 edit report filename <filename> {
{description <desc>} |
{note <note>} |
{technician <tech. name>}}+
<filename> - <string> Unique filename associated with the activation.
Parameters:
description <string> Information about test being described.
note <string> Additional Information about test being described.
technician <string> Name of technician executing test.

4.427 Y.1564 Edit Service


y1564 edit service - Change Y.1564 service configuration
Description:
With y1564 edit service, you change the configuration of a service under a specific test.
Syntax:
y1564 edit service <test-name> <service-id> {
{name <service-name>} |
{state {enable | disable}} |
{policing {enable | disable}} |
{step {enable | disable}} |
{availability {enable | disable}} |
{cir <0 to max-port-speed>} |
{cbs <0 to 10000>} |
{eir <0 to max-port-speed>} |
{ebs <8>}|
{size-type {fixed}} |
{packet-size <64 to 10240>} |
{ftd <decimal>} |
{ftd-type {max|avg}} |
{fdv <decimal>} |
{fdv-type {max|avg}} |
{flr <exponent>} |
{m-factor <decimal>} |
{dst-ipv4-overwrite {enable|disable}} |
{dst-ipv4-addr <ip-addr>} |
{dscp-overwrite {enable|disable}} |
{dscp <0-63>} |

Revision 1 — August 2022 261


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

{dst-mac-addr-overwrite {enable|disable}} |
{dst-mac-addr <mac-addr> } |
{y1731-level-overwrite {enable|disable}} |
{y1731-level <0-7>} |
{vlan1-header {enable|disable}} |
{vlan1-ethertype {c-vlan|s-vlan}} |
{vlan1-priority <0-7>} |
{vlan1-id <0-4095>} |
{vlan1-cfi <0-1>} |
{vlan2-header {enable|disable}} |
{vlan2-ethertype {c-vlan|s-vlan}} |
{vlan2-priority <0-7>} |
{vlan2-cfi <0-1>} |
{vlan2-id <0-4095>} |
{fe-vlan1-priority-check {disable | enable}} |
{fe-vlan1-dei-check {disable | enable}} |
{fe-vlan1-id-check {disable | enable}} |
{fe-vlan2-priority-check {disable | enable}} |
{fe-vlan2-dei-check {disable | enable}} |
{fe-vlan2-id-check {disable | enable}} |
{fe-dscp-check {disable | enable}} |
{fe-vlan1-priority <0-7> {disable | enable}} |
{fe-vlan1-dei <0-1> {disable | enable}} |
{fe-vlan1-id <0-4095> {disable | enable}} |
{fe-vlan2-priority <0-7> {disable | enable}} |
{fe-vlan2-dei <0-1> {disable | enable}} |
{fe-vlan2-id <0-4095> {disable | enable}} |
{fe-dscp <0-63> {disable | enable}}}+

<test-name> = A unique name used to identify a Y.1564 test in the


system.
<service-id> = A unique id used to identify a service in this test.
Parameters:
name The name of a service.
disable | enable To enable or disable the field in the check.
state Enable this service for this specific test.
policing Enable policing testing.
step Enable step testing.
availability Enable Availability measurement.
cir committed information rate in kbps.

Revision 1 — August 2022 262


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

cbs Committed burst size in KiB (1024 bytes)


eir excess information rate in kbps.
ebs Excess burst size in KiB (1024 bytes).
size-type Packet sizes is limited to fixed only, no support for EMIX available
in this product.
packet-size For a fixed packet, specify the packet size.
Maximum packet size is 10240.
ftd Maximum/average two-way Frame Transfer Delay (FTD) allowed
(in micro-seconds).
ftd-type Determines whether if the Frame Transfer Delay (FTD)
parameter is a maximum or average value.
fdv Maximum/average two-way Frame Delay Variation (FDV)
allowed (in micro-seconds).
fdv-type Determines whether if the Frame Delay Variation (FDV)
parameter is a maximum or average value.
flr Maximum Frame Loss Ratio (FLR) allowed.
m-factor The M factor is added to the Service Acceptance Criteria in the
policing test to take into account the effect of the CBS and EBS
on the total rate.
The policing test will pass if IR-T=<CIR+EIR+M
Where: IR-T: Total Information Rate
CIR: Committed Information Rate
EIR: Excess Information Rate
M: M factor (default value = 1 Mbps)
dst-ipv4-overwrite Overwrite the test IPv4 address with the service address.
dst-ipv4-addr The IPv4 destination address.
dscp-overwrite Overwrite the test DSCP value with the service value.
dscp The Diff-Serv CodePoint value (0 - 63).
mac-addr-overwrite Enable/Disable the overwrite of the test destination MAC
address.
mac-addr The destination MAC address to overwrite.
y1731-level-overwrite Enable/Disable the overwrite of the Y.1731 MEG level.
y1731-level Y.1731 MEG level value to overwrite.
vlan1-header Enable the presence of the first VLAN header.
vlan1-ethertype* First VLAN protocol ID set to C-VLAN (0x8100) for 802.1Q
network, T-VLAN (0x9100) for 802.1Q tunneling network, or S-
VLAN (0x88A8) for 802.1AD network.
vlan1-cfi First VLAN CFI/DEI may be 0 or 1. It is usually set to 0.
vlan1-id First VLAN ID may be any value between 0 and 4095.
vlan1-priority First VLAN priority can be between 0 and 7, 7 being the highest
priority. Normal traffic has priority 0.
vlan2-header Enable the presence of the second VLAN header.

Revision 1 — August 2022 263


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

vlan2-ethertype* Second VLAN protocol ID set to C-VLAN (0x8100) for 802.1Q


network, T-VLAN (0x9100) for 802.1Q tunneling network, or S-
VLAN (0x88A8) for 802.1AD network.
vlan2-cfi Second VLAN CFI/DEI may be 0 or 1. It is usually set to 0.
vlan2-id Second VLAN ID may be any value between 0 and 4095.
vlan2-priority Second VLAN priority can be between 0 and 7, 7 being the
highest priority. Normal traffic has priority 0.
fe-no-vlan1-check Enable this option if you want to validate that the frames
received at the far-end do not have a first VLAN tag (i.e.
untagged).
fe-vlan1-priority-check
Enable the far-end verification of the first VLAN priority.
fe-vlan1-dei-check Enable the far-end verification of the first VLAN DEI.
fe-vlan1-id-check Enable the far-end verification of the first VLAN ID.
fe-no-vlan2-check Enable this option if you want to validate that the frames
received at the far-end do not have a second VLAN tag (i.e.
untagged).
fe-vlan2-priority-check
Enable the far-end verification of the second VLAN priority.
fe-vlan2-dei-check Enable the far-end verification of the second VLAN DEI.
fe-vlan2-id-check Enable the far-end verification of the second VLAN ID.
fe-dscp-check Enable the far-end verification of the DSCP value.
fe-vlan1-priority If enabled, this is the first VLAN priority value expected at the
far-end.
fe-vlan1-dei If enabled, this is the first VLAN DEI value expected at the far-
end.
fe-vlan1-id If enabled, this is the first VLAN ID value expected at the far-end.
fe-vlan2-priority If enabled, this is the second VLAN priority value expected at the
far-end.
fe-vlan2-dei If enabled, this is the second VLAN DEI value expected at the far-
end.
fe-vlan2-id If enabled, this is the second VLAN ID value expected at the far-
end.
fe-dscp If enabled, this is the DSCP value expected at the far-end DSCP.
* The value of s-vlan is defined by the global S-VLAN setting.

4.428 Y.1564 Edit Test


y1564 edit test - Change an Y.1564 test configuration
Description:
With y1564 edit test, you can change the parameters of an existing test.

Revision 1 — August 2022 264


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Syntax:
y1564 edit test <test-name> {
{name <test-name>} |
{description <string>} |
{configuration {enable | disable}} |
{step-duration {1-60} |
{performance {enable | disable}} |
{test-duration {1-1440} |
{parallel {enable | disable}}
{burst-sla {enable | disable}} |
{port <port-name>} |
{delay-type {one-way-delay | two-way-delay}} |
{time-sync-mandatory {enable | disable}} |
{packet-type {layer-2| layer-3| l2-accedian| l2-generic}} |
{dst-ipv4-addr <ip-addr>} |
{destination-port <0-65535>} |
{source-port <0-65535>} |
{dscp <0-63>} |
{dst-mac-addr <mac-addr>} |
{y1731-level <0-7>}}+
Parameters:
name The name of the the test.
description Short description of the Y.1564 test.
configuration Enable Y.1564 configuration test.
step-duration Duration of each step during the configuration test in seconds.
performance Enable Y.1564 performance test.
test-duration Duration of each step during the performance test in minutes.
parallel Enable Y.1564 parallel service configuration test.
burst-sla Enable Y.1564 burst SLA test.
port Name of the port to which to send the test traffic.
delay-type Type of delay measurement.
time-sync-mandatory Enable time synchronization verification.
packet-type Used to define specific fields in the test packet.
dst-ipv4-addr The IPv4 destination address.
destination-port The destination port for UDP protocol (0 - 65535).
source-port The source port for UDP protocol (0 - 65535).
dscp The Diff-Serv CodePoint value (0 - 63).
dst-mac-addr This is the Ethernet MAC destination address.
y1731-level Y.1731 Maintenance Entity Group level (0-7).

Revision 1 — August 2022 265


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.429 Y.1564 Generate Report


y1564 generate report - Generate a Y.1564 report file
Description:
This command allows to generate a Y.1564 test report.
Syntax:
y1564 generate report <filename> [report-type {report-type-txt |
report-type-xml}]
Parameters:
filename <string> Unique filename associated with the report.
report-type Report type (XML, TXT) to generate.

4.430 Y.1564 Show Activation


y1564 show activation - Show the Y.1564 test activation
Description:
This command displays the Y.1564 test activation. i.e. its name, status and description. If a
specific test name is specified, a full test activation will be displayed (name, status, service
name, and progression of each test step).
Syntax:
y1564 show activation <filename>
Parameters:
<filename> <string> Unique filename associated with the activation.

4.431 Y.1564 Show Service Configuration


y1564 show service configuration - Show Y.1564 service configuration
Description:
The command displays the configuration for a specific service.
Syntax:
y1564 show service configuration <test-name> <service-id>
Parameters:
<test-name> A unique name used to identify a Y.1564 in the system.
<service-id> A unique id used to identify a service in this test.

Revision 1 — August 2022 266


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

4.432 Y.1564 Show Test Configuration


y1564 show test configuration - Show Y.1564 test configuration
Description:
This command displays the Y.1564 test configuration. Specifying a test name provides detailed
configuration about this test. Otherwise, the command provides a summary of the configured
test.
Syntax:
y1564 show test configuration <test-name>
Parameters:
<test-name> <string> Name of the specific test to display the configuration.

4.433 Y.1564 Start Activation


y1564 start activation - Starts a Y.1564 test
Description:
This command starts the specified Y.1564 test and creates a new report.
Syntax:
y1564 start activation filename <filename> test <report-test>
{ {description <report-desc>}|
{technician <report-tech>} |
{note <report-note>} }+
Parameters:
filename <string> Unique filename for the report.
test <string> Name for the Y.1564 test to run.
description <string> Description for this report.
technician <string> Name of the technician running this test.
note <string> Note associated to this test. This note will be included in
the report.

4.434 Y.1564 Stop Activation


y1564 stop activation - Stop a Y.1564 test
Description:
This command stops the execution of the specified test.
Syntax:
y1564 stop activation filename <filename>

Revision 1 — August 2022 267


CLI Command Guide Skylight Element: GX Version 7.9.4

Parameters:
filename <string> Unique filename where the report will be stored.

4.435 Y.1564 Upload Report


y1564 upload report - Upload a Y.1564 report file
Description:
This command allows to upload a Y.1564 test report to a remote location.
Syntax:
y1564 upload report <filename> <url> [report-type {report-type-txt |
report-type-xml}]
Parameters:
filename <string> Unique filename associated with the report.
url URL to reach the server and directory, e.g.
ftp://username:password@mypc.com
ftps://username:password@192.168.10.10
sftp://username:password@192.168.10.10
tftp://192.168.1.5
scp://username:password@192.168.10.10:/target_directory
The filename of the report will be automatically appended to the
specified URL.
report-type Report type (XML, TXT) to upload to server.

Revision 1 — August 2022 268

You might also like